Description
Management is an art of getting things done with and through others. Management can be defined as, the process of getting things done with the aim of achieving organizational goals effectively and efficiently.
UNIT 1
NATURE AND SIGNIFICANCE OF
MANAGEMENT
Management is an art of getting things done with and through others.
Management can be defined as, the process of getting things done with the aim
of achieving organizational goals effectively and efficiently.
Efficiency and effectiveness
Efficiency means doing the task correctly at minimum cost through optimum
utilization of resources while effectiveness is concerned with end result means
completing the task correctly within stipulated time. Although efficiency and
effectiveness are different yet they are inter related. It is important for
management to maintain a balance between the two.
Example : A business produces targeted 1000 units but at a higher cost is
effective but not efficient. Therefore if the business has to be effective and
efficient then it has to produce targeted 1000 units within cost.
Characteristics of Management
1. Goal oriented Process : It is a goal oriented process, which is
undertaken to achieve already specified and desired objectives by
proper utilization of available resources.
2. Pervasive : Management is universal in nature. It is used in all types of
organisations whether economic, social or political irrespective of its
size, nature and location and at every level.
3. Multidimensional : It is multidimensional as it involves management
of work, people and operations.
4. Continuous : It consists of a series of function and its functions are
being performed by all managers simultaneously. The process of
management continues till an organization exists for attaining its
objectives.
page 1
Business Studies- XII
5. Group Activity : It is a group activity since it involves managing and
coordinating activities of different people as a team to attain the desired
objectives.
6. Dynamic function :It is a dynamic function since it has to adapt
according to need, time and situation of the changing environment. For
example, Mc Donalds made major changes in its ‘Menu’ to survive in
the Indian market.
7. Intangible Force : It is intangible force as it can't be seen but its effects
can be felt in the form of results like whether the objectives are met and
whether people are motivated or not and there is orderliness and
coordination in the work environment.
Objectives of management
(A) Organizational objectives of Survival (Earning enough revenues to
cover cost); profit (To cover cost and risk); & Growth (To improve its
future prospects).
(B) Social objectives of giving benefits to society like using environmental
friendly practices and giving employment to disadvantaged sections of
society etc. Example :- TISCO, ITC, and Asian Paints.
(C) Personal Objectives because diverse personal objectives of people
working in the organization have to be reconciled with organizational
objectives.
n
n
a i l n
P g
g
n
i
f
f
a
t
S
O
r
g
a
n
i
s
i
n
g
Management
is a Continuous
Process
page 2
Business Studies- XII
Importance of Management
(1) Achieving Group Goals : Management creates team work and
coordination in the group. Managers give common direction to the
individual efforts in achieving the overall goals of the organization.
(2) Increases Efficiency : Management increases efficiency by using
resources in the best possible manner to reduce cost and increase
productivity.
(3) Creates Dynamic organization : Management helps the employees to
overcome their resistance to change and adapt as per changing situation
to ensure its survival and growth.
(4) Achieving personal objectives : Management helps the individuals to
achieve their personal goals while working towards organizational
objectives.
(5) Development of Society : Management helps in the development of
society by producing good quality products, creating employment
opportunities and adopting new technology.
Management as an Art
Art refers to skillful and personal application of existing knowledge to
achieve desired results. It can be acquired through study, observation
and experience. The features of art as follows :
(1) Existence of theoretical knowledge : In every art systematic and
organized study material should be available compulsorily to acquire
theoretical knowledge.
(2) Personalised application : The use of basic knowledge differs from
person to person and thus, art is a very personalised concept.
(3) Based on practice and creativity : Art involves the creative practice of
existing theoretical knowledge.
In management also a huge volume of literature and books are available
on different aspects of management. Every manager has his own unique
style of managing things and people. He uses his creativity in applying
management techniques and his skills improve with regular application.
Since all the features of art are present in management so it can be
called an art.
page 3
Business Studies- XII
Management as a Science
Science is a systematised body of knowledge that is based on general
truths which can be tested anywhere, anytime. The features of Science
are as follows :
(1) Systematized body of knowledge : Science has a systematized body of
knowledge based on principles and experiments.
(2) Principles based on experiments and observation : Scientific
principles are developed through experiments and observation.
(3) Universal validity : Scientific principles have universal validity and
application.
Management has systematic body of knowledge and its principles are
developed over a period of time based on repeated experiments &
observations, which are universally applicable.
As the principles of management are not as exact as the principles of
pure science, so it may be called an inexact science. The prominence of
human factor in the management on process makes it a Social Science.
Management as Profession :
Profession means an occupation for which specialized knowledge and
skills are required and entry is restricted. The main features of
profession are as follows :
(1) Well defined body of knowledge : All the professions are based on
well defined body of knowledge.
(2) Restricted entry : The entry in every profession is restricted through
examination or through some minimum educational qualification.
(3) Professional Associations : All professions are affiliated to a
professional association which regulates entry and frames code of
conduct relating to the profession.
(4) Ethical code of conduct : All professions are bound by a code of
conduct which guides the behaviours of its members.
(5) Service Motive : The main aim of a profession is to serve its clients.
page 4
Business Studies- XII
Management does not fulfill all the features of a profession and thus it is not a
full fledged profession because anybody can proclaim to be a manager as no
prescribed compulsory educational degree or license is required. Besides there
are not formal ethical codes which are required to be observed.
Levels of Management : Top, Middle and Operational levels.
“ Levels of management” means different categories of managers, from
the lowest to the highest on the basis of their relative responsibilities, authority
and status.
Top Level
Consists of Chairperson, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Operating
Officer or equivalent and their team.
Chief task is to integrate and to coordinate the various activities of the
business, framing policies, formulating organisational goals &
strategies.
Levels of management
Top Level
Framing plans
& policies
Middle Level
Interpretation of plans
Lower Level
Execution and implementation of plans
R
e
s
p
o
n
s
i
b
i
l
i
t
y
/
A
c
c
o
u
n
t
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
A
u
t
h
o
r
o
t
y
page 5
Business Studies- XII
Middle Level
Consist of Divisional or Departmental heads, Plant Superintendents and
Operation Managers etc.
Main tasks are to interpret the policies of the top management to ensure
the availability of resources to implement policies, to coordinate all
activities, ensure availability of necessary personnel & assign duties
and responsibilities to them.
Lower Level / Supervisory Level
Consists of Foremen and supervisor etc.
Main task is to ensure actual implementation of the policies as per
directions, bring workers’ grievances before the management &
maintain discipline among the workers.
Functions of Management : Planning, Organising, Staffing, Directing and
Controlling are the main functions of management.
Planning is deciding in advance what to do in future and how to do it.
Organising is to assign duties, grouping tasks, establishing authority and
allocating resources required to carry out a specific plan.
Staffing is finding the right people for the right job.
Directing is leading, influencing and motivating employees to perform the
tasks assigned to them.
Controlling is monitoring the organizational performance towards the
attainment of the organizational goals.
Coordination : (The essence of Management) : Coordination is the force
which synchronizes all the functions of management and activities of different
departments. Lack of coordination results in overlapping, duplication, delays
and chaos.
page 6
Business Studies- XII
Features of Coordination :
1. Coordination integrates group efforts: It integrates diverse business
activities into purposeful group activity ensuring that all people work in
one direction to achieve organizational goals.
2. Coordination ensures unity of action : It directs the activities of
different departments and employees towards achievement of common
goals and brings unity in individual efforts.
3. Coordination is a continuous process : It is not a specific activity rather
it is required at all levels, in all departments till the organization
continues its operations.
4. Coordination is all pervasive function : It is universal in nature. It
synchronizes the activities of all levels and departments as they are
interdependent to maintain organizational balance.
5. Coordination is the responsibility of all managers : It is equally
important at all the three-top, middle and lower levels of management.
Thus it is the responsibility of all managers that they make efforts to
establish coordination.
6. Coordination is a deliberate function : Coordination is never established
by itself rather it is a conscious effort on the part of every manager.
Cooperation is voluntary effort of employees to help one another.
Effective coordination can not be achieved without cooperation of
group members.
Plannning
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g
Coordination
D
i
r
e
c
t
i
n
g
S
t
a
f
f
in
g
O
r
g
a
n
i
s
i
n
g
page 7
Business Studies- XII
Important Questions :
1 Mark Questions ( To be answered in one word or one sentence)
1. In order to be successful an organization must change its goals
according to the needs to the environment. Which characteristic of
management is highlighted in the statement ? (Answer : It is a dynamic
function).
2. To meet the objectives of the firm the management of Angora Limited
offers employment to physically challenged persons. Identify the
organizational objective it is trying to achieve (Answer : Social
Objective.)
3. Management of any organization strives to attain different objectives.
Enumerate any two such objectives.
4. Give any two characteristics of management.
5. Management is multidimensional. Enumerate any two dimensions of
management.
6. Managerial activities are performed in all types of organization in all
departments at all levels. Which management characteristic is
highlighted here ? (Answer : It is all pervasive)
7. Your grandfather has retired where he was responsible for
implementing the plans developed by the top management. At which
level of management was he working? State one more function of this
level of management. (Answer : Middle level management)
8. List any two social objectives of management.
9. Your grandfather has retired as a Director of manufacturing company.
At which level of management was he working? Different functions are
performed at this level. State any one such function. (Answer : Top
level of management)
10. What is meant by 'Management' ?
11. Pizza Hut keeps introducing new varieties of pizza in its menu. Which
characteristic of management is highlighted in this ?
12. Which ‘function’ of management binds the all other functions?
page 8
Business Studies- XII
13. “In an organization, the employees are happy and satisfied, there is no
chaos and the effect of management is noticeable.” Which
characteristic of management is highlighted by this statement ?
3/4 Marks Questions (To be answered in about 50 to 70 words)
1. Explain how Management is an art.
2. Identify and explain the nature of management when it is said to be a
systemaised body of knowledge that explains certain general truths.
3. 'Coordination is the essence of management.' Explain
5/6 marks Questions (To be answered in about 150 words)
1. Management is a Profession like Accounting, Medicine and Law as it
also has a well defined body of knowledge. Yet management does not
qualify to be a full fledged profession. Why? (Hint : No formal
qualification is prescribed to enter management, no code of conduct is
prescribed).
2. Success of an organization largely depends upon its management.
Explain any five reasons to justify the statement. (Hint : Give five
points of Importance of management).
page 9
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 2
PRINCIPLES OE MANAGEMENT
Concept of Principles of Management :
Principles of Management are the broad and general guidelines for managerial
decision making. They are different from principles of science as they deal
with human behaviour. They are different from techniques of management as
techniques are methods whereas principles are guidelines to action and
decision making. Principles of management are different from values which are
formed as generally accepted behaviour in society and are having moral
coordination whereas principles are formed through research having technical
nature.
The management principles are derived from observation, analysis,
experimental studies and personal experiences of the managers.
Nature of Principles of Management
The nature of principles of management can be described in the following
points :
(1) Universal applicability i.e. they can be applied in all types of
organizations, business as well as non-business, small as well as large
enterprises.
(2) General Guidelines : They are general guidelines to action and
decision making however they do not provide readymade solutions as
the business environment is ever changing or dynamic.
(3) Formed by practice and experimentation : They are developed after
thorough research work on the basis of experiences of managers.
(4) Flexible Which can be adapted and modified by the practicing
managers as per the demands of the situations.
(5) Mainly Behavioural : Since the principles aim at influencing complex
human behaviour they are behavioural in nature.
(6) Cause and Effect relationship : They intend to establish relationship
between cause & effect so that they can be used in similar situations.
(7) Contingent - Their applicability depends upon the prevailing situation
page 10
Business Studies- XII
at a particular point of time. According to Terry, " Management
principles are 'capsules' of selected management wisdom to be used
carefully and discretely".
Significance of the Principles of Management
The significance of principles of management can be derived from their
utility which can be understood from the following points :
1. Providing managers with useful insights into reality :-
Management principles guide managers to take right decision at right
time by improving their knowledge, ability and understanding of
various managerial situations and circumstances.
2. Optimum utilization of resources and effective administration :
Management principles facilitate optimum use of resources by
coordinating the physical, financial and human resources. They also
help in better administration by discouraging personal prejudices and
adopting an objective approach.
3. Scientific decisions : Decisions based on management principles tend
to be more realistic, balanced and free from personal bias.
4. Meeting the changing environmental requirements : Management
principles provide an effective and dynamic leadership and help the
organizations to implement the changes.
5. Fulfilling social responsibility : Principles of management not only help
in achieving organizational goals but also guide managers in
performing social responsibilities. Example : “Equity” and “Fair”
remuneration.
6. Management training, education and research : Management principles
are helpful in identifying the areas in which existing and future
managers should be trained. They also provide the basis for future
research.
page 11
Business Studies- XII
Fayol’s Principles of Management
About Henry Fayol :-
Henry Fayol (1841-1925) got degree in Mining Engineering and joined
French Mining Company in 1860 as an Engineer . He rose to the position of
Managing Director in 1988. When the company was on the verge of
bankruptcy. He accepted the challenge and by using rich and broad
administrative experience, he turned the fortune of the company. For his
contributions, he is well known as the “Father of General Management”.
Principles of Management developed by Fayol
1. Division of work : Work is divided in small tasks / job and each work is
done by a trained specialist which leads to greater efficiency,
specialisation, increased productivity and reduction of unnecessary
wastage and movements
.2. Authority and Responsibility : Authority means power to take decisions
and responsibility means obligation to complete the job assigned on
time. Authority and responsibility should go hand in hand. Mere
responsibility without authority makes an executive less interested in
discharging his duties. Similarly giving authority without assigning
responsibility makes him arrogant and there is fear of misuse of power.
3. Discipline : It is the obedience to organizational rules by the
subordinates. Discipline requires good supervisors at all levels, clear
and fair agreements and judicious application of penalties.
4. Unity of Command : It implies that every worker should receive orders
and instructions from one superior only, otherwise it will create
confusion, conflict, disturbance and overlapping of activities.
Unity of Command Multiplicity of Command
Superior
Subordinate
Superior 1 Superior 2 Superior 3
Subordinate
page 12
Business Studies- XII
5. Unity of Direction : Each group of activities having the same objective
must have one head and one plan. This ensures unity of action and
coordination.
Presence of Unity of Direction Lack of Unity of Direction
6. Subordination of Individual Interest to General Interest : The interest of
an organization should take priority over the interest of any one
individual employee.
7. Remuneration of Employees : The overall pay and compensation should
be fair to both employees and the organization. The wages should
encourage the workers to work more and better.
8. Centralisation and Decentralisation : Centralisation means
concentration of decisions making authority in few hands at top level.
Decentralisation means evenly distribution of power at every level of
management. Both should be balanced as no organization can be
completely centralised or completely decentralised.
9. Scalar Chain : The formal lines of authority between superiors and
subordinates from the highest to the lowest ranks is known as scalar
chain. This chain should not be violated but in emergency employees at
same level can contact through Gang Plank by informing their
immediate superiors.
A
B E
C
F
D
G
Gang Plank
page 13
Business Studies- XII
10. Order : A place for everything and everyone and everything and
everyone should be in its designated place. People & material must be
in suitable places at appropriate time for maximum efficiency.
11. Equity : The working environment of any organization should be free
from all forms of discrimination (religion, language, caste, sex, belief
or nationality) and principles of justice and fair play should be
followed. No worker should be unduly favoured or punished.
12. Stability of Personnel : After being selected and appointed after due
and rigorous procedure, the selected person should be kept at the post
for a minimum period decided to show results.
13. Initiative : Workers should be encouraged to develop and carry out
their plan for improvements. Initiative means taking the first step with
self motivation. It is thinking out and executing the plan.
14. Espirit De Corps : Management should promote team spirit, unity and
harmony among employees. Management should promote a team work.
Difference between Unity of command and Unity of direction
Basis Unity of Command Unity of Direction
(1) Meaning One subordinate should Each group of
receive orders from & activities having
should be responsible same objective
to only one superior must have one
head and one .
(2) Aim Prevents dual Prevents
subordination. overlapping of
activities.
(3) Implications Affects an individual Affects the entire
employee. organization.
Taylor’s Scientific Management :
Fredrick Winslow Taylor (1856-1915) was a person who within a very short
duration (1878-1884) rose from ranks of an ordinary apprentice to chief
engineer in Midvale Steel Company, U.S.A.. Taylor conducted a number of
experiments and came to conclusion that workers were producing much less
than the targeted standard task. Also, both the parties - Management and
page 14
Business Studies- XII
workers are hostile towards each other. He gave a number of suggestions to
solve this problem and correctly propounded the theory of scientific
management to emphasize the use of scientific approach in managing an
enterprise instead of hit and trial method. For his contributions, he is well
known as the “ Father of the Scientific Management”
Scientific Management attempts to eliminate wastes to ensure maximum
production at minimum cost.
Principles of Scientific Management :-
(1) Science, not rule of Thumb : There should be scientific study and
analysis of each element of a job in order to replace the old rule of
thumb approach or hit and miss method. We should be constantly
experimenting to develop new techniques which make the work much
simpler, easier and quicker.
(2) Harmony, Not discord : It implies that there should be mental
revolution on part of managers and workers in order to respect each
other's role and eliminate any class conflict to realize organizational
objectives.
(3) Cooperation not individualism : It is an extension of the Principle of
Harmony not discord whereby constructive suggestions of workers
should be adopted and they should not go on strike as both management
and workers share responsibility and perform together.
(4) Development of each and every person to his or her greatest
Efficiency and Prosperity : It implies development of competencies of
all persons of an organization after their scientific selection and
assigning work suited to their temperament and abilities. This will
increase the productivity by utilizing the skills of the workers to the
fullest possible extent.
Techniques of Scientific Management
l) Functional Foremanship : Functional forernanship is a technique in
which planning and execution are separated. There are eight types of
specialized and professionals four each under planning and execution
who keep a watch on all workers to extract optimum performance.
page 15
Business Studies- XII
Planning Incharges :
1. Route Clerk to specify the exact sequence and route of production.
2. Instruction card clerk is responsible for drafting instructions for the
workers.
3. Time and cost clerk to prepare time and cost sheet for the job.
4. Shop Disciplinarian to ensure discipline and enforcement of rules and
regulations among the workers.
Production Incharges :-
1. Gang boss is responsible for keeping tools and machines ready for
operation.
2. Speed boss is responsible for timely and accurate completion of job.
3. Repair boss to ensure proper working conditions of tools and
machines.
4. Inspector to check quality of work.
2) Standardisation and Simplification of work : Standardization refers
to developing standards for every business activity whereas
Simplification refers to eliminating superfluous varieties of product or
service. It results in savings of cost of labour, machines and tools. It
Planning Incharge
Workman
Factory Manager
Instruction
Card clerk
Route
clerk
Time&cost
clerk
Disciplinarian
Speed
Boss
Gang
Boss
Inspector Repair
Boss
Production Incharge
page 16
Business Studies- XII
leads to fuller utilization of equipment and increase in turnover.
(3) Method Study : The objective of method study is to find out one best
way of doing the job to maximise efficiency in the use of materials,
machinery, manpower and capital.
(4) Motion Study: It is the science of eliminating wastefulness resulting
from using unnecessary, ill-directed and inefficient motions by workers
and machines to identify best method of work.
(5) Time study : It determines the standard time taken to perform a well
defined job. The objective of time study is to determine the number of
workers to be employed, frame suitable incentive schemes & determine
labour costs.
(6) Fatigue study : Fatigue study seeks to determine time and frequency of
rest intervals in completing a task. The rest interval will enable workers
to regain their lost stamina thereby avoiding accidents, rejections and
industrial sickness.
7. Differential piece wage system : This system links wages and
productivity. The standard output per day is established and two piece
rates are used : higher for those who achieve upto and more than
standard output i.e. efficient workers and lower for inefficient and slow
workers. Thus, efficient workers will be rewarded & inefficient will be
motivated to improve their performance.
? For example : Standard task is 10 units. Rates are :- Rs 50 per unit for
producing 10 units or more and Rs 40 per unit for producing less than
10 units
? .Worker A produces 11 Units; he gets Rs 550 (11 units x 50 per unit)
? Worker B produces 09 units; he gets Rs 360 (9 units x 40 per unit)
? This difference of Rs 190 will motivate B to perform better.
8. Mental revolution : It involves a complete change in mental outlook
and attitude of workers and management towards one another from
competition to cooperation. The management should create pleasant
working conditions & workers should work with devotion and loyalty.
Instead of fighting over distribution of profits, they must focus attention
on increasing it.
page 17
Business Studies- XII
Fayol versus Taylor :
While the work of Taylor concerned shop floor, the work of Fayol
concerned General Principles applicable to all types of situations. So,
their principles are mutually complementary to each other.
Important Questions
1 Mark questions ( to be answered in one word or one sentence)
1. Why is that management principles are universal ?
2. How are management principles derived ?
3. Which principles of Fayol is violated in Taylor's Functional
Foremanship?
4. A manager should replace 'I' with 'We' in all his conversations to
encourage team spirit. Identify the principle of management
emphasized here.
5. Give one consequence of violating principle of remuneration.
6. Which technique of Taylor insists on paying higher wages to efficient
workers ?
7. Name the device which permits direct communication between
employees working at same level.
8. Which technique of Taylor insists on using the most optimum way of
doing a job.
9. What is meant by 'Principles of Management'?
10. Which principle of Taylor suggests that the job performed should be
based on scientific enquiry and not on intuition ?
3/4 marks questions :
1. Explain the following principles of management:-
a) Equity
b) Remuneration of Employees.
page 18
Business Studies- XII
2. In your school, you observe that books, are kept in office, chalks in the
library and office records in the staffroom. How will this affect the
achievement of school objectives ? Which aspect of management is
lacking and why ? As a manager, what steps will you take to rectify the
shortcomings ?
5/6 Marks Question (to be answered in about 150 words)
1. Explain any two techniques of Taylor's Scientific Management.
2. Explain the following principles of Fayol with example.
a) Unity of Command
b) Unity of Direction
c) Order
page 19
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 3
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Business environment can be defined as those forces, individuals and
institutions who have the ability to influence the working of an organisation.
Features of Business Environment :
(l) Totality of external forces : Business environment is the sum total of
all the forces/factors external to a business firm.
(2) Specific and General forces : Business environment includes both
specific and general forces. Specific forces include investors,
competitors, customers etc who influence business firm directly while
general forces include social, political, economic, legal and
technological conditions which affect a business firm indirectly.
(3) Inter-relatedness : All the forces/factors of a business environment are
closely interrelated. For example, increased awareness of health care
has raised the demand for organic food and roasted snacks.
(4) Dynamic : Business environment is dynamic in nature which keeps on
changing with the change in technology, consumer's fashion and tastes
etc.
(5) Uncertainty : Business environment is uncertain as it is difficult to
predict the future environmental changes and their impact with full
accuracy.
(6) Complexity : Business environment is complex which is easy to
understand in parts separately but it is difficult to understand in totality.
(7) Relativity : Business environment is a relative concept whose impact
differs from country to country, region to region and firm to firm. For
example, a shift of preference from soft drinks to juices will be
welcomed as an opportunity by juice making companies while a threat
to soft drink manufacturers.
IMPORTANCE OF BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
l. Identification of opportunities to get first mover advantage.:
page 20
Business Studies- XII
Understanding of business environment helps an organisation in
identifying advantageous opportunities and getting their benefits prior
to competitors, thus reaping the benefits of being a pioneer.
2. Identification of threats : Correct knowledge of business environment
helps an organisation to identify those threats which may adversely
affect its operations. For example, Bajaj Auto made considerable
improvements in its two wheelers when Honda & other companies
entered the auto industry.
3. Tapping useful resources : Business environment makes available
various resources such as capital, labour, machines, raw material etc to
a business firm. In order to know the availability of resources and
making them available on time at economical price, knowledge of
business environment is necessary.
4. Coping with Rapid changes : Continuous study/scanning of business
environment helps in knowing the changes which are taking place and
thus they can be faced effectively.
5. Assistance in planning and policy formulation : Understanding and
analysis of business environment helps an organisation in planning &
policy formulation. For example, ITC Hotels planned new hotels in
India after observing boom in tourism sector.
6. Helps in Improving performance : Correct analysis and continuous
monitoring of business environment helps an organisation in improving
its performance.
Components of Business Environment
Internal / Specific Environment
- Customers
- Owners and investors
- Suppliers
- Creditors
- Employees and trade union
- Competitors
External/ General Environment
-
Economic Environment
-
Social Environment
-
Political Environment
-
Technological Environment
-
Legal Environment
page 21
Business Studies- XII
DIMENSIONS / COMPONENTS OF BUSINESS
ENVIRONMENT
1. Economic Environment : It has immediate and direct economic
impact on a business. Rate of interest, inflation rate, change in the
income of people, monetary policy, price level etc. are some economic
factors which could affect business firms. Economic environment may
offers opportunities to a firm or it may put constraints.
2. Social Environment : It includes various social forces such as
customs, beliefs, literacy rate, educational levels, lifestyle, values etc.
Changes in social environment affect an organisation in the long run.
Example : Now a days people are paying more attention towards their
health as a result of which demand for mineral water, diet coke etc has
increased while demand of tobacco, fatty food products has decreased.
3. Technological Environment : lt provides new and advance ways/
techniques of production. A businessman must closely monitor the
technological changes taking place in the industry as it helps in facing
competition and improving quality of the product. For Example, Digital
watches in place of traditional watches, artificial fabrics in place of
traditional cotton and silk fabrics, booking of railway tickets on internet
etc.
4. Political Environment : Changes in political situation also affect
business organisations. Political stability builds confidence among
business community while political instability and bad law & order
situation may bring uncertainty in business activities. Ideology of the
political party, attitude of government towards business, type of
government-single party or coalition government affects the business
Example : Bangalore and Hyderabad have become the most popular
locations for IT due to supportive political climate.
5. Legal Environment : lt constitutes the laws and legislations passed by
the Government, administrative orders, court judgements, decisions of
various commissions and agencies. Businessmen have to act according
to various legislations and their knowledge is very necessary. Example
: Advertisement of Alcoholic products is prohibited and it is
compulsory to give statutory warning on advertisement of cigarettes.
Economic Environment in India :
As a part of economic reforms, the Government of India announced
page 22
Business Studies- XII
New Economic Policy in July 1991 for taking out the country out of
economic difficulty and speeding up the development of the country.
Main features of NEP, 1991 are as follows :
1. Only six industries were kept under licencing scheme.
2. The role of public sector was limited only to four industries.
3. Disinvestment was carried out in many public sector enterprises.
4. Foreign capital/investment policy was liberalised and in many
sectors 100% direct foreign investment was allowed.
5. Automatic permission was given for signing technology
agreements with foreign companies.
6. Foreign investment promotion board (FIPB) was setup to
promote & bring foreign investment in India.
7. Various benefits were offered to small scale industries.
The Main objective of New Industrial Policy was to promote
Liberalization, Privatization and Globalization.
1. Liberalisation : It means freeing of Indian Industry from all
unnecessary government controls and restrictions. Abolishing licensing
requirements; Freedom in deciding the scale of business; removals of
restriction on movements of goods and service; reduction in tax rates;
freedom in fixing prices; simplifying procedures; making it easier to
attract foreign investment.
2. Privatization : Giving greater role to private sector in the nation
building process and reduced role of public sector; Disinvestment in
many Public Sector undertaking etc, Setting up of BIFR to revive sick
units in public sector enterprises suffering losses. It aimed at improving
efficiency and performance of government undertakings, reducing
budgetary deficit & better utilization of national resources.
3. Globalization : lt means integration of various economies of the world
leading to the emergence of cohesive global economy. The measures
taken by the Government include trade liberalization which includes
import liberalization; Export Promotion through rationalization of tariff
structure; Foreign exchange liberalization; increased interaction among
global economies under the aegis (protection/support) of World Trade
page 23
Business Studies- XII
Organization. It resulted in addition of Export duty, reduction of
import.
IMPACT OF GOVERNMENT POLICY CHANGES ON
BUSINESS AND INDUSTRY
1. Increasing Competition : Delicencing and entry of foreign firms in
Indian market is increased the level of competition for Indian firms.
2. More Demanding Customers : Now customers are more aware and
they keep maximum information of the market as the result of which
now market is customer/buyer oriented. Now products are produced
keeping in mind the demands of the customers.
3. Rapid Changing Technological Environment : Rapid Technological
advancement has changed/ improved the production process as a result
of which maximum production is possible at minimum cost but it leads
to tough challenges in front of small firms.
4. Necessity for change : After New Industrial Policy the market forces
(demand & supply) are changing at a very fast rate. Change in the
various components of business environment has made it necessary for
the business firms to modify their policies & operations from time to
time.
5. Need for Developing Human resources : The changing market
conditions of today require people with higher competence and greater
commitment, hence there is a need for developing human resources
which could increase their effectiveness and efficiency.
6. Market orientation : Earlier selling concept was famous in the market
now its place is taken by the marketing concept. Today firms produce
those goods & services which are required by the customers. Marketing
research, educational advertising, after sales services have become
more significant.
7. Reduction ln budgetary Support to Public Sector : The budgetary
support given by the government to the public sector is reducing and
thus the public sector has to survive and grow by utilising their own
resources efficiently.
page 24
Business Studies- XII
IMPORTANT QUESTIONS
1 Mark Questions (To be answered in 1 word or 1 sentence)
1. Govt. of India is seriously thinking to allow oil marketing public sector
undertaking to fix their own price for diesel. Which economic reform is
the reason of this change in Governments' Policy (Answer:
Liberalization)
2. Just after declaration of Lok Sabha Elections 2009 results, the Bombay
stock exchange's price index (Sensex) rose by 2100 points in a day.
Identify the environmental factor which led to this rise. (Answer :
Political Environment)
3. State any two impacts of change of 'Governments policy on business
and industry.
4. The understanding of business environment helps the managers to
identify threats. What is meant by threats here? (Answer: Threats refer
to the external environment trends and changes that will hinder a firm's
performance)
5. Business environment includes both specific and general forces. List
any four specific forces. (Answer : Suppliers, investors, customers and
competions).
6. The understanding of business environment helps the managers to
identify Opportunities . What is meant by Opportunities here? (Answer-
Opportunities refer to positive changes and trends that will help the
business to improve its performance.)
7. Business Environment includes both specific and general forces. List
any four general forces. (Answer: Social, Economic, Political, Legal
and Technological).
3/4 Marks Questions (To be answered in about 50 to 75 words)
1. Explain any three features of Business Environment.
2. What changes have been made in Industrial policy in recent past?
3. Explain Increasing Competition and More demanding customers as
impact of Government policy changes on Business and Industry.
page 25
Business Studies- XII
5 Marks Questions (To be answered about 150 words)
1. Identify the type of dimension of environment to which the following
are related :
i) Banks reducing interest rate on housing loans.
ii) An increasing number of working women.
iii) Booking of air tickets through internet.
iv) Alcohol beverages are prohibited to be advertised on Door
Darshan.
v) A stable government has built up confidence among the firms to
invest in big project.
Answer :
i) Economic Environment,
ii) Social Environment
iii) Technological Environment
iv) Legal Environment
v) Political Environment
2. Explain the various dimensions of business environment with
examples.
3. Explain by giving any five reasons, why understanding of business
environment is important for managers.
page 26
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 4
PLANNING
Concept-
Planning is deciding in advance what to do, how to do when to do, and
who is to do it. Planning bridges the gap from where we are to where
we want to go. lt is one of the basic managerial functions. Planning
involves setting objectives and developing appropriate courses of action
to achieve these objectives. Thus, it is closely connected with creativity
and innovation.
Importance of Planning :-
1. Planning provides directions : By stating in advance how work is to
be done planning provides direction for action. If there was no
planning, employees would be working in different directions and the
organisation would not be able to achieve its goals efficiently.
2. Planning reduces the risk of uncertainty :- Planning is an activity
which enables a manager to look ahead, anticipate change, consider the
impact of change and develop appropriate responses.
3. Planning reduces wasteful activities :- Planning serves as the basis of
coordinating the activities and efforts of different departments and
individuals whereby useless and redundant activities are minimised.
4 Planning promotes innovative ideas : Planning is the first function of
management. Managers get the opportunity to develop new ideas and
new ideas can take the shape of concrete plans.
5. Planning facilitates decision making : Under planning targets are laid
down. The manager has to evaluate each alternative and select the most
viable option.
6. Planning establishes standards for controlling :- Planning provides
the standards against which the actual performance can be measured
and evaluated. Control is blind without planning. Thus planning
provides the basis for control.
page 27
Business Studies- XII
Limitations of Planning :-
1. Planning leads to rigidity : Planning discourages individual initiative
& creativity. The managers do not make changes according to changing
business environment. They stop taking or giving suggestions and new
ideas. Thus detailed planning may create a rigid framework in the
organisation.
2. Planning may not work in dynamic environment : Planning is based
on anticipation of future happenings and since future is uncertain and
dynamic therefore, the future anticipations are not always true.
4. Planning involves huge costs : When plans are drawn up, huge cost is
involved in their formulation.
5. Planning is time consuming : Sometimes plans to be drawn up take so
much of time that there is not much time left for their implementation.
6. Planning does not guarantee success : The success of an enterprise is
possible only when plans are properly drawn and implemented.
Sometimes managers depend on previously tried successful plans, but it
is not always true that a plan which has worked before will work
effectively again.
Planning Process :-
1. Setting Objectives : The first and foremost step is setting objectives.
Objectives may be set for the entire organisation and each
department.2. Developing premises : Planning premises are the
assumptions about the likely shape of events in future. lt forecasts the
obstacles, problems or limitations in the path of the effective planning
because of which the plans may deviate. Planning premises supply
relevant facts & information relating to future.
3. Identifying alternative courses of action :- Once objectives are set
and premises are developed. Then the next step would be to act upon
them. All the alterative courses of action should be identified.
4. Evaluating alternative Courses : The next step is to be weigh pros
and cons of each alternative. Each course will have many variables
which have to be weighed against each other.
5. Selecting an alternative :- After comparison and evaluation, the best
alternative is chosen for reaching organisation objectives. On the basis
page 28
Business Studies- XII
of merits, demerits, resources and consequences, the best plan has to be
adopted, which must be the most feasible, profitable and with least
negative consequences.
6. Implementing the plan : Once the plans are developed they are put
into action. Successful implementation of the plan ensures
understanding and whole-hearted cooperation of all the employees.
7. Follow up action : To see whether plans are being implemented,
activities are performed according to schedule. In case of any
devitations, changes are made in the plans.
Types of Plan : -
Plan
A Plan is a specific action proposed to help the organization achieve its
objectives. It is a document that outlines how goals are going to be met.
The importance of developing plans is evident from the fact that there
may be more than one means of reaching a particular goal. So with the
help of logical plans, objectives of an organization could be achieved
easily.
SINGLE USE PLAN
A Single use plan in a business refers to plan developed for a one-time
project or event that has one specific objective. It applies to activities
that do not recur or repeat. It is specifically designed to achieve a
particular goal. Such plan is developed to meet the needs of a unique
situation. The length of a single-use plan differs greatly depending on
the project in question, as a single event plan may only last one day
while a single project may last one week or months. For example, an
outline for an advertising campaign. After the campaign runs its course,
the short term plan will lose its relevance except as a guide for creating
future plans.
Types of Single Use Plan : -
1) Program :- A program is a single use plan containing detailed
statements about a project outlining the objectives, policies, procedures,
rules, tasks, physical & human resources required to implement any
course of action.
2. Budget :- A budget is a statement of expected result expressed in
numerical terms for a definite period of time in the future.
page 29
Business Studies- XII
STANDING PLANS
Standing plans are used over and over again because they focus on
organizational situations that occur repeatedly. They are usually made
once and retain their value over a period of years while undergoing
revisions and updates. That is why they are also called repeated use
plans. For example, Businessman plans to establish a new business.
Entrepreneur drafts business plan before opening the doors to their
business, and they can use their plan to guide their efforts for years into
the future.
Types of Standing Plans : -
l. Objective : Objectives can be said to be the desired future
position that the management would like to reach.
2. Strategy : A strategy refers to a future decision defining the
organizations' direction and scope in the long run.
3. Policy : Policies are general statements that guide thinking or
channelize energies towards a particular direction. "We don't sell on
Credit" is the example of sales policy.
4. Procedure : Procedures are routine steps on how to carry out
activities.
5. Rules are specific statement that tell what is to be done and what
not to be done. For example 'No Smoking' is a rule.
6. Methods are standardized ways or manner in which a task
has to be performed considering the objectives.
page 30
Business Studies- XII
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN SINGLE USE AND STANDING PLANS
BASIS OF SINGLE USE PLANS STANDING PLANS
DIFFERENCE
1. Meaning A single-use plan in a business A standing plan in a business refers
refers to plans developed for a to plans developed for using over and
one-time project or event that has over again because they focus on
one specific objective. organizational situations that occur
repeatedly.
2. Objective Single use plan is developed to Standing plan however is developed
carry out a course of action that is for activities that occur regularly over
not likely to be repeated in future a period of time.
time.
3. Scope Single use plans generally Standing plans generally encompass a
encompass a narrow scope wider scope involving more than one
targeting a specific project or department or business function.
event.
4. Stability Single use plans are discarded Standing plans are relatively stable
when the situation, project or and used over and over again with
event is over. necessary modifications or updations.
5. Example Budget for Annual General Recruitment and selection procedure
Meeting of shareholders. for a particular post in the company.
1 Mark Questions
1. Define planning.
2. Explain Procedures.
3. Define Rules.
4. Write the meaning of Budgets.
5. Write one difference between Policies & Procedure.
6.` One of the function of management is considered as base for all
other functions. Name that function;
7. Name the types of plan in which the movement of competitors
is considered.
8. “No Smoking in the Work shop”. This statement is related to
which type of plan.
page 31
Business Studies- XII
9. “We do not sell on credit”. This statement is related to which
type of plan.
10. Write the meaning of strategies.
11. What do you understand single use plan?
12. What do you understand by standing plans?
3 and 4 Marks Questions
1. ‘Planning is the heart of management’. How?
2. 'Control is blind without planning’. How?
3. How planning provides base to controlling?
4. Write the difference between rules and policies.
5. Write the difference between Policies & Procedures.
6. XYZ Limited follows a standard procedure for recruiting Production
Manager for its company. Which type of plan is it? Justify your answer.
(1+2= 3 Marks)
7. ABC Limited prepares budget for its Annual General Meeting for
Financial Year 2013-14. What kind of plan is it? Justify your
answer. (1+2= 3 Marks)
5 -6 Marks Questions :-
l. Explain any four types of plans.
2. “lnspite of best efforts of managers sometimes Planning fails to achieve
desired result due to its limitation”. Explain.
3. “Planning keeps the organisation on the right path.” In this reference
explain the importance of planning.
4. Differentiate between Single use plans and Standing plans.
5. Explain the process of planning.
page 32
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 5
ORGANISING
Meaning of Organising :-
After laying down the plans and objectives the next function to be
performed by the managers is organising. It determines what activities and
resources are required and decides who will do a particular task, where it
will be done and when it will be done.
Thus organising means establishing relationship between various
factors of production and it is concerned with establishing relationship
amongst jobs, sections, departments & positions.
'Organising is the process of identifying and grouping the work to be
performed, defining and delegating responsibility and authority and
establishing relationships for the purpose of enabling people to work most
effectively together in accomplishing objectives.'
Steps Involved in the Process of Organising :-
1. ldentification and Division of Work :- lt involves identification and
division of total work to be done into specific activities (called jobs) in
accordance with previously determined plans. By dividing the work, the
burden of work can be shared among the employees. It facilitates
specialisation of work & skills. Duplication of work can be avoided by
dividing the work into manageable activities.
2. Departmentalisation :- The second step in organising is to combine or
group similar or related jobs into larger units called departments, divisions
or sections. They can be grouped on the basis of functions , products,
customers and territories etc.
Departmentalisation is done to achieve coordination & to facilitate unity
of efforts.
3. Assignment of duties :- Once departments have been formed each of
them is placed under the charge of an individual called departmental head
(eg., production manager, finance manager etc.) Jobs are then allocated to
the members of each department according to their skills and
qualifications.
page 33
Business Studies- XII
4. Establishing Reporting Relationships :- Merely allocating work is not
enough. Each individual should also know from whom he has to take
orders and to whom he is accountable. It helps in coordination amongst
various departments.
Importance of Organising :-
1. Benefits of specialisation : - In organising every individual is assigned a
part of total work and not the whole task. This division of work into smaller
units and repetitive performance leads to specialisation. Thus organising
promotes specialisation which in turn leads to efficient & speedy
performance of tasks.
2. Clarity in working relationships :- It helps in creating well defined jobs
and also clarifying the limits of authority and responsibility of each job.
The superior-subordinate relationship is clearly defined in organising.
3. Effective Administration : It provides a clear description of jobs and
related duties which helps to avoid confusion and duplication. Clarity in
working relationships enables proper execution of work which results in
effective administration.
4. Optimum utilisation of resources : The proper assignment of jobs
avoids overlapping/duplication of work. This helps in preventing
confusion and minimising the wastage of resources and efforts.
5. Adoption to Change: A properly designed organizational structure is
flexible which facilitates adjustment to changes in workload caused by
change in external environment related to technology, products, resources
and markets.
6. Development of Personnel: Sound organization encourages initiative
and relative thinking on part of the employees. When managers delegate
their authority, it reduces their workload so they can focus on more
important issues related to growth & innovation. This also develops the
subordinates' ability and helps him to realize his full potential.
7. Expansion and growth: It helps in growth & diversification of and
enterprise by adding more job positions, departments, products lines, new
geographical territories etc.
Meaning of Organisational Structure :-
lt seeks to establish relations among all the persons working in the
page 34
Business Studies- XII
organisation. Under the organisational structure various posts are created
to perform different activities for the attainment of the objectives of the
enterprise. Relations among persons working on different posts are
determined. The structure provides a basis or framework for managers and
other employees for performing their functions.
The organisation structure can be defined as the frame work within which
managerial and operating tasks are performed.
Relation between Span of Management and Organisation structure: -
Span of mangement refers to the number of subordinates that can be
effectively managed by a superior. The Span of management to a large
extent gives shape to the organisation structure. This determines the levels
of management in the structure. Narrow span of management results in tall
structure whereas wider span of management results in flat structure.
Types of Organisation Structures
Functional Structure Divisional Structure
I. Functional Structure :- In functional structure activities are
grouped and departments are created on the basis of specific
functions to be performed. For example all the jobs related to
production are grouped under production department, Sales to
sales department etc.
Managing Director
Personnel Marketing Research & Purchasing
Development
Suitability :-
(1) Large organisations producing one line of product.
(2) Organisations which require high degree of functional specialisation with
diversified activities.
Advantages :-
1. Specialisation - Better division of labour takes place which
results in specialisation of functions and its consequent benefits.
page 35
Business Studies- XII
2. Coordination is established :- All the persons working within a
department are specialists of their respective jobs. It makes the
coordination easier at department level.
3. Helps in increasing managerial efficiency : Managers of one
department are performing same type of function again and again which
makes them specialised and improves their efficiency.
4. Minimises cost - It leads to minimum duplication of effort
which results in economies of scale and thus lowers cost.
Disadvantages:-
1. Ignorance of organisational objectives - Each departmental head works
according to his own wishes. They always give more weight to their
departmental objectives. Hence overall organisational objectives suffer.
2. Difficulty in Inter-departmental Coordination - All departrmental
heads work as per their own wishes which leads to coordination within the
department easier but it makes inter-departmental coordination difficult.
3. Hurdle in complete development - because each employee specialises
only in a small part of the whole job.
II. DIVISIONAL ORGANISATION STRUCTURE :
Dividing the whole enterprise according to the major products to be up
manufactured (like metal, plastic, cosmetics etc) is known as divisional
organisation structure.
Managing Director
Cosmetics Garments Footwear Skincare
Personnel Marketing Research & Purchases Production Marketing Finance
Development Dept. Dept. Dept.
This structure is suitable in organisations producing multi product or different
lines of product requiring product specialisation. Also growing companies which
intend to add more lines of products in future adopt this structure.Advantages:-
1. Quick decision making - Divisional manager can take any decision
regarding his division independently which makes decisions quick and effective.
2. Divisional results can be assessed - Divisional results (profit / loss) can
be assessed easily. On this basis any unprofitable division can be closed.
page 36
Business Studies- XII
3. Growth and Expansion - It facilitates growth and expansion as new
divisions can be added without disturbing existing departments.
Disadvantages :-
1. Conflicts among different divisions on allocation of resources.
2. Duplicity of Functions : - Entire set of functions is required for all
divisions. It gives rise to duplicity of efforts among divisions & increases
cost.
3. Selfish Attitude :- Every division tries to display better performance and
sometimes even at the cost of other divisions. This shows their selfish
attitude.
FORMAL ORGANISATION
This structure is designed by the management to achieve organisational goals
in which the responsibilities, authority and mutual relationships among all the
employees working in an enterprise are clearly defined. It can be functional or
divisional.
Features :-
1. It is deliberately created by the top management.
2. It is based on rules and procedures which are in written form.
3. lt is impersonal i.e does not takes into consideration emotional aspect.
4. It clearly defines the authority and responsibility of every individual.
5. It is created to achieve organisational objectives.
Advantages :-
1. Easier to fix responsibility since mutual relationships are clearly defined.
2. No overlapping of work - because things move according to a definite
plan.
3. Unity of command through an established chain of command.
4. Easy to achieve objectives - because of coordination and optimum use of
human and material resources.
page 37
Business Studies- XII
5. Stability in the organisation - because behaviour of employees can be
fairly predicted since there are specific rules to guide them.
Disadvantages :-
1. The Work is based on rules which causes unnecessary delays.
2. Lack of initiative - The employees have to do what they are told to do and
they have no opportunity of thinking.
3. Limited in scope - It is difficult to understand all human relationships in
an enterprise as it places more emphasis on structure and work.
Informal Organisation :
An informal organisation is that organisation which is not established deliberately
but comes into existence because of common interests, taste and religious and
communal relations. The main purpose of this organisation . structure is getting
psychological satisfaction. For example, employees with similar interest in
sports, films, religion etc may form their own informal groups.
Features :
1. It originates from within the formal organisation as a result of
personal interaction among employees.
2. It has no written rules and procedures.
3. It does not have fixed lines of communication.
4. It is not deliberately created by the management.
5. It is personal - means the feelings of individuals are kept in mind.
Advantages:-
1. Speed : Prescribed lines of communication are not followed which leads
to faster spread of information.
2. Fulfillment of social needs - enhances job satisfaction which gives them a
sense of belongingness in the organisation.
3. Quick solution of the problems - because the subordinates can speak
without hesitation before the officers, it helps the officers to understand the
problems of their subordinates.
page 38
Business Studies- XII
Disadvantages :-
1. It creates rumours :- All the persons in an informal organisation talk
carelessly and sometimes a wrong thing is conveyed to the other persons.
2. It resists change and lays stress on adopting the old techniques.
3. Priority to group interests - Pressurises members to confirm to group
expectations.
Difference between Formal Informal organisation
Basis Formal organisation Informal organisation
1. Meaning If refers to the structure of It refers to the network of
well defined authority and social relationships which
and responsibility. develops automatically.
2. Nature Rigid & Stable Flexible and unstable
3. Authority Arises by virtue of positions Ari ses out of personal
in management. qualities.
4. Adherence Violation of rules may lead No s uch puni s hment s .
to rules to penalties and punishments.
5. Flow of Takes place through the Not t hrough a pl anned
communi- scalar chain. route. It can take place in
cation any direction.
6. Purpose To achieve planned organisational To satisfy social and cultural
objectives. needs and fulfil common
interests.
7. Formation/ Deliberately planned and created by Emerges spontaneously as a
origin management. result of social interaction
among employees.
8. Structure Well-defined structure of tasks & No cl ear - cut s t r uct ur e
relationships. because of complex network
of relationships.
9. Flow of Authority flows from top to bottom Authority flows vertically as
authority i.e downwards. well as horizontally.
10. Interdepen- Independent. Depends on
dence formal structure.
page 39
Business Studies- XII
Delegation of Authority
Meaning - It means the granting of authority to subordinates to operate within the
prescribed limits. The manager who delegates authority holds his subordinates
responsible for proper performance of the assigned tasks. To make sure that his
subordinates perform all the work effectively and efficiently in expected manner
the manager creates accountability.
Process / Elements of Delegation :-
1. Authority - The power of taking decisions in order to guide the
activities of others. Authority is that power which influences the
conduct of others.
2. Responsibility : It is the obligation of a subordinate to properly
perform the assigned duty. When a superior issues orders it
becomes the responsibility of the subordinate to carry it out.
3. Accountability - When a superior assigns some work to a
subordinate, he is answerable to his superior for its success or
failure.
Principle of Absoluteness of Accountability - Authority can be delegated but
responsibility / accountability cannot be delegated by a manager. The authority
granted to a subordinate can be taken back and re-delegated to another person. The
manager cannot escape from the responsibility for any default or mistake on the
part of his subordinates. For example, If the chief executive asks marketing
manager to achieve a sales target of sale of 100 units/ day. The marketing manager
delegates this task to deputy sales manager, who fails to achieve the target. Then
marketing manager will be answerable for the work performance of his
subordinates. Thus, accountability is always of the person who delegates
authority.
page 40
Business Studies- XII
Assigning Responsibility Granting Authority Fixing Accountability
Process of Delegation of Authority
Difference between Authority, Resposibility and Accountability
Basis Authority Responsibility Accountability
l. Meaning Right to command Obligation to Answerability for
perform an outcome of the
assigned task assigned task.
2. Origin Arises from formal Arises from Arises from
position delegated authority responsibility
3. Flow Downward - from Upward - from Upward - from
Superior to Subordinate to Subordinate to
Subordinate Superior Superior
4. Withdrawl Can be withdrawn Cannot be Cannot be
anytime by giving withdrawn once withdrawn once
notice. created. created.
Importance of Delegation of Authority
1. Reduction of Executives work load - It reduces the work load of officers.
They can thus utilise their time in more important and creative works
instead of works of daily routine.
2. Employee development - Employees get more opportunities to utilise
their talent which allows them to develop those skills which will enable
them to perform complex tasks.
3. Quick and better decision are possible - The subordinate are granted
sufficient authority so they need not to go to their superiors for taking
decisions concerning the routine matters.
4. High Morale of subordinates - Because of delegation of authority to the
subordinates they get an opportunity to display their efficiency and
capacity.
5. Better coordination - The elements of delegation - authority,
responsibility and accountability help to define the powers, duties and
answerability related to various job positions which results in developing
page 41
Business Studies- XII
and maintaining effective co-ordination.
Decentralisation :-
It is defined as even and systematic distribution of authority at every level of
management. Under this, the authority is transferred to the level where it is to be
exercised, so the numbers of centres for taking decisions increases. It should be
noted that 'Decentralisation' is an extension of delegation.
Centralisation and Decentralisation - represents the pattern of authority among
managers at different levels. Centralisation of authority means concentration of
power of decision making in a few hands. In such an organisation very little
authority is delegated to managers at middle and lower levels. No organisation can
be completely centralised or decentralised. They exist together and there is a need
for a balance between the two. As the organisation grows in size, there is tendency
to move towards decentralisation. Thus, every organisation is characterised by
both.
Importance of Decentralisation :-
1. Develops initiative amongst subordinates - It helps to promote
confidence because the subordinates are given freedom to take their
own decisions.
2. Quick and better decisions - The burden of managerial decisions
does not lie in the hands of few individuals but gets divided among various
persons which helps them to take better and quick decisions.
3. Relieves the top executives from excess workload - The daily
managerial works are assigned to the subordinates which leaves
enough time with the superiors which they can utilise in developing
new strategies.
4. Managerial Development - It means giving authority to the
subordinates upto the lower level to take decisions regarding their
work. In this way the opportunity to take decisions helps in the
development of the organisation.
5. Better Control - It makes it possible to evaluate performance at each level
which results in complete control over all the activities.
page 42
Business Studies- XII
Difference between - Delegation & Decentralisation
Basis Delegation Decenralisation
1. Nature It is a compulsory act. It is an optional policy.
2. Freedom Less freedom to take More freedom of action due
of action decisions due to more to less control by the top
control by the superiors. management.
3. Status It is a process of sharing It is the result of policy
tasks and authority. decisions taken by top
management.
4. Scope Narrow - as it is confined Wide - lt includes extension
to a superior and his of delegation to the levels
immediate subordinate. of management.
5. Purpose To reduce the burden of To increase the role and the
manager. autonomy of lower level of
management.
QUESTIONS
1 marks questions
1. How effective administration is possible through organising ?
2. Name the function of management which coordinates the physical,
financial and human resources and establishes productive relations
among them for achievement of specific goals.
3. Name the organisation which is directed by group norms.
4. What is meant by organisational structure ?
5. Difficulty in inter-departmental coordination is one of the limitations of
which organisational structure.
6. What is meant by Authority ?
7. What is the basis of delegation of authority ?
8. How effective management is possible through delegation of authority ?
page 43
Business Studies- XII
3 marks questions
1. What is functional organisational structure ? Write two advantages of
this structure.
2. How is accountability related to authority ? Explain.
3. Why is it necessary to delegate authority ? Give three reasons.
4. State three steps in the process of organising.
4/5 marks questions
1. Explain briefly any four features of formal organisation.
2. The employees of Sachin Ltd. a software company, have formed
a Dramatic group for their recreation. Name the type of organisation
and state its three features.
3. Distinguish between Formal and Informal organisation (any four
points)
4. A manager is of the view that he is not responsible for the quality
of work that he has delegated to his subordinates. Do you agree ?
5. 'Delegation of authority provides the means whereby a manager
multiples himself.' Comment.
6 marks questions
l. Explain the importance of organising as a function of management.
2. 'Formal organisation is considered better than informal organisation'. Do
you agree with this statement ? Give reasons.
3. What is meant by Divisional structure of an organisation ? Explain
any two advantages and two limitations of it.
4. 'Decentralisation is an optional policy'. Explain why an organisation
would choose to be decentralised.
5. Explain the meaning and process of delegation of authority.
page 44
Business Studies- XII
UNIT-6
STAFFING
Meaning
Staffing means putting people to jobs. It begins with human resource planning and
includes different other functions like recruitment, selection, training,
development, promotion and performance appraisal of work force.
Need and Importance of Staffing :-
1. Obtaining Competent Personnel : Proper staffing helps in
discovering and obtaining competent personnel for various jobs.
2. High Performance : Proper staffing ensures higher performance by
putting right person on the right job.
3. Continuous growth : Proper staffing ensures continuous survival
and growth of the enterprise.
4. Optimum utilization of human resources : It prevents under-
utilization of personnel and high labour cost.
5. Improves job satisfaction : It improves job satisfaction and morale
of employee.
Human Resource Management: (HRM)
The function of Human Resource Management is to provide skilled human
elements to the enterprises. Therefore big enterprises create a separate department
called HRD. This department works under H.R. Managers.
Definition : Human Resource management is the recruitment, selection,
development, utilization, compensation and motivation of human resources of
the organization.
Staffing as a part of Human Resource Management : The scope of Human
Resource Management is wider than staffing. It involves staffing, reeping
personnel records, providing expert service and other works.
It facilitates procurement and placement of right people on the right jobs. The
nature of staffing as a part of HRM is discussed in following points :-
page 45
Business Studies- XII
1. Staffing is people centred and is relevant in all types of organization and
with all categories of personnel from top to bottom.
2. It is duty of every manager to perform the staffing activities. In many
enterprises, Personnel Department is established to provide assistance to
managers in performing their staffing function.
3. Staffing function is concerned with training, development and performance
appraisal of human resources.
PROCESS OF STAFFING :
1. Estimating Manpower Requirement : It involves the following:-
(a) Making inventory of current human resources in terms of
qualification, training & skills.
(b) Assessing future human resource needs of all departments.
(c) Developing a programme to provide the human resources.
Job Analysis is an intensive way of finding details related to all jobs.
2. Recruitment : It refers to identification of the sources of manpower
availability and making efforts to secure applicants for the various job
positions in an organization.
Estimating manpower requirements
Recruitment
Selecting from among the applications
Placement and Orientation
Training and Development
Performance Appraisal
page 46
Business Studies- XII
3. Selection : It is the process of choosing and appointing the right candidates
for various jobs in an organization through various exams, tests &
interviews.
4. Placement and Orientation : When a new employee reports for duty, he is
to be placed on the job for which he is best suited. Placement is very
important process as it can ensure. “ Right person for right job”.
Orientation / Induction is concerned with the process of introducing a new
employee to the organization. The new employees are familiarized with
their units, supervisors and fellow employees. They are also to be informed
about working hours, procedure for availing leave, medical facilities.
history and geography of organization and rules / regulations relating to
their wages etc.
5. Training and Development - Systematic training helps in increasing the
skills and knowledge of employees in doing their jobs through various
methods.
Development involves growth of an employee in all respects. It is the
process by which the employees acquire skills and competance to do their
present jobs and increase their capabilities for higher jobs in future.
6. Performance Appraisal - It is concerned with rating or evaluating the
performance of employees. Transfers and promotions of the staff are based
on performance appraisal.
RECRUITMENT :
(A) Recruitment : Recruitment may be defined as the process of
searching for prospective employees and stimulating them to apply
for jobs in the organisation.
Sources of Recruitment :-
(A) Internal Sources (B) External Sources
Internal Sources of Recruitment :- Internal sources refer to inviting
candidates from within the organisation. Following are important sources
of internal recruitment:-
1. Transfers :- It involves the shifting of an employee from one job to
another, from one department to another or from one shift to another shift.
page 47
Business Studies- XII
2. Promotions :- It refers to shifting an employee to a higher position
carrying higher responsibilities, prestige, facilities and pay.
3. Lay off :- To recall the temporary worker for work is called Lay-off, who
were temporarily separated from organisation due to lack of work.
Advantages of Internal Sources Recruitment :-
(1) Employees are motivated to improve their performance.
(2) Internal recruitment also simplifies the process of selection &
placement.
(3) No wastage of time on the employee training and development.
(4) Filling of jobs internally is cheaper.
Limitation of Internal Sources :-
(1) The scope for induction of fresh talent is reduced.
(2) The employee may become lethargic.
(3) The spirit of competition among the employees may be hampered.
(4) Frequent transfers of employees may often reduce the productivity of
the organisation.
External Sources of Recruitment :-
When the candidates from out side the organisation are invited to fill the
vacant job position then it is known as external recruitment.
The common methods of external sources of recruitments are:
1. Direct Recruitment :- Under the direct recruitment, a notice is placed on
the notice board of the enterprise specifying the details of the jobs
available.
2. Casual callers : Many reputed business organisations keep a data base of
unsolicited applicants in their office. This list can be used for Recruitment.
3. Advertisement : - Advertisement in media is generally used when a wider
choice is required. Example- Newspapers, Internet, Radio, Television etc.
page 48
Business Studies- XII
4. Employment Exchange :
Employment exchange is regarded as a good
source of recruitment for un
skilled and skilled operative jobs.
5. Campus recruitment and labour contractors can be used for the purpose.
Merits of External Sources :-
1. Qualified Personnel : By using external source of recruitment the
management can attract qualified and trained people to apply for the
vacant jobs in the organisation.
2. Wider Choice : The management has a wider choice in selecting the
people for employment.
3. Fresh Talent : It provides wider choice and brings new blood in the
organisation.
4. Competitive Spirit : If a company taps external sources, the staff will
have to compete with the outsiders.
Limitations of External Sources of Recruitment :-
1. Dissatisfaction among existing employees :- Recruitment from outside
may cause dissatisfaction among the employees. They may feel that their
chances of promotion are reduced.
2. Costly process : A lot of money has to be spent on advertisement therefore
this is costly process.
3. Lengthy Process : It takes more time than internal sources of recruitment
Selection :
Selection is the process of choosing from among the candidates from
within the organisation or from outside, the most suitable person for the
current position or for the future position.
PROCESS OF SELECTION
Preliminary
Screening
Selection
Test
Employment
Interview
Reference
Check
Selection
Decision
Medical
Exam
Job
Offer
Contract
of
Employment
page 49
Business Studies- XII
The successive stages in selection process are :-
1. Preliminary Screening : After applications have been received, they are
properly checked as regarding qualification etc. by screening committee.
A list of candidates to be called for employment test is made and unsuitable
candidates are rejected altogether.
2. Selection Tests: These tests include :
(a) Psychological tests which are based on assumption that human
behaviour at work can be predicted by giving various tests like
aptitude, personality test etc.
(b) Employment test for judging the applicant's suitability for the job.
3. Employment Interviews: The main purpose of interview is
(a) to find out suitability of the candidates.
(b) to seek more information about the candidate.
(c) to give the candidate an accurate picture of job with details of terms
and conditions.
4. Reference Checks - Prior to final selection, the prospective employer
makes an investigation of the references supplied by the applicant. He
undertakes a thorough search into candidates' family background, past
employment, education, police records etc.
5. Selection Decisions : A list of candidate who clear the employment tests,
interviews and reference checks is prepared and then the selected
candidates are listed in order of merit.
6. Medical / Physical Examination : A qualified medical expert appointed
by organization should certify whether the candidate is physically fit to the
requirements of a specific job. A proper physical exam will ensure higher
standard of health & physical fitness of employees thereby reducing
absenteeism.
7. Job Offer : After a candidate has cleared all hurdles in the selection
procedure, he is formally appointed by issuing him an Appointment
Letter. The broad terms and conditions, pay scale are integral part of
Appointment Letter.
8. Contract of Employment : After getting the job offer, the candidate has to
page 50
Business Studies- XII
give his acceptance. After acceptance, both employer and employee will
sign a contract of employment which contains terms & conditions , pay
scale, leave rules, hours of work, mode of termination of employment etc.
Training : Training is the act of increasing the knowledge and technical
skills of an employee for doing a particular job efficiently for existing
employees and new employees to get acquainted with their jobs and
increasing job related skills.
Benefits to the Organisation :-
1. It enhances employee's productivity and quality.
2. Training increases employee's morale.
3. Employees get new technical knowledge.
4. Efficient use of machines.
Benefits to the Employee :-
1. Improved skills and knowledge of employee.
2. Increased performance by the individual help him to earn more.
3. Less accidents.
4. Training increases the satisfaction and morale of the employee.
Training Methods
(A) On the Job Method :- It refers to the methods that are applied at the work
place, while the employee is actually working. It means learning while
doing .
The following are the methods of On-the job training :-
1. Apprenticeship Training : Under this, the trainee is placed under
supervision of an experienced person (master worker) who imparts him
necessary skills and regulates his performance. The trainee is given
stipend while learning so he/she can enjoy “earn while you learn” scheme.
2. Internship Training : Under this method an educational institute enters
into agreement with industrial enterprises for providing practical
knowledge to its students by sending them to business organizations for
page 51
Business Studies- XII
gaining practical experience.
3. Coaching : Under this, the supervisor imparts job knowledge and skill to
his subordinates with an emphasis on “learning by doing”.
4. Job Rotation : The trainee or employee is systematically transferred from
one job to another so that he may get the experience of different jobs. This
will broaden his horizon and capacity to do a variety of jobs.
(5) Induction training is a type of training given to help a new employee in
settling down quickly into the job by becoming familiar with the people,
the surroundings, the job and the business. The duration of such type of
training may be from a few hours to a few days. The induction provides a
good opportunity to socialize and brief the newcomer with the company's
overall strategy, performance standards etc. If carefully done, it saves time
and cost (in terms of effectiveness or efficiency etc.)
(B) Off the job Method : These methods are used away from the work place.
It means 'learning before doing.'
1. Class room lectures : The lecture approach is well adapted to convey
specific information. The use of audio-visuals can often make a formal
classroom.
2. Films : They can provide information to the employee by showing them
films based on their work.
3. Case study : Trainee studies the cases to determine problems & analyses
causes. It is a means of simulating experience in the classroom. Under this,
the trainees are given a problem or a case which is more or less related to
principles already taught. They analyze the problem and suggest solutions
with the help of an instructor.
4. Computer Modelling : Under this, a computer is programmed to show
some real problems of jobs and steps to overcome such problems.
5. Conferences and Seminars : It is a group meeting conducted according
to an organised plan in which the members seek to develop knowledge and
understanding of a topic by oral participation. It is an effective training
device in which a person can learn from others by sharing his opinions
with them.
page 52
Business Studies- XII
Training and Development
Training is concerned with imparting technical knowledge in doing a
particular job. But development is a wider process concerned with growth
of an individual in all respects. However both are related processes;
training helps the employees in learning job skills whereas development
shapes attitude of the employees.
Comparison of Training and Development
Basis Training Development
1. Definition It means imparting skills and It means growth of an
knowledge for doing a particular employee in all respects.
Job.
2. Purpose It is concerned with maintaining It seeks to develop
and improving current job perfo- competence and skills for
-rmance. future performance.
3. Methods It is imparted through on the job It is imparted through off
method. the job method.
4. Initiative The boss takes the initiative for The individual takes
imparting training to his the initiative for self
subordinates. growth and development.
5.Duration Training programmes are Development takes place
organised for short term. over a larger period of time.
1 Mark Questions:-
1. Explain the meaning of Staffing.
2. Define Placement.
3. Why is selection considered to be a negative process?
4. Give one advantage of Job Rotation training.
5. State one objective of Preliminary screening.
page 53
Business Studies- XII
6. What is an interview?
7. What do you mean by on the job Training?
8. What do you mean by Recruitment?
9. Define Lay off.
10. Give the last step of staffing process.
11. Give the first step of selection process.
12. Define Induction training.
13. What is the main objective of Induction training.
3 - 4 Marks Questions:-
1. Explain any three types of selection Tests.
2. Explain the meaning of selection and training.
3. 'Internal sources of Recruitment are better than external sources of
Recruitment Do you agree ? Give reasons in support of your answer. Do
you agree?
4. How does Induction training help in reducing cost and saves time?
5. Write a short note on Induction training.
6. “Staffing is an important function of management”. Why ? Explain any four
reasons.
7. “Some learning opportunities are designed and delivered to improve skills
and abilities of employees whereas some others are designed to help in the
growth of individual in all respects” Identify and explain two concepts
referred above.
page 54
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 7
DIRECTING
Meaning
Directing as a function of management, refers to the process of instructing,
guiding, counselling, motivating and leading people in the organisation to achieve
its objectives. It does not mean only instructions but also includes supervising the
employees when they are performing the job, motivating them to perform more
efficiently and leading them towards the achievement of organisational goal.
Features :
1. Directing initiates action : The other functions of management prepare a
setting for action, but directing initiates action in the organisation.
2. Directing takes place at every level of Management :- Every manager
from top executive to supervisor performs the function of directing.
3. Directing is a continuous process of supervision, communication,
leadership and motivation. It takes place throughout the life of the
organisation.
4. Directing flows from top to bottom :- It is initiated at the top level and
flows to the bottom through organisational hierarchy.
Importance :
1. Initiates Action : It helps to initiate action by the people in the
organisation towards attainment of desired objectives. The employees
start working only when they get instructions and directions from their
superiors. It is the directing function which starts actual work to convert
plans into results.
2. Integrates Employee's Efforts :- All the activities of the organisation are
interrelated so it is necessary to coordinate all the activities. It integrates
the activities of subordinates by supervision, guidance and counselling.
3. Means of motivation : It motivates the subordinates to work efficiently
and to contribute their maximum efforts towards the achievement of
organisational goals.
4. Facilities change : Employees often resist changes due to fear of adverse
effects on their employment and promotion. Directing facilitates
page 55
Business Studies- XII
adjustment in the organisation to cope with changes in the environment.
5. Stability and balance in the organisation : Managers while performing
directing function instruct, guide, supervise and inspire their subordinates
in a manner that they are able to strike a balance between individual and
organisational interests.
1. Supervision - It means observing the subordinates at work to see that they
are working in accordance with plans and to help them in solving their
problems. The important thing in supervision is that it involves face to face
contact between superiors and subordinates. Supervisor's position is
immediately above the worker.
2. Motivation - It is systematic process of generating enthusiasm among
employees to dedicate their best of efforts to the enterprise.
3. Leadership - It is the quality of behaviour by which an individual guides
and directs the activities of his subordinates. He leads, guides and directs
the activities of his subordinates. He leads the group efforts towards
attainingthe objectives of the business.
4. Communication : It is the process of exchange of information between
two or more persons to reach common understanding.
I. Importance of Supervision / Role of a Supervisor / Functions
1. Link between workers and management because the supervisor
explains management policies to worker and brings workers problems to
the notice of the management.
2. Ensures issuing Instructions : To make sure that the instructions are
communicated to each and every employee.
3. Facilities Control : Control means match between actual and planned
output. It ensures checking on the methods in use and progress of work
according to planned schedule.
Elements of Direction
Elements of
Directing
Supervision
Leadership
Motivation
Communication
page 56
Business Studies- XII
4. Maintenance of discipline : The strict supervision and guidance of
supervisor encourages the employees and workers to be more disciplined
in the activities.
Under the guidance of superior the workers follow a fixed or strict time
table and execute the plans in right directions.
5. Feedback : The supervisors are directly dealing with the subordinates. As
a result, feedback in the form of suggestions, grievances keep coming to
the management. It improves quality management decisions and revision
of plans & policies.
6. Improved Motivation : A supervisor with good leadership qualities can
build up high morale among workers.
The relationship with the supervisor is a very good incentive to improve
the motivation level of the employees while guiding the employees, the
supervisors encourage the subordinates to perform to their best capacities.
7. Optimum utilisation of resources : All the activities are under the
observation of supervisor so less wastage and optimum utilisation of
resources is possible.
II. Motivation :-
Meaning :- It is the process of stimulating people to act to their best ability
to accomplish desired goals.
Motivation means inspiring the employees to work with greater
enthusiasm and more efficiency for the accomplishment of the objectives
of the enterprise. It involves arousing needs and desires in people as to
initiate and direct their behaviour in a purposive manner.
Features
1. Psychological Phenomenon : Motivation is an internal feeling which
means it can not be forced on employees. The internal feeling such as
need, desire, aspiration etc. influence human behaviour to behave in a
particular manner.
2. Goal Directed Behaviour : It induces people to behave in such a manner
so that they can achieve their goals. A motivated person works towards the
achievement of desired goals.
page 57
Business Studies- XII
3. Motivation can be either positive or Negative : Positive motivation
means inspiring people to work better and appreciating a work that is well
done. Eg. pay increase promotion recognition. Negative motivation
means forcing people to work by threatening or punishing them. e.g, issue
of memo, demotion, stopping increments etc.
4. Complex Process : It is a complex and difficult process. Individuals differ
in their needs and wants and moreover human needs change from time to
time.
5. Continuous Process : Human needs are unlimited and so they keep on
changing continuously, satisfaction of one need gives rise to another. As
soon as one need is satisfied another need arises. So managers have to
continuously perform the function of motivation.
Maslow's Need Hierarchy-Theory of Motivation:- Maslow's Theory
focuses on the needs as the basis for motivation. It classified human needs
into the following five categories.
It helps managers to realise that need level of employees should be
identified to provide motivation to them. It is based on the following
assumptions:
(i) People's behaviour is based on their needs
(ii) People's needs are in hierarchical order.
(iii) A satisfied need can no longer motivate a person.
(iv) A person moves to the next higher level of hierarchy only when the
lower need is satisfied.
Example from the point
view of Individual
Self fulfilments
Status
Friendship
Stability of Income
Hunger
Example from the point
of view of organisation
Achievement of goals
Jobtitle
Cordial relation with collegues
Pension Plan
Basic Salary
page 58
Business Studies- XII
Financial and Non-Financial Incentives - Incentive means all measures
which are used to motivate people to improve performance.
Financial Non-Financial
- Which can be calculated in terms - Which can not be calculated in
terms of money of money
- Profit sharing - Status
- Pay and Allowances - Career Advancement
- Bonus - Opportunity
- Retirement Benefits - Job enrichment
- Perquisites - Employee Recognition Programmer
- Productivity linked wages - Employees participation
- Co-partnership / stock option - Job security
- Employees empowerment
Self
Actualisation
Needs
Esteem or Status
needs self confidence,
prestige
Social Needs - Sense of
Belongingness, association,
friendship
Safety or Security Needs - Oldage,
sickness, job security, stability of Income
Basic or physiological needs - Food, clothing,
Shelter, air, water, other necessities of life.
Needs of the highest order
Generally found in persons
whose first four needs have
already been fulfilled
KINDS OF
INCENTIVES
page 59
Business Studies- XII
III. Leadership -
Leadership is the activity of influencing people to strive willingly for mutual
objectives. Managers at all levels are expected to be the leaders of their
subordinates.
Leadership indicates the ability of an individual to maintain good interpersonal
relations with followers and motivate them to contribute for achieving
organisational objectives. It is a process of interaction between the leader and his
followers. It helps in persuading employees to work cooperatively and
enthusiastically towards common goals.
Styles of Leadership
Leadership styles refer to a leader’s behaviour. Behavioural pattern which the
leader reflects in his role as a leader is often described as the style of leadership.
A Leadership style is the result of the leader’s philosophy, personality, experience
and value system. It also depends upon the type of followers and the atmosphere
revailing in the organization.
Different types of leadership style are:
l. Autocratic leadership
2. Participative leadership - Democratic
3. Free rein leadership - Laissez Faire
A leader may use all styles over a period of time but one style tends to predominate
as his normal way of using power.
1. Autocratic or Authoritarian Leader
An autocratic leader gives orders and insists that they are obeyed. He
determines the policies for the group without consulting them.
He does not give information about future plans but simply tells the group
what immediate steps they must take.
Under this style, all decision making power is centralized in the leader . He
does not give the subordinates any freedom to influence his decisions.
page 60
Business Studies- XII
lt is like "bossing people around.” This style should normally be used on
rare occasion
A is the leader - Boss -- Centered - Leadership
When should authoritarian leadership be applied?
- It is best applied to situations where there is little time for group decision
making.
- or where the leader is the most knowledgeable member of the group.
2. Democratic or Participative Leader
A democratic leader gives order only after consulting the group and works out
the policies with the acceptance of the group.
He never asks people to do things without working out the long term plans on
which they are working. He favours decision making by the group as shown in
the diagram. This improves the attitude of the employees towards their jobs and
the organization thereby increasing their morale.
Using this style is of mutual benefit - it allows them (subordinates) to become
part of the team and helps leaders (seniors) to make better decisions.
A is the leader - Group Centered - Leadership
A
B C D
C
A B D
E
page 61
Business Studies- XII
When should Participative / democratic leadership be applied ?
- It works best in situations where group members are skilled and eager to share
their knowledge.
- It is also important to have plenty of time to allow people to contribute, develop
a plan and then vote on the best course of action.
This style should NOT be used when:
In situations where roles are unclear or time is of the essence, democratic
leadership can lead to communication failures and incompleted projects.
3. Laissez Faire or Free Rein Leader
A free rein leader gives complete freedom to the subordinates. Such a leader
avoids use of power. He depends largely upon the group to establish its own
goals and work out its own problems. Group members work themselves as per
their own choice and competence. The leader exists as a contact man with the
outsiders to bring information and the resources which the group requires for
accomplishing the job.
NOTE: This is also known as laissez faire which means no interference in the
affairs of others. [French laissez means to let/ allow fair means to
do].
A is the leader
(Leadership is Subordinate - Centered - Leadership)
A
D
C
E
B
page 62
Business Studies- XII
?When should laissez faire/free rein leadership be applie
This is an effective style to use when:
? Followers are highly skilled, experienced and educated.
? Followers have pride in their work and the drive to do it successfully on their
own.
? Outside experts, such as staff specialists or consultants are being used.
? Followers are trustworthy and experienced.
?This style should NOT be used when:
? Followers feel insecure at the non - availability of a leader.
? The leader cannot or will not provide regular feedback to his followers.
Example: Mr. Ulhas, CEO of 'I Create India,' distributes the work for the month.
He delegates the work to his staff Ms. Ranju, Ms. Anjana, Ms. Geeta and Mr.
Dinesh as per his discretion. (Mr. Ulhas is behaving as an autocratic leader) Mr.
Ulhas has realized that due to absence of Ms. Geeta, the work will not get over as
scheduled. He discusses with his staff members to meet the dead line. Everybody
decides to do over time and plans to stay back accordingly. (Mr. Ulhas is behaving
as a democratic leader)
Mr. Ulhas wants to give a party to all staff members for timely completion of the
task.
Mr. Ulhas asks the other members of staff to fix the venue and the menu for the
occasion. (Mr. Ulhas is behaving as a free rein leader)
?IV Communication - It is transfer of information from the sender to the
receiver with the information being undertood by the receiver.
Communication plays key role in the success of a manager. Directing
abilities of manager mainly depend upon his communication skills. That is
why organization always emphasizes on improving communication skills
of managers as well as employees. Communication is important for the
directing function because all other elements of directing become possible
only when there is adequate communication.
page 63
Business Studies- XII
Elements of Communication Process -
l. Sender - Who conveys his thoughts or ideas.
2. Message - Ideas, feelings, suggestions, order etc.
3. Encoding - Converting the message into communication symbols such as
words / pictures etc.
4. Media- Path/ Channel through which encoded message is
transmitted to receiver e.g., face to face, phone call, internet etc.
5. Decoding - Converting encoded symbols of the sender.
6. Receiver - Who receives communication of the sender.
7. Feed back - All those actions of receiver indicating that he has received and
understood the message of the sender.
8. Noise - Some obstruction or hindrance to communication like poor
telephone connection, inattentive receiver.
Importance of Communication
l. Facilitates Coordination - between interrelated departments and
sections thus creating a unity of purpose and action.
2. Provides data necessary for decision makings - When information is
effectively and efficiently communicated to management.
3. Increases managerial efficiency- Every individual in the organisation is
assigned a job or task. The employee must know clearly who has to report
to whom, what part of total job they are expected to perform and what are
their decisions. The clarity comes only with smooth flow of communication
which keeps the organisation at work with efficiency.
4. Promotes cooperation and Industrial Peace- The two way
communication promotes cooperation and mutual understanding between
the management and workers and brings peace in the organisation.
5. Establishes effective leadership - Effective communication helps to
influence subordinates - while influencing, a leader should possess good
communication skills.
If there is two way information flow between the superior and subordinates
then there will be positive reaction of employees.
page 64
Business Studies- XII
Communication taking place within an organisation may be broadly
classified into two categories.
I. Formal Communication - refers to official communication which takes
place following the chain of command. Classification of formal
communication -
1. Vertical communication - Flows vertically i.e., upwards or
downwards through formal channels
i) Downward Communication - Higher to lower level like plans,
policies, rules etc.
ii) Upward Communi cati on - Subordi nat e t o superi or l i ke
suggestions, grievances, reports etc.
2. Horizontal / lateral Communication - between persons holding
positions at the same level of the organisation e.g., production
manager may contact marketing manager about product design,
quality etc.
Communication networks of a Formal Communication.
A
B
C D
E A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
Single Chain Wheel Circular
It flows from
every superior
to his subordinate
through single chain
It flows
through one
central person
(Superior)
It moves in
a circle each
person can
communicate
with his adjoining
two person
A
B
C D
E
A
B
C D
Free Flow Inverted V
In this network a
subordinate is allowed
to communicate with his
immediate superior as well
as his superior’s superior
In this network
each person can
communicate with
others freely
page 65
Business Studies- XII
II. Informal Communication : Communication that takes place without
following the formal lines of communication is said to be informal
communication. There is no fixed direction or path for the flow of
information.
Grapevine or Informal Communication Networks:-
1. Single Strand - Each person communicates with the other in a sequence.
2. Gossip - Each person communicates with all on non-selective basis. A
person shares the information with many other people in his social group.
3. Probability - The individual communicates randomly with other
individuals.
4. Cluster - The individual communicates with only those people whom he
trusts.
Difference between Formal & Informal Communication
Basis Formal Communication Informal Communication
1. Meaning Within the official chain of Between individuals and
command groups which are not
officially recognised.
2. Channel Through a definite path No definite path.
3. Speed Slow - because all infor- Very fast - Cuts across all
mation has to pass. the official channels.
through an established chain of command.
4. Nature More rigid and cannot be Flexible and varies from
modified. individual to individual.
5. Expression It is mostly expressed in lt mostly tends to be oral.
written form.
X
Y
X
X
X
1 2 3 4
Single Strand Gossip Probability Cluster
page 66
Business Studies- XII
Barriers to Effective Communication -
Semantic Barriers - Concerned with problems and obstructions in the
process of encoding or decoding of message into words or impressions
Semantic barriers are as follows:-
1. Badly expressed message. Sometimes intended meaning may not be
conveyed.
2. Words with different meanings confuses the receiver.
3. Faulty translations may transfer wrong messages.
4. Unclarified assumption subject to different interpretations may result in
confusion.
5. Technical Jargon - Technical words may not be understood by the workers.
Psychological / Emotional barriers
1. Premature evaluation - judgement before listening leads to
misunderstanding.
2. Lack of attention / poor listening may disappoint the employees.
3. Loss by transmission and poor retention – When oral communication passes
through various levels it destroys the structure of the message or leads to
transmission of inaccurate message.
4. Distrust – If the parties do not believe each other. They can not understand
each other's message in its original sense.
Organisational barriers : -
Factors related to organisation structure:-
1. If organizational policy does not support free flow of information it creates a
problem.
2. Rules and regulations:- rigid rules and regulations may lead to red tapism
and delay of action.
3. Status conscious managers may not allow subordinates to express their
page 67
Business Studies- XII
feelings freely.
4. Complexity in organization structure results in delay and distortion.
Personal Barriers - of superiors and subordinates.
1. Fear of challenge to authority may withhold or suppress a particular
communication.
2. Lack of confidence of superior on his subordinates.
3. Unwillingness to communicate. e. g. fear of punishment / demotion.
4. Lack of proper incentives stops the subordinates to offer useful suggestions.
Improving communication effectiveness.
1. Clarify the ideas before communication.
2. Communicate according to the needs of receiver.
3. Consult others before communicating.
4. Be aware of language, tone and content of message.
5. Ensure proper feedback. Feedback provides opportunity for suggestions
and criticism.
6. Follow up communication helps to remove hurdles, misunderstanding of
information given by managers to subordination.
7. Be a good listener
QUESTIONS
1 Mark questions
1. Which function of management is known as Management-in-action ?
2. How supervision is helpful in maintaining discipline ?
3. What is Economic Safety ?
4. What is meant by Job Enrichment as a type of non-monetary incentives ?
5. What is meant by Leadership ?
6. What is meant by NOISE in communication process ?
page 68
Business Studies- XII
7. What is meant by feedback in communication process ?
8. What is meant by Grapenive ?
9. Define autocratic style of leadership.
3 Marks Questions
11. Direction is the least important function of management. Do you agree with
this statement? Give any two reasons in support of your answer.
12. The post of supervisor should be abolished in the hierarchy of Managers .
Do you agree? Give any three reasons in support of your answer.
13. Explain how supervision facilitates control?
14. Motivation can be either positive or negative. How?
15. Motivation helps to reduce absenteeism in the organisation. Clarify.
4/5 Marks Questions
16. State any four characteristics of motivation.
17. Clarify Job Enrichment and job security as non-financial motivators.
18. Explain the importance of leadership as the directing function of
management.
19. Explain any four factors which are likely to disrupt effective
communication.
20. Why do leaders use different styles of leadership in different situations.
Explain with the help of examples.
6 Marks Questions
21. 'Supervision is an important element of directing function.' Explain any
four reasons in support of the above statement.
22. Explain differences financial and non-financial incentives used to motivate
employees of a company.
23. Explain the meaning and importance of communication process.
page 69
Business Studies- XII
24. Differentiate between autocratic, democratic and laissez fair style of
leadership.
25. Mr. A,B and C are discussing the 3 different leadership styles Mr. A
advocates that autocratic style of leadership is the best in an organisation
while Mr. B thinks that democratic style provides better results in the
performance of employees. Mr. C emphasizes on Iaissez faire style of
leadership. What according to you is the best style of leadership and why ?
page 70
Business Studies- XII
UNIT - 8
CONTROLLING
Meaning & Definition
Controlling means ensuring that activities in an organisation are performed as per
the plans. Controlling also ensures that an organisation's resources are being used
effectively and efficiently for the achievement of predetermined goals.
It can be defined as comparison of actual performance with the planned
performance.
The controlling functions finds out how far actual performance deviates from
standards, analyses the causes of such deviations and attempts to take corrective
actions based on the same.
Importance of Controlling :-
1. Controlling helps in achieving organisational goals :- The controlling
function measures progress towards the organisational goals and brings to
light/ indicates corrective action.
2. For Evaluating /Judging accuracy of standards :- A good control system
enables management to verify whether the standards set are accurate or not
by careful check on the changes taking place in the organisational
environment.
3. Making efficient use of resources :- By the process of control, a manager .
seeks to reduce wastage of resources.
4. Improves employees motivation :- A good control system ensures that
employees know well in advance what they are expected to do & also the
standard of performance. It thus motivates & helps them to give better
performance.
5. Facilitating Coordination in action :- In controlling each department and
employee is governed by predetermined standards which are well
coordinated with one another. Control provides unity of direction.
6. Ensuring order and discipline :- Controlling creates an atmosphere of
order and discipline in the organisation by keeping a close check on the
activities of its employees.
page 71
Business Studies- XII
Nature of Controlling
1. Controlling is a goal oriented function.
Controlling as a function of management ensures that the overall directions
of individuals and groups are consistent with short and long range plans of
the organization. So it is completely a goal oriented function.
2. Controlling is an all pervasive function.
Controlling is a function which is applicable to all types of organizations and at all
levels. For example the top managers are concerned with administrative control,
which is exercised through broad policies, plans and other directives. The middle
level managers are concerned with the executive control for the purpose of getting
the plans, policies, and programmes executed. At the lower level, supervisors
exercise operational control to ensure successful performing of actual operations.
3. Controlling is a continuous function
Control is not a one time activity. Rather, it is a dynamic process that involves
constant analysis of actual and planned performance. The resultant deviations, if
any, are corrected as per the need of the situation. For example if a firm X Ltd., a
ready made garment manufacturing unit sets a target of manufacturing 10,000
premium shirts in a month and is only able to manufacture 8,000 shirts than the
controlling mechanism will help in finding the deviation and causes associated
with it. This process will carry on every month for the organization in this case.
4. Controlling is both a backward looking as well as forward looking
function:- Effective control is not possible without analyzing our past
mistakes so from this point of view we can call it backward looking. But the
business environment is ever changing and controlling helps bring in
changes in the organization in a conducive manner. So we cannot ignore the
forward looking aspect of it as well.
top level
middle level
lower level management
concerned with administrative
management
concerned with the executve
control
supervisors exercise
operational control
manufacturing
units
trading units
NGO's and
others
financial units
controlling is applicable to all
forms of organisation
page 72
Business Studies- XII
5. Controlling is a dynamic process- Since controlling requires taking
reviewable methods, changes have to be made wherever possible.
6. Controlling is a positive process- George Terry says, the function of
controlling is positive -it is to make things happen, i.e. to achieve the goal
within stated constraints, or by means of the planned activities. Controlling
should never be viewed as being negative in character - as a hurdle in getting
objectives won. Controlling is a managerial necessity and a help, not an
impediment or a hindrance.
Limitations of Controlling
1. Little control on external factors : Generally no enterprise can control
external factors such as government policies, technological changes,
competitions etc.
2. Resistance from employees : Control is often resisted by employees. They
see it as a restriction on their freedom e.g. Employees may resist and go
against the use of cameras to observe them minutely.
3. Costly affair : Control is a costly affair as it involves a lot of expenditure
time and efforts.
4. Difficulty in setting quantitative standards : Control system looses some
of its effectiveness, when standards cannot be defined in quantitative terms.
In the absence of quantitative standards, comparison with standards
becomes difficult.
Relationship between Planning and Controlling :
Planning and controlling are interrelated and infact reinforce each other in
the sense that:-
1. Planning is pre-requisite for controlling. Plans provide the standard for
controlling. Thus, without planning, controlling is blind. If the standards are
not set in advance managers have nothing to control.
2. Planning is meaningless without controlling. It is fruitful when control is
exercised. It discovers deviations and initiates corrective measures.
3. Effectiveness of planning can be measured with the help of controlling.
4. Planning is looking ahead and controlling is looking back:- Planning is a
future oriented function as it involves looking in advance and making
policies for the maximum utilisation of resources in future that is why it is
page 73
Business Studies- XII
considered as forward looking function. In controlling we look back to the
performance which is already achieved by the employees and compare it
with plans. If there are deviations in actual and standard performance or
output then controlling function makes sure that in future actual
performance matches with the planned performance. Therefore, controlling
is also a forward looking function.
Thus planning & controlling cannot be separated. The two are
supplementary functions which support each other for successful execution
of both the functions.
Planning makes controlling effective where as controlling improves future
planning.
Controlling Process :
1. Setting performance Standards : Standards are the criteria against which
actual performance would be measured. Thus standards become basis for
comparison and the manager insists on following of standards.
2. Measurement of Actual performance : Performance should be measured
in an objective and reliable manner which includes personal observation,
sample checking. Performance should be measured in same terms in which
standards have been established, this will facilitate comparison.
3. Comparing Actual performance with standard : This step involves
comparison of actual performance with the standard. Such comparison will
reveal the deviation between actual and desired performance. If the
performance matches the standards it may be assumed that everything is
under control.
4. Analysing Deviations - The deviations from the standards are assessed and
analysed to identify the causes of deviations.
5. Taking Corrective Action :- The final step in the controlling process is
taking corrective action. No corrective action is required when the
deviations are within the acceptable limits. But where significant deviations
occur corrective action is taken.
1 Mark Questions :-
1. Explain the meaning of controlling.
2. Write the first step of controlling process.
page 74
Business Studies- XII
3. What are the two types of deviations.
4. Which feature of controlling does it refer to when it is said that 'Controlling
is exercised at all levels of management' ?
3-4 Marks Questions
5. Why is controlling called an all pervasive function ? Explain.
6. Why is controlling called a positive process ?
7. How is controlling both forward looking as well as backward looking ?
8. Explain the characteristics of controlling.
9. There are two managers Mr. X and Mr. Y. They both have different point of
views. Mr. X says that “controlling is backward looking” while Mr. Y
contradicts by saying that “controlling is forward looking”. Who do you
think is right ? Give reason.
9. ABC Ltd. is engaged in manufacturing readymade garments. The target
production is 500 shirts per day. The company has been successfully
attaining this target until last three months. The actual production has been
varying between 400-450 shirts. Which management function is needed to
rectify the situation ? Write any two features associated with it.
5-6 Marks Questions :
11. Explain the various steps involved in the process of control.
12. Explain the importance of controlling in an organisation.
13. 'Planning and controlling are mutually interrelated and inter-dependent
activities'. Explain.
14. Explain the limitations of controlling .
page 75
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 9
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Introduction :-
Money required for carrying out business activities is called business finance.
Finance is needed to establish a business, to run it, to modernize it, to expand or
diversify it.
Financial management is the activity concerned with the planning, raising,
controlling and administering of funds used in the business. It is concerned with
optimal procurement as well as usage of finance. It aims at ensuring availability of
enough funds whenever required as well as avoiding idle finance.
Objectives of Financial Management
1. Wealth Maximisation :- The main objective of Financial management is
to maximise shareholder's wealth, for which achievement of optimum
capital structure and proper utilization of funds is a must.
2. To procure sufficient funds for the organisation – Adequate and regular
supply of funds is to be maintained for smooth operations of the business.
3. To ensure effective utilisation of funds.
4. To ensure safety of funds- The chances of risk in investments should be
minimum possible.
5. To attain optimum capital structure- A sound and economical
combination of shares and debentures must be attempted so as to maintain
optimum capital structure.
Financial Decisions
Financial Decisions
Investment Decision
Financing Decision
Dividend Decision
Working Capital
Capital Budgeting
Financial Institutions
Debt
Equity
Distribution of Dividends
Retained Earnings
page 76
Business Studies- XII
Every company is required to take three main financial decisions which are
as follows:-
1. Investment Decision :-
It relates to how the firm's funds are invested in different assets. Investment
decision can be long-term or short-term. A long term investment decision is called
capital budgeting decision as they involve huge amounts of funds and are
irreversible except at a huge cost while short term investment decisions are called
working capital decisions, which affect day to day working of a business.
Factors affecting Investment Decisions / Capital Budgeting decisions
l. Cash flows of the project : The series of cash receipts and payments over
the life of an investment proposal should be considered and analysed for
selecting the best proposal.
2. Rate of Return : The expected returns from each proposal and risk involved
in them should be taken into account to select the best proposal.
3. Investment Criteria Involved : The various investment proposals are
evaluated on the basis of capital budgeting techniques. These involve
calculation regarding investment amount, interest rate, cash flows, rate of
return etc.
2. Financing Decision : It relates to the amount of finance to be raised from
various long term sources. The main sources of funds are owner’s funds i.e.
equity / share holder's funds and the borrowed funds i.e. Debts. Borrowed
funds have to be repaid at a fixed time and thus some amount of financial risk
(i.e. risk of default on payment) is there in debt financing. Moreover interest
on borrowed funds has to be paid regardless of whether or not a firm has
made a profit. On the other hand, shareholder's fund involve no commitment
regarding payment of returns or repayment of capital. A firm mixes both
debt and equity in making financing decisions.
Factors Affecting Financing Decision
1. Cost :- The cost of raising funds from different sources are different. The
cheapest source should be selected.
2. Risk :- The risk associated with different sources is different. More risk is
associated with borrowed funds as compared to owner's fund as interest is
paid on it and it is repaid also, after a fixed period of time or on expiry of its
tenure.
page 77
Business Studies- XII
3. Floation Cost :- The costs involved in issuing securities such as brokers
commission, underwriters' fees, expenses on prospectus etc are called
flotation costs. Higher the flotation cost, less attractive is the source of
finance.
4. Cash flow position of the business :- In case the cash flow position of a
company is good enough then it can easily use borrowed funds and pay
interest on time.
5. Control Considerations : In case the existing shareholders want to retain
the complete control of business then finance can be raised through
borrowed funds but when they are ready for dilution of control over
business, equity can be used for raising finance.
6. State of Capital Markets : - During boom, finance can easily be raised by
issuing shares but during depression period, raising finance by means of
debt is easy.
7. Period of Finance - For permanent capital requirement, Equity shares must
be issued as they are not to be paid back and for long and medium term
requirement, preference shares or debentures can be issued.
3. Dividend Decision :-
Dividend refers to that part of the profit which is distributed to shareholders.
A company is required to decide how much of the profit earned by it should
be distributed among shareholders and how much should be retained. The
decision regarding dividend should be taken keeping in view the overall
objective of maximising shareholder's wealth.
Factors affecting Dividend Decision :
1. Earnings : - Companies having high and stable earning could declare high
rate of dividends as dividends are paid out of current and past earnings.
2. Stability of Dividends : Companies generally follow the policy of stable
dividend. The dividend per share is not altered/ changed in case earnings
change by small proportion or increase in earnings is temporary in nature.
3. Growth Prospects : In case there are growth prospects for the company in
the near future them it will retain its earning and thus, no or less dividend
will be declared.
4. Cash Flow Positions : Dividends involve an outflow of cash and thus,
availability of adequate cash is foremost requirement for declaration of
page 78
Business Studies- XII
dividends.
5. Preference of Shareholders : While deciding about dividend the
preference of shareholders is also taken into account. In case shareholders
desire for dividend then company may go for declaring the same.
6. Taxation Policy : A company is required to pay tax on dividend declared by
it. If tax on dividend is higher, company will prefer to pay less by way of
dividends whereas if tax rates are lower then more dividends can be declared
by the company.
7. Issue of bonus shares - Companies with large reserves may also distribute
bonus shares to increase their capital base as it signifies growth of the
company and enhances its reputation also.
8. Legal constraints – Under provisions of Companies Act, all earnings can't
be distributed and the company has to provide for various reserves. This
limits the capacity of company to declare dividend.
FINANCIAL PLANNING
Financial Planning :-
The process of estimating the fund requirement of a business and specifying
the sources of funds is called financial planning. It ensures that enough
funds are available at right time so that a firm could honour its commitments
and carry out its plans.
Importance of Financial Planning
(1) To ensure availability of adequate funds at right time.
(2) To see that the firm does not raise funds unnecessarily.
(3) It provides policies and procedures for the sound administration of finance
function.
(4) It results in preparation of plans for future. Thus new projects can be under
taken smoothly.
(5) It attempts to achieve a balance between inflow and outflow of funds.
Adequate liquidity is ensured throughout the year.
(6) It serves as the basis of financial control. The management attempts to
ensure utilization of funds in tune with the financial plans.
page 79
Business Studies- XII
Capital Structure
Capital structure refers to the mix between owner's funds and borrowed
funds. It will be said to be optimal when the proportion of debt and equity is
such that it results in an increase in the value of the equity share. The
proportion of debt in the overall capital of a firm is called Financial
Leverage or Capital Gearing. When the proportion of debt in the total capital
is high then the firm will be called highly levered firm but when the
proportion of debts in the total capital is less, then the firm will be called low
levered firm.
Factors affecting Capital Structure:-
(1) Trading on Equity : It refers to the increase in profit earned by the equity
shareholders due to the presence of fixed financial charges like interest.
Trading on equity happens when the rate of earning of an organisation is
higher than the cost at which funds have been borrowed and as a result
equity shareholders get higher rate of dividend per share. The use of more
debt along with the equity increases EPS as the debt carries fixed amount of
interest which is tax deductible. Let us understand with an example :-
Thus the EPS of company Y is higher than company X because of
application of 'Trading on equity'.
2. Cash flow position :- In case a company has strong cash flow position then
it may raise finance by issuing debts, as they are to be paid back after some
time.
3. Interest Coverage Ratio :- It refers to the number of times earning before
interest and taxes of a company covers the interest obligation. High Interest
Company X
Company Y
Share capital ( of Rs. 10
each )
Debentures @ 10%
10,00,000
5,00,000
5,00,000
Total capital
10,00,000
10,00,000
Earning before int. and taxes(EBIT)
@ 25 % p.a
Less interest on deb.
Profit before tax
Less tax (40%)
Profit after tax ( available for
equity share holders)
No. of equity shares.
Earnings per share
2,50,000
2,50,000
(1,00,000)
1,50,000
1,00,000
`. 1.50
2,50,000
(50,000)
2,00,000
(80,000)
1,20,000
50,000
`. 2.40
page 80
Business Studies- XII
coverage ratio indicates that company can have more of borrowed funds.
Formula for calculating ICR = EBIT / interest.
4. Return on Investment :- If return on investment is higher than the rate of
interest on debt then it will be beneficial for a firm to raise finance through
borrowed funds.
5. Floatation Cost :- The cost involved in issuing securities such as brokers'
commission, under -writers' fees, cost of prospectus etc is called flotation
cost. While selecting the source of finance, flotation cost should be taken
into account.
6. Control :- When existing shareholders are ready to dilute their control over
the firm then new equity shares can be issued for raising finance but in
reverse situation debts should be used.
7. Tax Rate :- Interest on debt is allowed as a deduction, thus in case of high
tax rate, debts are preferred over equity but in case of low tax rate more
preference is given to equity.
8. Flexibility:- A good financial structure should be flexible enough to have
scope for expansion or contraction of capitalization whenever the need
arises. Issue of debenture and preference shares brings flexibility.
9. Capital market conditions :– Conditions prevailing in capital market
influences the determination of securities to be issued. Like during
depression, people do not like to take risk and so are not interested in equity
shares but during boom, investors are ready to take risk and invest in equity
shares.
Fixed Capital
Fixed capital refers to investment in long-term assets. Investment in fixed
assets is for longer duration and they must be financed through long-term
sources of capital. Decisions relating to fixed capital involve huge capital/
funds and are not reversible without incurring heavy losses.
Factors affecting requirement of Fixed capital
1. Nature of Business : Manufacturing concerns require huge investment in
fixed assets & thus huge fixed capital is required for them but trading
concerns need less fixed capital as they are not required to purchase plant
and machinery etc.
2. Scale of Operations : An organisation operating on large scale requires
page 81
Business Studies- XII
more fixed capital as compared to an organisation operating on small scale.
For Example - A large scale steel enterprise like TISCO requires large
investment as compared to a mini steel plant.
3. Choice of Technique :- An organisation using capital intensive
techniques requires more investment in plant & machinery as compared to
an organisation using labour intensive techniques.
4. Technology upgradation :- Organisations using assets which become
obsolete faster require more fixed capital as compared to other
organisations.
5. Growth Prospects :- Companies having more growth plans require more
fixed capital. In order to expand production capacity more plant &
machinery are required.
6. Diversification :- In case a company goes for diversification then it will
require more fixed capital to invest in fixed assets like plant and machinery.
7. Distribution Channels :- The firm which sells its product through
wholesalers and retailers requires less fixed capital.
8. Collaboration :- If companies are under collaboration, Joint venture, then
they need less fixed capital as they share plant & machinery with their
collaborators.
Working Capital
Working Capital refers to the capital required for day to day working of an
organisation. Apart from the investment in fixed assets every business
organisation needs to invest in current assets, which can be converted into cash or
cash equivalents within a period of one year. They provide liquidity to the
business. Working capital is of two types - Gross working capital and Net working
capital. Investment in all the current assets is called Gross Working Capital
whereas the excess of current assets over current liabilities is called Net Working
Capital. Following are the factors which affect working capital requirements of an
organisation:-
1. Nature of Business : A trading organisation needs a lower amount of
working capital as compared to a manufacturing organisation, as trading
organisation undertakes no processing work.
2. Scale of operations : - An organisation operating on large scale will require
page 82
Business Studies- XII
more inventory and thus, its working capital requirement will be more as
compared to small organisation.
3. Business Cycle: In the time of boom more production will be undertaken
and so more working capital will be required during that time as compared
to depression.
4. Seasonal Factors : During peak season demand of a product will be high
and thus high working capital will be required as compared to lean season.
5. Credit allowed : If credit is allowed by a concern to its customers than it
will require more working capital but if goods are sold on cash basis than
less working capital is required.
6. Credit availed : If a firm is able to purchase raw materials on credit from its
suppliers than less working capital will be required.
7. Inflation : Working capital requirement is also determined by price level
changes. For example, during inflation prices of raw material, wages also
rise resulting in increase in working capital requirements.
8. Turnover of working capital- Turnover means speed with which the
working capital is converted into cash by sale of goods. If it is speedier, the
amount of working capital required will be less.
1 Mark Questions
1. Name the concept which increases the return on equity shares with a
change in the capital structure.
2. A company wants to establish a new unit in which a machinery worth
` 10 lakhs is involved. Identify the type of decision involved in financial
management.
3. What is the primary aim of financial management ?
4. What is financial risk ?
5. Why service-industry requires less working capital ?
6. Identify the decision taken in financial management which affects the
liquidity as well as profitability of business.
7. 'A' Ltd. earns a net profit of Rs 50 crores. Atul, the finance manager of 'A'
page 83
Business Studies- XII
Ltd. has to decide how to appropriate their profits. Which financial decision
will help him in deciding it ?
3/4 Marks Questions
1. What are Capital Budgeting Decisions? Explain three factors affecting
capital budgeting decisions.
2. What is meant by financial planning ? Explain its objectives.
3. Explain the meaning and objectives of financial management.
4. Explain Financial Leverage and Trading on Equity.
5. Explain the various financial decisions taken by an organisation.
6. How does 'Trading on equity' affect the capital structure of a company ?
Explain with the help of a suitable example.
5/6 Marks Questions
1. Define capital structure. Explain five factors affecting it.
2. Explain six factors affecting fixed capital of a concern.
3. Give the meaning of Working capital. Explain any five factors determing
Working capital requirements.
4. What is meant by Dividend Decision ? Explain any five factors affecting it.
5. Suggest Working capital requirement for the following manufacturing
concerns:-
a) Bread
b) Sugar
c) Coolers
d) Motor Car
e) Locomotive
f) Furniture on Specific order.
6. Explain the three major decisions taken by a Finance Manager.
page 84
Business Studies- XII
UNIT - 10
FINANCIAL MARKETS
Introduction :
Financial Market is a market for creation and exchange of financial assets like
shares, bonds etc. It helps in mobilising savings and channelising them into the
most productive uses. It helps to link the savers and the investors by mobilizing
funds between them. The persons or institutions by which allocation of funds is
done are called Financial Intermediaries. They bring together borrowers and
lenders and make funds available to those willing to pay for their use.
Functions of Financial Market:-
1. Mobilisation of Savings and channeling them into the most productive
uses: Financial market facilitates the transfer of savings from savers to
investors and thus helps to channelise surplus funds into the most
productive use.
2. Helps in Price Determination : Financial Market helps in interaction of
savers and investors which in turn helps in the determination of prices of the
financial assets such as shares, debentures etc.
3. Provide Liquidity to Financial Assets : Financial market facilitates easy
purchase and sale of financial assets. Thus, it provides liquidity to them so
that they can be easily converted into cash whenever required.
4. Reduce cost of transactions : Financial market provides valuable
information about securities which helps in saving time, efforts and money
and thus it reduces cost of transactions.
Household
(Savers)
Banks and
Financial Markets
Business Firms
(Investors)
page 85
Business Studies- XII
Types of Financial Markets
Money Market :-
It is a market for short term funds / securities whose period of maturity is upto one
year. The major participants in the money market are RBI, Commercial Banks,
Non-Banking Finance Companies, State Government, Large Corporate Houses
and Mutual Funds. The main instruments of money market are as follows:-
1. Treasury Bills : They are issued by the RBI on behalf of the Central
Government to meet its short-term requirement of funds. They are issued at
a price which is lower than their face value and are repaid at par. They are
available for a minimum amount of ` 25000 and in multiples thereof. They
are also known as Zero Coupon Bonds. They are negotiable instruments i.e.
they are freely transferable.
2. Commercial Paper : It is a short term unsecured promissory note issued by
large credit worthy companies to raise short term funds at lower rates of
interest than market rates. They are negotiable instruments transferable by
endorsement and delivery with a fixed maturity period of 15 days to one
year.
3. Call Money : It is short term finance repayable on demand, with a maturity
period of one day to 15 days, used for interbank transactions. Call Money is
a method by which banks borrow from each other to be able to maintain the
Money Market
(forshort term requirement)
Capital Market
(for long term requirement)
Participants :
R.B.I., Com. Bank, Investor, LIC
& others
Financial Markets
Primary Market
(for new issue
of shares and
deb.)
Secondary
Market
(Issued
Securities are
Traded)
Market Instruments
1.
Treasury Bill
2.
Com. Paper
3.
Call Money
4.
Certificate of Deposits
5.
Commercial Bill
Participants :
Bank, Investor, Mut. Fund.
LIC and others
Controlled by SEBI
page 86
Business Studies- XII
cash reserve ratio as per RBI. The interest rate paid on call money loans is
known as the call rate.
4. Certificate of Deposit : It is an unsecured instrument issued in bearer form
by Commercial Banks & Financial Institutions. They can be issued to
individuals, Corporations and companies for raising money for a short
period ranging from 91 days to one year.
5. Commercial Bill : It is a bill of exchange used to finance the working
capital requirements of business firms. A seller of the goods draws the bill
on the buyer when goods are sold on credit. When the bill is accepted by the
buyer it becomes a marketable instrument and is called a trade bill. These
bills can be discounted with a bank if the seller needs funds before the bill
maturity.
Capital Market :
It is a market for long term funds where debt and equity are traded. It
consists of development banks, commercial banks and stock exchanges.
The capital market can be divided into two parts:-
1. Primary Market.
2. Secondary Market.
Primary Market :
lt deals with the new securities which are issued for the first time. It is also known
as the New Issue Market. The investors in this market are banks, financial
institutions, insurance companies, mutual funds and individuals. It has no fixed
geographical location and only buying of securities takes place in the primary
market.
Methods of floatation of New Issues in the Primary Market:-
1. Offer through Prospectus : It involves inviting subscription from the
public through issue of prospectus. A prospectus makes a direct appeal to
investors to raise capital through an advertisement in newspapers and
magazines.
2. Offer for sale : Under this method securities are offered for sale through
intermediaries like issuing houses or stock brokers. The company sells
securities to intermediary / broker at an agreed price and the broker resells
them to investors at a higher price.
page 87
Business Studies- XII
3. Private Placements : It refers to the process in which securities are allotted
to institutional investor and some selected individuals.
4. Rights Issue : It refers to the issue in which new shares are offered to the
existing shareholders in proportion to the number of shares they already
possess.
5. e-IPOs :- It is a method of issuing securities through an on-line system of
stock exchange. A company proposing to issue capital to the public through
the on-line system of the stock exchange has to enter into an agreement with
the stock exchange. This is called an e-initial public offer. SEBI's registered
brokers have to be appointed for the purpose of accepting applications and
placing orders with the company.
Secondary Market :
It is also known as the stock market or stock exchange where purchase and sale of
existing securities takes place. They are located at specified places and both the
buying as well as selling of securities takes place.
Difference between Primary and Secondary Market
Basis Primary Market Secondary Market
1. Securities Only new Securities Existing securities
are traded. are traded.
2. Price of Prices of securities Price are determined
Securities are determined by the by the forces of demand
management of the and supply of the
company securities.
3. Purchase & Securities are sold to Investors exchange
Sale. investors directly by the ownership of securities.
company or through
intermediary.
4. Place of There is no fixed Located at specified
Market geographical location. places.
5. Medium Only buying of securities Both buying & selling of
takes place. securities can take place.
page 88
Business Studies- XII
Stock Exchange / Share Market
A Stock Exchange is an institution which provides a platform for buying and
selling of existing securities. It facilitates the exchange of a security i.e. share,
debenture etc. into money and vice versa. Following are some of the important
functions of a Stock Exchange:-
1. Providing liquidity and Marketability to Existing Securities : Stock
Exchange provides a ready and continuous market for the sale and purchase
of securities.
2. Pricing of Securities : Stock Exchange helps in constant valuation of
securities which provide instant information to both buyers and sellers and
thus helps in pricing of securities which is based on the forces of demand &
supply.
3. Safety of transaction : The members of a stock exchange are well
regulated, who are required to work within the legal framework. This
ensures safety of transactions.
4. Contributes to Economic Growth : Stock exchange provides a platform
by which savings get channelised into the most productive investment
proposals, which leads to capital formation & economic growth.
5. Spreading of Equity culture : Stock exchange helps in educating public
about investments in securities which leads to spreading of Equity culture.
6. Providing scope for speculation : Stock exchange provides scope within
the provisions of law for speculation in a restricted and controlled manner.
Trading Procedure on a Stock Exchange:-
1. Selection of Broker : In order to trade on a Stock Exchange first a broker is
selected who should be a member of stock exchange as they can only trade
on the stock exchange.
2. Placing the order : After selecting a broker, the investors specify the type
and number of securities they want to buy or sell.
3. Executing the order : The broker will buy or sell the securities as per the
instructions of the investor.
4. Settlement : Transactions on a stock exchange may be carried out on either
cash basis or carry over basis (i.e. badla). The time period for which the
page 89
Business Studies- XII
transactions are carried forward is referred to as accounts which vary from a
fortnight to a month. All transactions made during one account are to be
settled by payment for purchases and by delivery of share certificates,
which is a proof of ownership of securities by an individual.
Earlier trading on a stock exchange took place through a public outcry or
auction system which is now replaced by an online screen based electronic
trading system. Moreover, to eliminate, the problems of theft, forgery,
transfer, delays etc an electronic book entry from a holding and transferring
securities has been introduced, which is called process of dematerialisation
of securities.
(Difference between Capital and Money Market.)
S.No. Basis Capital Market Money Market
1. Participants Financial Institutions, Banks, RBI, Banks Financial
Corporate Entities, foreign Institutions & finance
investors and individuals. companies
2. Instruments Equity shares, bonds Treasury Bills, Trade bills,
Traded preference shares and commercial paper, call
debentures. money etc.
3. Investment Does not necessarily Entail huge sums of
outlay require a huge financial money as the instruments
outlay. are quite expensive.
4. Duration Deals in medium & long Deals in short term funds
term securities having having maturity period
maturity period of over upto one year. one year.
5. Liquidity Securities are less liquid Money market instruments
as compared to money are highly liquid. market
securities.
6. Expected High return Low return
7. Safety Capital Market instruments Money market instruments
are riskier both with respect are generally much safer
to return and repayment. with a minimum risk of
default.
page 90
Business Studies- XII
Depository Services and DEMAT Accounts :Keeping in the mind the
difficulties to transfer of shares in physical form, SEBI has developed a new
system in which trading in shares is made compulsory in electronic form
Depository services system. and D-Mat Account are very basis of this system.
Depository services:-'Depository' is an institution / organization which holds
securities (e.g. shares, debentures, bonds, mutual funds etc.) in electronic form, in
which trading is done. The services provided by a Depository are termed as
'Depository Services'. At present there are two depositories in India: NSDL
(National Securities Depository Ltd.) and CDSL (Central Depository Services
Ltd.). which are known as "Depository Participants". (DPs)
Services provided by Depository
? Dematerialisation (usually known as demat) is converting physical
certificates to electronic form.
? Rematerialisation, known as remat, is reverse of demat, i.e getting
physical certificates from the electronic securities.
? Transfer of securities, change of beneficial ownership.
? Settlement of trades done on exchange connected to the
Depository. Now a days on-line paper-less trading in shares of the
company is compulsory in India. Depository services is the name of that
mechanism. In this system transfer of ownership in shares take place by
means of book entry without the physical delivery of shares. When an
investor wants to deal in shares of any company he has to open a Demat
account. There are four players who participate in this system.
1. The Depository : A depository is an institution which holds the shares of
an investor in electronic form. There are two depository institutions in
India these are NSDL and CDSL.
2. The Depository Participant : He opens the account of Investor and
maintains securities records.
?3. The Investor : He is a person who wants to deal in shares whose name is
recorded
?.4. The Issuing Company : That organisation which issues the
securities. This issuing company sends a list of the shareholders to the
page 91
Business Studies- XII
depositories.
Benefits of Depository Services
? Sale and Purchase of shares and stocks of any company on any stock
Exchange.
? Saves time.
? Lower transaction costs.
? Ease in trading.
? Transparency in transactions.
? No counterfeiting of security certificate
.? Physical presence of investor is not required in stock exchange.
? Risk of mutilation and loss of security certificate is eliminated.
Demat Account
Demat account is the abbreviation of 'Dematerialized Account'. Demat
(Dematerialized account refers to an account which an Indian citizen must open
with the depository) participant (banks, stockbrokers) to trade in listed securities
in electronic form wherein one can hold shares of various companies in the
Dematerialized {electronic} form. Access to De-mat account requires an internet
password and a transaction password. Transfer and purchase of securities can then
be initiated. Purchase and sale of securities on the De-mat account are
automatically made once transaction is confirmed and completed.
Benefits of Demat Account
1. Reduces paper work.
2. Elimination of problems on transfer of shares such as loss, theft and delay.
3. Exemption of stamp duty when transfer of shares.
4. The concept of odd lot stand abolished.
5. Increase liquidity through speedy settlement.
6. Attract foreign investors and promoting foreign investment.
page 92
Business Studies- XII
7. A single demat account can hold investments in both equity and debt
instruments.
8. Traders can work from anywhere.
9. Automatic credit into demat account for shares arising out of bonus / split
/consolidation / merger.
10. Immediate transfer of securities.
11. Change in address recorded with a DP gets registered with all companies in
which investor holds securities eliminating the need to correspond with
each of them.
Opening of Demat Account
A Demat account is opened on the same lines as that of a bank account. Prescribed
account opening forms available with the DP, need to be filled in. Standard
agreement is to be signed by the client and the DP, which details the rights and
obligation of both parties. Along with the form, the client is required to attach
photograph, attested copies of residence proof and proof of identity need to be
submitted.
Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI)
SEBI was established by Government of India on 12 April 1988 as an interim
administrative body to promote orderly and healthy growth of securities market
and for investor protection. It was given a statutory status on 30 January 1992
through an ordinance, which was later replaced by an Act of Parliament known as
the SEBI Act, 1992. It seeks to protect the interest of investors in new and second
hand securities.
Objectives of SEBI
1. To regulate stock exchange and the securities market to promote their
orderly functioning.
2. To protect the rights and interests of investors and to guide & educate them.
3 To prevent trade mal practices such as internal trading.
page 93
Business Studies- XII
4. To regulate and develop a code of conduct and fair practices by
intermediaries like brokers, merchant bankers etc.
Functions of SEBI
The SEBI performs three important functions :-
1. Regulatory functions - These functions are performed by SEBI to regulate
the business in stock exchange.
2. Development functions - These functions are performed by SEBI to
promote and develop activities in stock.
3. Protective functions - These functions are performed by SEBI to protect
the interest of investors and provide safety on investments.
Functions of SEBI
Regulatory Functions Development Functions Protective Functions
1. Framing Rule & Regulations 1. Training of intermediaries 1. Prohibiting of fraudulent &
unfair trade practices.
2. Registration of brokers 2. Conducting Research & 2. Check on insider trading.
& sub-brokers. Publishing useful
information.
3. Registration of collective 3. Undertaking measures to 3. Ensure investors protection.
investmemt schemes & develop capital market by
mutual funds. adopting flexible approach
4. Regulation of stock broker, 4. Educating Investors to 4. Promote fair practices & code of
portfolio exchanges, broaden their understanding conduct in securities market.
underwriters & merchant
bankers
5. Regulation of task over bids 5. Permitting lnternet trading 5. Check on price rigging
by companies. through registered stock
brokers
6. Levying fee or other charges 6. Check on preferential allotment.
as per act.
page 94
Business Studies- XII
One Marks Questions :
1. What is the maturity period of a commercial Paper?
2. What is a Treasury Bill?
3. AB Ltd. has sold 1 lakh equity shares of Rs. 10 each at Rs. 12 per share
to an investment banker, who offered them to the public at Rs. 20 each.
Identify the method of floatation.
4. State any two instruments of Capital Market.
5. Who acts as the Watchdog of Security Market in India ?
6. Who is the Borrower of call money ?
7. What is the other name of Zero coupon Bonds ?
8. Who issues the treasury Bill ?
9. What is the other name of Primary Market ?
10. What is a Prospectus ?
11. What is Dematerialization ?
12. What is the minimum amount of Treasury Bill ?
13. What is Demat A/C ?
14. Write one benefit of Demat Account ?
15. What do you mean by 'Depository' ?
I6. What is the full form of CDSL?
17. What is the full form of NSDL?
18. What is the full form of DEMAT ?
19. Where is a DEMAT account used?
20. Shabnam wants to invest her savings in share market. What is the most
important requirement for this?
21. Julie wants to get her share certificates in electronic form. What is the
name of service provided by Depository?
page 95
Business Studies- XII
3/4 Marks Questions
1. State the various protective functions of SEBI.
2. What is money market? Explain its three instruments.
3. What is meant by commercial paper & certificate of Deposit ?
4. State any four regulatory functions of the SEBI.
5. Write difference between Primary and Secondary Market.
6. What are the services provided by a Depository?
7. What are the benefits of opening a DEMAT account?
8. Harjeet wants to invest money in share market. As a Financial advisor
what will you suggest him to do and why?
(Hint: Open a Demat account and explain benefits)
5/6 Marks Questions
1. Explain any five functions of stock exchange.
2. Why was SEBI set up ? State its development functions.
3. Explain any five methods of floating new issues in the primary market.
4. Explain the trading procedure on stock exchange.
5. Distinguish between capital market and money market on the following
basis:-
a) Participants.
b) Instruments Traded.
c) Duration of Securities Traded.
d) Expected Return.
e) Safety.
f) Liquidity.
page 96
Business Studies- XII
6. 'Primary Markets contribute to capital formation directly Secondary
Market does so indirectly'. Explain.
7. You are finance expert. Your father feels that there is no difference between
Primary Market and Secondary Market. Where do you differ with him.
How would you convince him. Give reasons in support of your answer.
8. What are the benefits of depository services and Demat Account.
9. Explain the constituents of depository services.
10. Mohan wants to sell 50 shares of Tata Motors. Explain the trading
procedure of shares.
page 97
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 11
MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Market : is used for a place where the buyers and sellers meet and conduct
buying and selling activities. In the traditional sense, the market means a place
where buyers and sellers gather to enter into transaction involving the exchange
of goods and services but today business can be conducted on telephone, through
mail, internet etc. In modern marketing sense the term market has a broad
meaning. It refers to a set of actual and potential buyers of a product or service.
Marketeer or seller : If a customer is the seeker of satisfaction the marketeer is
the provider of satisfaction. Marketeer can be a person or an organisation who
makes available the products or services and offers them to the customer with an
intention of satisfying the customer needs and wants.
Marketing :
Marketing is a social process whereby people exchange goods & services for
money or for something of value to them. Anything that is of value to the other can
be marketed e.g.
1. Physical Products - T.V, Mobile phone etc.
2. Services - Insurance, education etc.
3. Person - Selection for different posts.
4. Place- visit - Agra, Taj Mahal , etc.
5. Events - Fashion show, Films, Festivals
Important features of Marketing :-
1. Needs and wants : Satisfaction of the needs and wants of individuals and
organisations.
2. Creating a market offering : Complete offer for a product of service.
3. Customer value : greatest benefit or value for the money.
4. Exchange mechanism : Exchange of products / services for money / for
something of value to them.
page 98
Business Studies- XII
Meaning and concept of Marketing management -
Marketing management means management of the marketing functions.- It is the
process of organising, directing and controlling the activities related to marketing
of goods and services to satisfy customers' needs & achieve organisational goals.
Marketing management involves the following steps or activities:-
1. Choosing a target market - e.g., a manufacturer may choose to make
ready-made garments upto the age of 5 years for children.
2. Creating customers in target market - To increase the number of
customers by analysing their needs, wants etc.
3. Creating superior value - To make the product better than competitors
products for customers .
Functions of Marketing / Marketing activities
1. Marketing research : Gathering and analyzing marketing information i.e.
what the customers want to buy, when they are likely to buy, in what
quantities do they buy, from where do they buy etc.
2. Marketing planning : Specific plan for increasing the level of production,
promotion of the products etc and specify the action programmes to achieve
these objectives.
3. Product designing and development : Marketeer must take decision like,
what-product ? which model / size ? brand name ? Packaging ? quality
level ? So that customer needs are satisfied.
4. Buying & assembling : e.g. Car-Raw materials like steel, tyres, batteries,
seats, stearing wheel etc are bought & then assembled in the form of a
complete product.
5. Packaging / Labelling : designing the package for the product and put label
on the package.
6. Branding : Creating a distinct identity of the product from that of
competitors e.g. Videocon washing machine, Usha Fans, Lux Soap etc.
Concepts & Philosophies of Marketing :-
1. Production concept : Profits could be maximized by producing products
on a large scale, thereby reducing average cost of production.
page 99
Business Studies- XII
Drawback : Customers do not always buy inexpensive products.
2. Product Concept : When the supply of products increases customers begin
to prefer products of superior quality and features. Therefore the focus
shifted from quantity of production to quality of products.
3. Sales Concept : With the passage of time the marketing environment
underwent future change of quality and availability does not ensure survival
and growth of the firm because of competition to sell quality products.
Therefore firms must undertake aggressive selling and promotion efforts to
make customer buy their products.
4. Marketing Concept : Implies that a firm can achieve its goals by
identifying needs of the customer and satisfying them better than the
competitors. Customer satisfaction is the precondition for realising the
firm's goal and objectives.
5. Societal Marketing Concept : Under this concept customer satisfaction is
supplemented by social welfare. Some products bring harmful effect on
environment so these should not be supplied. It pays attention to the social,
ethical and ecological aspects of marketing.
Meaning and concept of Marketing and selling :
Marketing is a wide term. It refers to a large set of activities of which selling is just
one part. A marketeer before making the sale does a lot of other activities such as
planning the type, design of the product, the price and selecting the distribution
outlets at which the same would be available.
Selling - refers to the sale of goods or service through publicity, promotion and
salesmanship. The title of the product is transferred from seller to buyer. The
entire focus in selling is to covert the product into cash.
page 100
Business Studies- XII
Difference between selling & marketing
Meaning and concept of Marketing Mix-In orders to satisfy the needs and wants
of its customer, every business firm must develop an appropriate marketing mix.
Marketing Mix
Marketing mix refers to ingredients or the tools or the variables which the
marketeer mixes in order to interact with a particular market.
Basis
Selling
Marketing
Scope
It is only a part of
process of
marketing .
It is a wide term
consisting of a
number of
activities such as
identification,
customers need
etc.
Focus
Transfer of the
title from seller to
consumer.
Achieving
maximum
satisfaction of
customer's needs
and wants.
Pre-dominance Product is given
priority
Costumer is
treated as the king.
Aim Profits through
sales volume.
Profits through
customer
satisfaction.
Emphasis Bending the
customer
according to the
product.
To develop the
products as per
the customers
needs.
S.no.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
page 101
Business Studies- XII
Elements / 4 Ps of Marketing mix
1. Product mix : All the features of the product or service to be offered for
sale.
2. Price Mix : Value (Money) in lieu of product / service received by seller
from a buyer.
3. Promotion mix : Informing the customers about the products & persuading
them to buy the same.
4. Place Mix : Physical distribution : Various decisions regarding distribution
of products.
- Channels of distribution : Whether wholesalers, retailers are to be
used or not.
- Physical movement of the products from producer to consumers.
- Storage, transportation, managing inventory (stock) etc.
Elements
Branding Packaging Labelling
Company's
Objectives
Costs
Competition
Customer
Demand
Factors
Elements
Personal
Selling
Publicity Sales
Promotion
Advertising
page 102
Business Studies- XII
IP - PRODUCT MIX
Meaning and Concept of Product - Product is anything that can be offered to
a market to satisfy a want or need.
1. Product mix refers to a combination of various features relating to the
product or service like quality, size, range, package, warranty etc.
Classification of Products
2. Industrial Products : used as inputs in producing other products e.g. raw
material, tools etc.
Consumer Products
Durability Basis
Shopping Efforts Involved
Non Durable
|
which are
consumed in a
short period of
time e.g. soap,
toothpaste
Durable
|
Which are used
for a longer
period of the
time
e.g. T.V., washing
Machine
Services
|
Benefits or
satisfaction
offered for sale
e.g. repair, dry
cleaning etc.
Convenience Products
|
Which are purchased
frequently, immediately
with minimum time and
efforts e.g. medicine,
salt, bread etc.
Shopping Products
|
Which are purchased
after some shopping
efforts on the basis of
price, quality etc. e.g.
T.V. Jewellery etc.
Speciality Products
|
Which have certain
special features. Buyers
spend a lot of time and
efforts to purchase them
e.g. Restaurant,
Collection of Art work,
Particular Hair Cutting
Salon etc.
page 103
Business Studies- XII
Features:
1. The number of buyers are limited
2. The sale of industrial products is generally made with the help of short
channels of distribution.
Manufacturer Retailer Consumer ( O n e l e v e l )
Manufacturer Consumer ( Direct Selling)
PRODUCT MIX -Three components are - Branding, Packaging, Labelling
1. i) Branding - giving a name / a sign / a symbol etc to a product
eg. : Pepsi
Nike
Qualities of a good Brand Name :
1. Simple and short :A brand name should be simple and short as Tata, Bata.
2. Easily Pronunceable : A brand names should be easily pronunceable as
Lux, Dalda.
3. Suggestive : Brand name should be self explanatory, suggesting the
inherent quality of the product as Ujjala suggests more whiteness.
4. Distinctive : Brand name should be so distinctive that it highlights itself in
the group of other brand names such as : Tide, Perk.
Advantages of Branding:-
1. Brand name helps in advertising it in an easier way.
2. Brand name establishes permanent identity of the product.
3. Branded products can be easily identified by consumers.
4. Brand name promotes repurchasing.
5. Branding ensures a particular level of quality of the product: If there is
any deviation in the quality the customers can make a complaint to the
manufacturer.
2. ii) Packaging : Act of designing and producing the container or
wrapper of a product. Good packaging often helps in selling the product so
it is called a silent salesman.
page 104
Business Studies- XII
Levels of packaging
1. Primary package - refers to the product's immediate containere.g. toffee
in a wrapper, a match box.
2. Secondary package - refers to additional layers of protection that are kept
till the product is ready for use e.g. a Colgate toothpaste usually comes in a
card board box.
3. Transportation package - refers to further packaging components
necessary for storage, identification and transportation e.g. package of
toffees are put into corrugated boxes for storing at a manufacturer's
warehouse and for transportation.
Functions of Packaging:-
1. Product Identification : Packaging helps in identification of the product.
2. Product Protection : The main function of the packing is to provide
protection to the product from dirt, insects and breakage.
3. Convenience : It provides convenience in carriage, stocking and in
consumption.
4. Product Promotion : Packaging simplifies the work of sales promotion.
Advantages of Packaging :-
1. Rising standards of Health and Sanitation : The people are becoming
health conscious so they like to buy packed goods. The reason is that the
chances of adulteration in such goods are minimised.
2. Innovational Opportunity : With the increasing use of packaging more
innovational opportunity becomes available in this area for the researchers.
3. Product Differentiation : Packaging is helpful in creating product
differentiation. The colour, material and size of the package makes
differences in the quantity of the product.
3. Labelling : A label is a carrier of information which is to be provided to the
customers which describes the product, its contents, the date and time of
manufacturing etc.
Functions:
1. Helps in identifying the product or brand from the various types available,
page 105
Business Studies- XII
say deodorants, chocolates, biscuits imprinted on its package helps us to
identify from number of packages, which is our favourite brand.
2. Helps in grading the products into different categories.
3. Carrier of information:- Labelling helps in describing salient features of a
product such as contents, price, instructions for use etc.
4. Legal Requirement- It provides information required by law e.g. statutory
warning on the package of cigaratte.
5. Helps in promotion of products - Attractive labels increase sales volume by
mentioning the promotional schemes launched by companies.
II P - PRICE MIX : Meaning and concept of Price: - Price may be defined as the
amount of money paid by a buyer (or received by a seller) in consideration of the
purchase of a product or a service. Pricing is crucial for manufacturers, customers
and intermediaries. A customer will buy a product only when he perceives that
value or a product is at least equal to value of money, which he has to pay in the
form of price. Before framing any pricing policy following factors should be
considered:-
1. Pricing objectives -
(a) to maximise profits in the short term-tend to charge maximum
price.
2. (b) Obtain large share of the market i.e., by maximising sales it will
charge lower price.
3. (c) Firm is operating in the competitive market it may charge low
price for it.
2. Cost of Production - Needs to be fully realised before fixing prices.
3. Demand - High Demand and less supply may permit increase in price while
low demand and more supply may not allow increase in price.
4. Competition in market - Prices of competitors need to be considered before
fixing prices.
5. Government Policies- Products regulated by government pricing
regulations need to be priced as per government policies.
page 106
Business Studies- XII
III. P - Place Mix/ Physical Distribution Mix :
Covers all the activities required to physically move goods from
manufacturers to the customers Important activities include.
1. Order Processing : Accurate & speedy order processing leads to profit &
goodwill & vice versa.
2. Transportation : Add value of the goods by moving them to the place
where they are required.
3. Inventory control : Additional demand can be met in less time, the need
for inventory will also be low.
4. Ware housing : Need arises to fill the gap between the time when the
product is produced & time when it is required for consumption.
Channels of Distribution :
Direct Channel - Manufacturer - Customer
Indirect Channel - Manufacturer - Retailer - Customer
Manufacture - wholesaler - Retailer -customer.
Manufacturer - Agent - wholesaler - Retailer customer
Factors Determining Choice of Channels of Distribution:-
Choice of appropriate channel of distribution is a very important marketing
decision, which affects the performance of an organisation . Whether the
firm will adopt direct marketing channels or long channels involving a no.
of intermediaries is a strategic decision.
page 107
Business Studies- XII
Factors Determining Choice of Channels of Distribution
Market related Factors Product Related Factors Company related factor
1. Size of the market - 1. Nature of product - 1. Financial strength of the
no of customers - technical (made to order) company - strong - direct
more customers more - direct selling / own channel - weak -
intermediates. middleman required.
2. Geographical concentration- 2. Perishable (direct / short 2. Degree of control -
concentrated buyers - direct Channels), Non perishable Greater control-Short /
selling spread customers- - Long Channels. direct channel, less
more intermediaries control- long channels.
3. Size or order - i.e. quantity 3. The unit value of the 3. Management - Sufficient
of purchase product- costly- direct knowledge - direct
Less - more intermediaries selling, Low- long channels selling & Vice versa.
More - direct selling
4. Products' Complexity -
Complex products - direct
selling, Non- Complex - long
channels.
IV.P- Promotion Mix
It refers to combination of promotional tools used by an organisation to
communicate and persuade customers to buy its products.
Tools/ Elements of Promotion mix:-
1. Advertising : Most commonly used tool of promotion. It is an impersonal
form to communication, which is paid by the marketers (sponsors) to
promote goods and services. Common mediums are newspaper, magazine,
television & radio.
Role or Importance of Advertising:
1. Enhancing customer satisfaction and confidence.
2. Helpful in increasing the demand of existing product.
3. Helpful to increase the market share.
page 108
Business Studies- XII
4. Helpful in generating more employment.
5. Helpful in the economic development of the country.
6. Knowledge of various product.
7. No fear of exploitation.
Objections Against Advertising - Though advertising is one of the most
frequently used medium of promotion of goods & services but it attracts a lot of
criticism / objections against it, which are as follows:-
1. Increased Product Price - Which is ultimately added to product cost,
manufacturers pass this cost to ultimate customers.
2. Confusion to Customers - The number of advertisements shown for a
single product having different brands confuse the customers and it becomes
very difficult for them to make choice.
3. Encouraging sale of inferior products - In many cases some product
features are over emphasized.
4. Advertisement of Bad Tastes - Events, models degrade the human dignity.
5. Undermines social values and promotes materialism:- It induces the
customers to buy more and more products. Because of emphasis on
materialism, social relationships are distorted which brings social disorder.
In the changed economic environment of globalisation, advertising is
considered as an important tool of marketing. It helps a firm in effectively
communicating with its target market, increasing the sale and thereby
reducing the per unit cost of production. It is not a social waste rather it adds
value to the social cause by giving a boost to production and generating
employment.
2. Personal Selling:
Personal selling consists of contacting prospective buyers of product
personally i.e face to face interaction between seller and buyer for the
purpose of sale.
Features of the Personal Selling :
1. Personal contact is established under personal selling.
2 Oral conversation.
page 109
Business Studies- XII
3. Quick solution of queries.
4. Receipt of additional information.
5. Development of relationship with the prospective customers which
may become important in making sale.
Qualities of a good Salesman :
1. Physical Qualities : Physical qualities include personality health, stamina
and tolerance. A salesman can instantly connect with the customers if he is
good looking and smart.
2. Mental Qualities : These include mainly skills, mental alertness,
imagination and self confidence.
3. Technical Qualities : He should have full and updated knowledge about
the product he is selling-its features, price and variety available. He should
be aware of the nature of work carried on by the firm, he is working for.
4. Good communication skills : He should be able to develop a good
conversation with the customer. He should be confident while he is
communicating and should be able to answer all the queries of the customer
satisfactorily.
5. Honesty : It is a very important quality of a good salesman. In order to
establish the goodwill of firm he must be honest and sincere in performing
his duty. A salesman who resorts to selling inferior goods, charging higher
rates, providing wrong information, giving exaggerated claims etc will
cause a decline in goodwill of the firm in the long run.
6. Courtesy : A Salesman who is polite and courteous generates buyer's
confidence selling product becomes easy for him.
7. Persistent : "Never give up", is the spirit that a salesman should have.
Making the customer buy maximum amount of a product is the ultimate
task given to him.
8. Capacity to inspire trust : The salesman should have the convincing
power to develop the belief in a customer that the product he is buying is the
best product in the market.
3. Sales Promotion :Short term incentives designed to encourage the buyers
to make immediate purchase of a product / service.
page 110
Business Studies- XII
Techniques
1. Rebate : Special price to clear off excess inventory.
2. Discounts : Price reduced to induce buyers to buy more.
3. Sampling : Free sample of a product to customers to try product & learn
about it.
4. Lucky draw : Lucky draw coupon eg. purchase an easy product & win a
car etc.
5. Full Finance @ 0% : Easy financing schemes.
6. Contents : Competitive events involving application of skills or luck.
7. Product Combination : Offering another product as gift along with the
purchase of a product.
8. Instant draws and assigned gift : Scratch a card and instantly win a prize
with the purchase of a TV, T. Shirt, Refrigerator etc.
9. Quantity Gift : Offering extra quantity of the product e.g., Buy three LUX
soaps and get one free.
Public Relations
“The Chartered Institute of Public Relations” defines Public Relations
as ‘a strategic management function that adds value to an organization by
helping it to manage its reputation'
Public relations covers a wide range of tactics, usually involve providing
information to independent media sources in the hope of gaining favorable
coverage. It also involves a mix of promoting specific products, services
and events and promoting the overall brand of an organization, which is an
ongoing tact.
Public Relation Tools include-
1. Press release : A press release is an announcement of an event,
performance, or other newsworthy item that is issued to the press by a
public relations professional of an organisation.
It is written in the form of a story with an attractive heading so that the media
quickly grasps and circulates the message through newspapers / radio /
television / internet.
page 111
Business Studies- XII
2. Press Kits: It is a comprehensive package of information outlining a
company's products and services most frequently sent to members of the
press. It includes
? A brief company biography.
? information of senior management.
? comments from customers.
? Reprints of newspaper and magazine articles.
? Photos of products.
3. Brochures: It is a booklet published by the organization which contains the
organization’s background, its ethics, vision, mission, its past, present and
future projects, its USP, etc. Eg: brochure given to new employees to give
them a gist of the organization.
4. Newsletter: It is a printed publication produced at regular intervals
focussing on a particular set of people. The content of a newsletter is
presented in a writing style that is less formal and letter-like. For example, a
newsletter published by a college consists of information about activities
conducted during a particular period, special achievements by students or
teachers, etc.
5. Events and Press support: Special events are acts of news development.
The ingredients are time, place, people, activities, drama, showmanship;
one special event may have many subsidiary events, such as luncheons,
banquets, contests, speeches, and many others as part of the build up.
6. Conferences and Seminars: Conferences and seminars are conducted for
making people aware about the organization. For example travel
companies generally call prospective clients and offer travel packages. The
members are contacted through telephones and asked to attend seminar.
7. Websites: A website acts as a window for the outside world to know an
organization. So it is designed not just to serve as a resource for members,
but also to present a positive message to non-members who are browsing
through.
page 112
Business Studies- XII
ROLE OF ‘PR’ IN AN ORGANISAION
(i) Smooth functioning of business and achievement of objectives.
(ii) Building corporate image that affects favorably on its products.
- Up keep of parks, gardens, sponsoring sports activities etc.
(iii) Build interest in the established product and help in launching new products.
(iv) Establishing positive image of products facing adverse publicity. For
example, soft drink majors- Pepsi, Coco-cola was subjected to a
controversy that there were pesticides found in the samples collected from
different areas. In this situation, the companies attracted severe criticism
from various sectors like consumers, investors, government etc. This called
for public relations exercise so that damage control could be done.
(V) It acts as a supplement to advertising in promoting (new and existing)
products.
1 Mark Questions.
1. Define marketing management in present context.
2. Outline one objective of marketing management.
3. What is marketing research?
4. What is meant by product Mix?
5. What is a trade mark?
6. Which marketing philosophy gives more importance to consumer welfare
instead of consumer satisfaction.
7. State any one pillar of marketing concept.
8. Name the channel wherein goods are made directly available by the
manufacturer to consumers without involving any intermediary.
9. A lunch box free with Kissan Sauce is an example of the techniques of sales
promotion. Name the technique.
10. Write any two brand names available in the market.
11. State any one feature of convenience goods.
page 113
Business Studies- XII
12. Toothpaste is packed in a tube is an example of which type of packing.
13. Which concept of Marketing suggests that the organisation should earn
profit through volume of production.
14. Name any two products which are subject to the process of grading.
15. Name the element of marketing mix which makes the products available to
the target customers.
3-4 Marks Questions
1. Explain any three advantages of labelling to the customers.
2. Differentiate between marketing and selling on the basis of :
(i) Meaning (ii) Scope (iii) Objectives.
3. Write any four differences between advertising and personal selling.
4. State any three advantages of sales promotion.
5. Explain any four functions of packaging.
6. 'Advertising confuses rather than helps'. Do you agree? Give reasons.
5-6 Marks Questions
1. Explain the various functions of marketing mix
2. Explain four important elements of marketing mix.
3. Explain any four factors on which the choice of channels of distribution
depends.
4. “Advertising encourages sale of inferior products” Do you agree ? Give
reasons.
5. Why Public Relations are important for an organisation ?
6. Explain four qualities of a good brand.
7. Explain three methods of sales promotion.
8. A new movie "XYZ" is to be released in the month of December. Which
department is going to look into the techniques of promoting the movie ?
page 114
Business Studies- XII
What tools will they employ for the same ? Explain any three.
9. A mobile company is launching a new high tech mobile phone in the market.
What will be the role of public relations department in this case. What tools
can it use to promote it?
10. What are the most important requirements for personal selling ? What skills
are needed to perform it effectively?
page 115
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 12
CONSUMER PROTECTION
Protecting consumers from unfair trade practices, adopted by the producers and
sellers of goods and services is termed as consumer protection. It not only includes
educating consumers about their rights and responsibilities, but also helps in
getting their grievances redressed.
Importance of Consumer Protection (from consumer’s point of view ):
1. Consumers Ignorance : Majority of consumers are not aware of their
rights and reliefs available to them as a result of which they are exploited. In
order to save consumers from exploitation, consumer protection is needed.
2. Unorganised Consumers : In India consumers are still unorganised and
there is lack of consumer organisations also, thus consumer protection is
required.
3. Widespread exploitation of Consumers : Consumers are exploited on
large scale by means of various unfair trade practices and consumer
protection is required to protect them from exploitation.
Importance of Consumer Protection (from the point of view of Business):-
1. Long term business interest : It is always in the interest of the business to
keep its customer satisfied. Global competition could be won only after
satisfying customers. Satisfied customers lead to repeat sales and help in
increasing customer base of business.
2. Moral Justification : It is the moral duty of any business to take care of
consumer interest & avoid any form of their exploitation & unfair trade
practices like defective & unsafe products, adultration, false and misleading
advertising, hoardings, black marketing etc.
3. Business uses resources of society: Every business uses the resources of
the society and thus it is their responsibility to work in the interest of the
society.
4. Social Responsibility : A business has social responsibilities towards
various groups like owners, workers, government, customers etc. Thus,
customers should be provided qualitative goods at reasonable prices.
5. Government Intervention : If a business engages in any form of unfair
page 116
Business Studies- XII
trade practices then government takes action against it, which adversely
affects its goodwill.
CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 1986 (CPA, 1986)
Meaning of Consumer
Consumer protection Act 1986 was introduced to make consumers aware
about their rights and to give them legal protection. According to it
consumer is defined as follows.
1. Any person who buys any goods for a consideration. It includes any user
of such goods with the approval of the buyer. But it does not include a
person who obtains goods for resale or any commercial purpose.
2. Any person who avails any services for a consideration. It includes any
beneficiary of such services but it does not include a person who avails
such service for any commercial purpose.
Meaning of Consumer Protection
CPA, 1986 defines consumer protection as : -
1. To protect and promote the interest of consumers by recognising consumers
rights such as right to saftety, right to be informed, right to choose, right to
be heard, right to seek redressal and right to consumer education.
2. To provide for a simple , speedy and inexpenssive redressal of consumer
grievances by setting a 3 tier enforcement machinery.
Rights of a Consumer-
Consumer protection Act, 1986 has provided six rights to the consumers,
which are as follows:-
1. Right to Safety : Consumer has the right to be protected against products, &
services which are hazardous to health & life (should use ISI marked
electronic device.
2. Right to be informed : Consumer has right to have complete information
about the product before buying it.
3. Right to choose : Consumer has a right to choose any product out of the
available products as per his own decision making.
4. Right to be heard : Consumer has the right to file a complaint to be heard in
page 117
Business Studies- XII
case of dissatisfaction with goods or services (use of grievance cell)
5. Right to Seek Redressal : Consumer has the right to get relief in case the
product or service falls short of his expectations or is dangerous. He may be
provided with replacement / removal of defect or compensation for any
loss. Various redressal forums are set up by the Govt. at National and State
level.
6. Right to consumer education:- Consumer has the right to acquire
knowledge and to be well informed throughout life. He should be made
aware of his rights and reliefs available to him in case of the product or
service falls short of his exceptions. The Govt. of India has included
consumer education in the school curriculum & is making use of media to
make consumers aware of their rights.
Responsibilities / Duties of a Consumer
1. Consumer must exercise his rights : Consumers must be aware of their
rights with regard to the products or services they buy from the market.
2. Consumer must be a Cautious consumer : While buying a product or
services, a consumer should read labels carefully .
3. Consumer must file a complaint in an appropriate forum in case of any
shortcoming in product / service availed.
4. Consumer must insist on cash memo i.e a proof of purchase is required to
file a complaint.
5. Consumer must be quality conscious. He should ask / look for ISI mark on
electric goods. FPO mark on food products, Hall mark on jewellery etc.
6. Consumer must bring the discrepancy in the advertisement to the notice of
the sponsor.
7. Consumer must exercise his legal right. If any of these rights is violated by
manufacturer or seller, the consumers must file a complaint with the legal
machinery constituted under CPA, 1986.
THE SALIENT FEATURES AND PROVISIONS OF
CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 1986
Who Can File A Complaint Under CPA, 1986
A complaint before the appropriate consumer forum can be made by : -
page 118
Business Studies- XII
(1) Any consumer.
(2) Any registered consumer association.
(3) The central or state government.
(4) One or more consumers on behalf of numerous consumers having
same interest.
(5) A legal heir or representative of a deceased consumer.
Against whom a complaint can be filed ?
Consumer Protection Act, 1986 is applicable to all types of undertakings, whether
big or small, private or public, or in co-operative sector, manufacturer or a trader,
wholesaler or retailer, supplying goods or providing services.
Thus, a complaint can be filed against:
1. The seller, manufacturer or dealer of defective goods. Defect means any
fault, imperfection or shortcoming in the quality, quantity or purity of
goods.
2. The provider of services if they are deficient in any manner. Deficiency
means any imperfection, shortcoming or inadequacy in the quality, nature
and manner of performance of services.
Consumer Protection Act, 1986 defines deficiency as “any fault,
imperfection, shortcoming or inadequacy in the quality, nature and manner
of performance which is required to be maintained by or under any law for
the time being in force or has been undertaken to be performed by a person in
pursuance of a contract or otherwise in relation to any service”.
The term service includes any service that is not rendered free of charge.
The term deficiency has been applied differently to different sectors. For
example, in the banking sector acts such as delay in issuing a cheque book,
non encashment of a cheque and delay have been held to be deficiency and
whereas in the medical sector, courts are not as liberal and count only gross
negligence as deficiency. The courts have however been proactive in
holding that even departments such as the housing boards are liable for any
deficiency in services rendered.
page 119
Business Studies- XII
REDRESSAL AGENCIES UNDER CONSUMER PROTECTION
ACT, 1986
For the redressal of consumer grievances the act provides a three - tier
machinery as : -
National Commission
State Commission
District Forum
(1) DISTRICT FORUM District forum are set up in each district by
the state concerned. The important features are : -
(a) It consists of a President and two members, one of whom should be
a woman, duly appointed by State Govt.
(b) It can receive consumer complaints of not more than Rs. 20 Lakhs
value.
(c) On receiving the complaint, the district forum shall refer the
complaint to the opposite party concerned and send the sample of
goods for testing in a laboratory.
(d) The district forum after being satisfied that goods are defective or
there is some unfair trade practice can issue an order to opposite
party directing him to either replace or return the price or pay
compensation. In case the aggrieved party is not satisfied with the
order of district forum. He can appeal before state forum within 30
days of passing an order.
(2) STATE COMMISSION
It is set up in each state by the govt. concerned . The salient features
are : -
(a) Each commission consists of a president and at least 2 members
appointed by state Govt.
(b) Complaints of at least Rs. 20 lakhs but not more than 1 crore can be
filed with state commission.
(c) On receiving the complaint, the state commission can also refer
the complaint to opposite party and send the goods for testing in
laboratory.
page 120
Business Studies- XII
(d) The state commission after being satisfied can order to
oppositeparty to either replace or repay or pay compensation.
In case the aggrieved party is not satisfied, they can appeal before
national commission within 30 days of passing an order.
(3) NATIONAL COMMISSION
It is set up by Central Govt. The provisions of act are : -
(a) It consists of a President and at least 4 members appointed by
Central Govt.
(b) All complaints are pertaining to goods and services of value more
than Rs. 1 crore can be filed with national commission.
(c) On receiving the complaint, the national commission can also
refer it to opposite party and send goods for testing.
(d) The National Commission has the power to issue orders for
replacement or removal and to pay the compensation for loss.
REMEDIES AVAILABLE TO CONSUMERS
1. To remove the defect in goods or services.
2. To replace the defective product with new one free from defect.
3. To refund the price paid for the product/service.
4. To pay compensation for the loss or injury suffered by the consumer due to
product/service.
5. To discontinue the unfair trade practice and not to repeat them.
6. To withdraw the hazardous goods from sale.
7. To pay any amount (not less than 5% of value of defective goods) to any
person, consumer organisation.
8. To issue corrective advertisement to neutralise the effect of a misleading
advertisement.
CONSUMER AWARENESS -
page 121
Business Studies- XII
Some important consumer organization and NGO's engaged in protecting
consumer interests are:-
1. Consumer coordination council, Delhi.
2. Voluntary organisation in Interest of Consumer Education, Delhi.
3. Mumbai Grahak Panchayat, Mumbai.
4. Consumer Association, Kolkata.
5. Consumer Unity and Trust Society Jaipur.
Role of Consumer organisations and NGO's
1. Educating the general pubic about consumer rights by organising training
programmes, seminars and workshops.
2. Publishing periodical & other publications to educate consumers.
3. Providing legal assistance to consumers by providing legal advice etc.
4. Producing films or cassettes on food adultration, misuse of drugs etc.
5. Filing complaints in appropriate consumer courts on behalf of consumers.
6. Encouraging consumers to take on action against unfair trade practices.
7. Taking an initiative in filing cases in consumer courts on behalf of
consumers.
Ways and Means of Consumer Protection.
1. Government : Protects the interest of consumers by enacting various
legislations like CPA' 1986, Sale of goods Act 1930, Bureau of Indian
Standard 1986 etc. Consumer Protection Act provides for a three-tier
machinery at the district, state & national level for speedy & inexpensive
redressal of consumer grievances.
2. Consumer Organisation : Force business firms to avoid mal practices &
exploitation of consumers.
3. Business Association : The associations of trade, Commerce & business
like federation of Indian Chambers of Commerce (FICCI), Confederation
of Indian Industries (CII) have laid down their code of conduct for their
members in their dealings with the customers.
page 122
Business Studies- XII
IMPORTANT QUESTIONS :
1 marks
1. What are the two aspects of consumer protection?
(Hint - Educating consumers and Redressal of their grievances)
2. Give an example of consumer exploitation.
(unsafe products / Black marketing)
3. Name any two legitalations which provide protection to consumers.
(Hint : (i) CPA 1986, The Essential Commodities Act 1955)
4. Mention any two ways & means of consumer protection.
(Hint - Consumer organisation & Govt.)
5. Which mark is issued under the Bureau of Indian Standard Act 1986 ?
(Hint : ISI)
6. Against whom can a complaint be filed by a consumer ?
7. What does a 'defect in goods' mean ?
8. What does a 'deficiency in services' mean ?
9. If a dealer responds positively to a consumer's complaint, which value of
the dealer is depicted ?
(Hint: Honesty, commitment)
3/4 Marks Questions
1. Explain the role of Universities & schools in consumer protection ?
2. Explain briefly the salient features of consumer protection Act 1986 ?
3. "NGO's perform several functions for the protection and promotion of
interest of consumers." State any six such functions.
4. Joseph had got a confirmed ticket of Jet Airways. The flight was later
page 123
Business Studies- XII
cancelled on account of technical problem. Is it a deficiency in service ?
What relief can Joseph seek in this regard ?
5. Kabir bought a piece of cloth for getting a pant stitched from a dealer for
Rs.1000/- with proper receipt. His tailor detected manufacturing defect in
the pant piece. The shopkeeper refused to change or compensate. What
relief can Kabir seek in this regard?
6. Mamta bought a branded computer for Rs. 30,000/- from an authorized
dealer with proper receipt. There was a warranty of one year on the
computer. When she used the computer at home, she detected that CD drive
was not functioning properly due to technical reasons. What remedy can
she seek from the company ?
page 124
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 13
PROJECT WORK
INTRODUCTION :
A project means an activity which has a special purpose and which is
performed with absolute devotion and enthusiasm. Project work can be assigned
to the students whether individually or in groups. It has two types as:-
l. Visit of a Industrial unit as Bank, Stock Exchange or a mall.
2. Case study of a product as packing, branding and labelling.
Objects of a Project
1. Providing deep knowledge to the students.
2. Developing Creativity in the students.
3. Developing independent thinking skills in the student.
4. To convert theoretical knowledge into practical knowledge.
Steps in Project Work
1. Selection of topic or problem
2. Define the problem.
3. Setting objectives of the problem.
4. Preparing questionnaire.
5. Conducting enquiry.
6. Collect information and Data.
7. Editing the information or data.
page 125
Business Studies- XII
8. Analysing the Data or Information.
9. Preparing the Report
The marks will be allocated on the following heads by C.B.S.E.:-
1. Initiative, cooperativeness and participation 1 Mark
2. Creativity in presentation 1Mark
3. Content, observation and research work 2 Marks
4. Analysis of situations 2 Marks
5. Viva 4 Marks
Total: 10 Marks
Project One - Elements of Business Environment
The teachers should help the students in selecting any one element of the
following:
l. Changes witnessed over the last few years on mode of packaging and its
economic impact. The teacher may guide the students to identify the
following changes .
(a) The changes in transportation of fruits and vegetables such as
cardboard crates being used in place of wooden crates, etc.
Reasons for above changes.
(b) Milk being supplied in glass bottles, later in plastic bags and now
in tetra packs and through vending machines.
(c) Plastic furniture [doors and stools] gaining preference over
wooden furniture.
(d) The origin of cardboard and the various stages of changes and
growth.
(e) Brown paper bags packing to recycled paper bags to plastic bags
and cloth bags.
(f) Reuse of packaging [bottles, jars and tins] to attract customers for
page 126
Business Studies- XII
their products.
(g) The concept of pyramid packaging for milk.
(h) Cost being borne by the consumer/manufacturer.
(i) Packaging used as means of advertisements.
2. The reasons behind changes in the following:
Coca - Cola and Fanta in the seventies to Thums up and Campa Cola in the
eighties to Pepsi and Coke in nineties.
The teacher may guide the students to the times when India sold Coca Cola
and Fanta were being manufactured in India by the foreign companies.
The students may be asked to enquire about
a. Reasons of stopping the manufacturing of the above mentioned
drinks in India THEN.
b. The introduction of Thums up and Campa cola range.
c. Re-entry of Coke and introduction of Pepsi in the Indian market.
d. Factors responsible for the change.
e. Other linkages with the above.
f. Leading brands and the company having the highest market share.
g. Different local brands venturing in the Indian market.
h. The rating of the above brands in the market.
i. The survival and reasons of failure in competition with the
international brands.
j. Other observations made by the students.
The teacher may develop the following on the above lines:-
Changing role of the women in the past 25 years relating to joint families,
nuclear families, women as a bread earner of the family, changes in the
requirement, trend of mixers, washing machines, micro waves and
standard of living.
page 127
Business Studies- XII
4. The changes in the pattern of import and export of different Products.
5. The trend in the changing interest rates and their effect on savings.
6. A study on child labour laws, its implementation and consequences.
7. The state of anti-plastic campaign-the law, its effects and
implementation.
8. The laws of mining /setting up of industries, rules and regulations, licences
required for running that business.
9. Social factors affecting acceptance and rejection of an identified product.
(Dish washer, Atta maker, etc)
10. What has been the effect on the types of goods and service ? The students
can take examples like:
a. Washing machines, micro-waves, mixers and grinders.
b. Need for creche, day care center for young and old.
c. Ready to eat food, eating food outside, and tiffin centers.
11. Change in the man-machine ratio, technological advances resulting in
change of cost structure.
12. Effect of change in technological environment on the behaviors of
employee.
II Project TWO: Principles of Management
The students are required to visit any one of the following:
1) A departmental store.
2) An Industrial unit.
3) A fast food outlet.
4) Any other organisation approved by the teacher.
They are required to observe the application of the 14 General Principles of
management advocated by Fayol.
They may enquire into the application of scientific management
techniques by F.W. taylor in the unit visited.
page 128
Business Studies- XII
Tips to teacher
(i) The teacher may organise this visit.
(ii) The teacher should facilitate the students to identify any unit of
their choice and guide them to identify the principles that are being
followed.
(iii) Similarly they should guide the students to identify the techniques
of scientific management implemented in the orgnisation.
(iv) It may be done as a group activity.
(v) The observations could be on the basis of:-
? The different stages of division of word resulting to specilisation.
? Following instructions and accountability of subordinates to higher
authorities
? Visibility of order and equity in the unit.
? Balance of authority and responsibility.
? Communication levels and pattern in the organisation.
? Methods and techniques followed by the organisation for unity of direction
and coordination amongst all.
? Methods of wage payments followed:
? The teacher may organise this visit.
? The arrangements of fatigue study.
? Derivation of time study.
? Derivation and advantages of method study.
? Organisational chart of functional foremanship.
(vi) It is advised that students should be motivated to pick up different areas of
visit. As presentations of different areas in the class would help in better
understanding to the other students.
(vii) The students may be encouraged to develop worksheets. Teachers should
help students to prepare observation tools to be used for undertaking the
page 129
Business Studies- XII
project.
Examples; Worksheets, questionnaire, interviews and organizational chart
etc.
III. Project three: Marketing Management
Students are advised by the teacher to do a simple market research with the
objective of finding out a product service whose marketing may be
profitable like.
1. Shampoo 2. Deodorant
3. Roosted snacks 4. Washing detergent
5. Chocolate 6. Pickles
7. Battle 8. Bread
9. Jam 10. Cheese spread
11. Dry Cleaning
any more can be suggested
Now the students are required to make a project on the identified product /
service keeping in mind the following.
1. Why have they selected this product/service?
2. Find out 5 competitive brands that exist in the market.
3. What permission and licences would be required to make the product?
4. What are your competitors Unique Selling Proposition. [ U.S.P.]?
5. Does your product have any range, give details ?
6. What is the name of your product ?
7. Enlist its features.
8. Draw and Label of your product.
9. Draw a logo for your product.
10. Draft a tag line.
page 130
Business Studies- XII
11. What is the selling price of your competitors product?
(i) Selling price to consumer
(ii) Selling price to retailer
(iii) Selling price to wholesaler
What is the profit margin in percentage to the
? Manufacturer.
? Wholesaler.
? Retailer.
12. How will your product be packed?
13. Which channel of distribution are you going to use?
14. Decisions related to warehousing, state reasons.
15. What is going to be your selling price?
(i) The wholesaler
(ii) To retailer
(iii) To wholesaler
16. List 5 ways of promoting your product.
17. Any schemes for
(i) The wholesaler
(ii) The retailer
(iii) The consumer
18. What is going to be your U.S.P ?
19. Means of transport you will use and why?
20. Draft a good message for your label.
21. What good effective techniques will you follow for your product.
22. What cost effective techniques will you follow for your promotion plan.
By doing such type of project odonate will understand the importance of
concept of marketing mise and the necessary decisions regarding to the
your mix p's product, place, price and promotion.
page 131
Business Studies- XII
CBSE PAPER 2013 (Delhi)
Question Paper with Solutions
O;kolkf;d v/;;u
BUSINESS STUDIES
l-·||l·- =n¤ · . ·|ºº ~l·|+-n ~+ · -c
Time allowed : 3 hours Maximum Marks : 90
lkekU; funsZ'k %
(i) + ~+ ¤|n vz-| + --|· (+ z|·· = (+ ¤|+¤ -+ t|+
(ii) . ~+| ¤|n vz-| + --|· :c.: z|··| + t|+
(iii) : : ~+| ¤|n vz-| + --|· nª·|ª +:c z|··| + t|+
(iv) e ~+| ¤|n vz-| + --|· nª·|ª zcc z|··| + t|+
(v) (+ vz- + =·|i ·||ª =|·|=|·| ti tn +il¤(+
General instructions :
(i) Answers to questions carrying 1 mark may be from one word to one
sentence.
(ii) Answers to questions carrying 3 marks may be from 50 to 75 sentence.
(iii) Answers to questions carrying 4 - 5 marks may be about 150 word.
(iv) Answers to questions carrying 6 marks may be about 200 words.
(v) Attempt all parts of a question together.
page 132
Business Studies- XII
+ '·|-i' +| ¤l··||l·|- +il¤(+ +
Define "Recruitment".
z ~l·|v·º|| (+ ¤lºn vl+¤| +¤| +tn|-i t · +
Why is motivation called a complex process ?
. l-·z|- v¤·|- + l+= ª-· ¤· l-·¤|l·- t|-| t· +
At which level of management directing takes place ?
: l-¤zº| +i vl+¤| n -¤ +¤| l+¤| ¤|-| -|lt( ¤¤ '=·||·|·n+ +|¤¤|ti' + ·|·|-
l¤z|·|+· nt-¤¤¸º| -|z| n l¤-n- =in| n|·| ¤|- t· +
What should be done while 'taking corrective action' in the process of
controlling when especially in the important areas deviations go beyond
the acceptable range ?
: (+ +-¤-i +i +|¤z|in ¤¸¤i +i ~|¤z¤+-|~| +| '¤lz +i =·||¤-|' l+= v+|·
v·||l¤- +·-i t·--nº| +il¤(+ +
State how 'Growth Prospects' affect working capital requirements of a
company ?
e 'l¤-|i¤ v¤·|' +| v|·|ln+ -¤z¤ +¤| t· +
What is the primary objective of 'Financial Management' ?
. 'n·|' ¤|¤|· +| ~·| ¤-|
+ +
Give the meaning of 'Money Market'.
º l¤¤º|- ¤|¤|· + =ti -·t = l-·¤|l·- 'l¤l-¤|¤- +|¤' + l+=i (+ ¤l·º||n +|
--nº| +il¤(+ +
State any one consequence of a well performed 'allocative function' of
financial market.
- ¤l¤º|- +| (+ =|n|l¤+ vl+¤| +¤| +t| ¤|-| t· +
Why is marketing called a social process?
+c l¤¤º|-v¤-·| ·z|- +i 'l¤+¤ ~¤·||·º||' -·|| 'l¤¤º|- ~¤·||·º||' n 'nº¤ ·¤||-'
+ ~|·||· ¤· ~--·|· +il¤(+ +
Distinguish between 'Selling Concept' and 'Marketing Concept' of
Marketing Management Philosophies on the basis of 'main focus'.
++ ·|¤ +i ·|lz| ª z: n|º| t|- ¤· l+=i n- -¤·||+-| +| +|-¸-i --|·|l·|+|·i ~·|¤|
page 133
Business Studies- XII
vl-l-l·| -i- ª-·i¤ -z + ~--ª- +t| lz|+|¤- ·¤ +·| =+-| t· +
Under three-tier machinery where can a legal heir or representative of a
deceased consumer file a complaint when the compensation claimed is
` 25 Lakhs.
+z va| - ª +,:cc +i (+ vl=z ¤|º÷ +i :ª-·i º|·i·i nl+- v¤|ª +·- =n¤ -==
l¤¤ni +| +·º nª ª¤|+ va| ~¤- '~l·|+|·' +| v¤|ª +·-| -|t-i t+ -= '~l·|+|·'
+| ¤t-|l-( l¤=+ ~-ª- -= =·l-|- l+¤| ¤| =+-| t+ +
Pragya bought an iron of a reputed brand for ` 1,500 but it caused an
electric shock while it was being used. Pragya wants to exercise her 'Right'
Identify the 'Right'. under which she can be protected.
+. v¤·| + -= l=z|- +| -|n ¤-| -·|| -=+| ¤º|- +il¤( l¤=+ ~-=|· (+ v¤·|+
+| +n-|l·¤| = ¤¸·i ¤|--i- n 'n' + ª·||- ¤· 'tn' +| v¤|ª +·-| -|lt(+
+
Name and explain the principle of management according to which a
manager should replace 'I' with 'We' in all his conversations with workers.
+: ¤a|l-+ v¤·| + l=z|- + ª¤ n '=t¤|ª - l+ º+·|¤' +| =n¤|+ .
Explain 'Harmony Not Discord' as a principle of Scientific Management.
+: ¤|¤-|~| + (+ v+|· + ª¤ n '-¤z¤|' +| =n¤|+ .
Explain 'objectives' as one of the types of plans.
+e l-¤|¤- +i l¤z|·|-|~| + ª¤ n l---lnlº|- +| =n¤|· .
:~| l-¤|¤- ~-¤·- t, -·||
:¤| l-¤|¤- ·|l¤·¤¤|·i t+
Explain the following as features of Planning:
(a) Planning is continuous, and
(b) Planning is futuristic.
+. ~¤¤ +| º¸·|¤z| ¤-|- ¤|ni '~-+| (-º|v|:¤' +| l¤¤º|- ~·¤-| l-¤+- l+¤| ª¤|+
-=+| l¤+¤ n-¤ zccc :+|:¤| vl- n|t ·||+ n-¤ +i v|l-- + ln( l¤-·º| + l¤l·|--
n|·¤n| ¤· l¤-|· +·- + ~l-l·+- -=- ª¤¤ l¤¤÷ -|z| + l¤¤|n¤| n l-·i-|º| +·-|
z|ª l+¤|+ -=- ¤|¤| l+ ¤t- = +·n -a|- ~|· =n|t ·- + ¤|¤¤¸· ·|i +¤ ¤--| -
·|-| n ¤z| +·-| z|ª -ti l+¤|+ -=- ¤|- +i ~|· ¤|¤| l+ ¤ º¸·|¤ªº -ti º|·i· =+-+
page 134
Business Studies- XII
~-· -l-- ~-nl- + ¤|· -=- vl-n|t l¤¤|n¤ n zcc º¸·|¤z| ¤ º¸·|¤ªº ·|- ·- z|ª
+· l·(+
:~| l¤-·º| + -= n|·¤n +| ¤t-|l-( l¤-+| -¤¤|ª ~¤¤ º¸·|¤z| + l¤-·º| +
ln( +·ª| ~|· +|: (+ +|·º| ¤-|- t( -=+| ~|l-·¤ ·|i ·il¤(+
:¤| (= ·| n¸-¤| +| --nº| ·|i +il¤( ¤| ~¤¤ =n|¤ +| =-vl·|- +·-| -|t-|
t+ .
Ajay was appointed a marketing head of 'Alfa Enterprise' manufacturers of
toothpaste and toothbrushes. His target sale was 2000 units a month. Apart
from thinking about various channels of distribution to achieve the target he
himself started visiting schools in backward areas. He found that even after
taking various steps and counselling, some school children had not started
brushing their teeth. He investigated and found that they could not afford to
buy toothbrush and toothpaste. So with due permission he started donating
200 toothbrushes and toothpastes every month to the school.
(i) Identify the channel of distribution 'Ajay' would adopt for distribution
of toothpaste and toothbrushes and justify it by giving one reason.
(ii) State any two values which Ajay wants to communicate to the
society.
+º '¤¤l¤ ¤|l÷ª = n|ª- n ¤·|-·i t|-i t -·||l¤ :== -¤·||+-|~| +| ¤t- n|·| t+' :=
+·|- + =··| n -¤·||+-|~| +| ¤|l÷ª + l+-ti -i- n|·|| +| --nº| +il¤(+
.
'Though branding adds to the cost, it provides several advantages to the
consumers'. In the light of the statement, state any three advantages of
branding to customers. 4
+- =ªa- vl+¤| + -·º|| +| --nº| +il¤(+
State the steps in the organising process.
zc '~l·|+|· ~-·º|' (¤ 'l¤+·i+·º|' n l---lnlº|- + ~|·||· ¤· ~-·|· +il¤(· :
:~| -ªz¤;
:¤| -|z;
:=| lª·|l-; -·||
page 135
Business Studies- XII
:·| v¶l-+
Distinguish between 'Delegation' and 'Decentralisation' on the basis of
the following:
(a) Purpose;
(b) Scope;
(c) Status; and
(d) Nature.
z+ '·i·|+|ni- l-¤z| l-º|¤' +| +¤| ~·| t· ·i·|+|ni- l-¤z| l-º|¤ +| ¤·||l¤- +·-
¤|ni l+-ti -i- +|·+| +| --nº| +il¤(+ :
What is meant by 'Long-term Investment Decision ? State any three factors
which affect the long term investment decision.
zz ·¤¤=|¤ + ·l·º+|º| = -¤·||+-| =·-|º| + nt·¤ + l+-ti -|· l¤-·~| +| ¤º|-
+il¤(+ :
Explain any four points of importance of consumer protection from the
point of view of business.
z. (= ¤|- +|·º|| +| ¤º|- +il¤( ¤| ¤t ª¤·º +·- t l+ ¤¤·| l·-¤l-l·- nt-¤¤¸º| t|-|
¤| ·t| t+ :
Describe any five reasons which clarify that management is gaining
importance day-by-day.
z: +|º - (+ ~|·z| ¤|l·- l+¤| l+ l¤¤|n¤ + ¤--| + ln( =·|i l¤¤|n¤| n '¤|-i
z|lz+·º| ¤z' :¤|º· -¤¸·i+|¤·| ~¤z¤ t|-| -|lt( +¤|l+ · :
(i) =|n|-¤-· =n|¤ ¤i¤- +i ªº|¤-|| + ¤l- ~l·|+ l-l-- t ·
(ii) ¤l-¤|ªi +in-| ¤· ¤|-i z|lz+·º| ¤z l-ln- +·- + ln( -¤¤¤-- -+-i+|
+| l¤+|= t| ·t| t+
(iii) ~|¤ n ¤lz t| ·ti t ~|· ¤-- ·|· ¤· ·|i z|z ¤|-i ¤i ·t t+
¤|-i z|lz+·º| ·¤¤=|¤ + ¤l- =·+|· ·|i ~¤-| =+|·|·n+ ·l·º+|º| l·º|| ·ti
t+-¤·|+- l¤¤·º| = ¤l+-¤| +| -·¸·|- +·- t( ·¤|¤=|l¤+ ¤¤|¤·º| + l¤l·|--
~|¤|n| +| ¤t-|l-(+ :
page 136
Business Studies- XII
The court passed an order that all schools must have water purifier for the
school children as :
(i) Society in general is more concerned about quality of life;
(ii) Innovative techniques are being developed to manufacture water
purifier at competitive rates :
(iii) Incomes are rising and children at home are also drinking purified
water. The Government is also showing positive attitude towards the
water purifier business.
Identify the different dimensions of business environment by quoting
from the above details.
z: l-z||-- +¤÷| +i (+ +-¤-i n ÷|¤·+º· t ~|· ~¤-i +¤÷| +i (+ :+|: + ¤+|· n|n
= ¤ª ¤-|- +i ¤|¤-| ¤-| ·t| t+ -=- ¤t l-º|¤ ln¤| l+ := l-n|º|i :+|: +i ª·||¤-|
¤t -÷i=| + l+=i ª|niº| -|z n +·ª| ¤t| n|ª| + ¤|= +|¤ + ¤t- +n =~¤=· t
~|· ¬n ¤t- +n ·· ¤· -¤n··| t+ -=- ¤t ·|i =|-| +i ¤ª·|| (¤ lªz¤| +| =n|-
~¤=· ¤·|- l+( ¤|(ª+
:=+ ln( ¤t l¤+¤, nº||, +¤ ¤ -·¤|·- + ln( -|· l¤l·|-- ~·¤-| -|t-| ·||+ -=-
(+ l¤a|¤- l·¤| ~|· l¤l·|-- -¤- ¤·i-||( =-¤-- +·- + ¤|· ¤l- ¤· ·= --ni·¤|·|
+i ¤º-i +i+
(i) ¤º-i l+( t( --ni·¤|·| n = =¤¬·a --ni·¤|· + -¤- + ln( ~¤-|( ¤|-
¤|n ~ªn -i- -·º|| +| ¤t-|- +· --+| --nº| +il¤(+
(ii) (= ·| n¸-¤| +| ·|i ¤t-|l-( l¤-t := l-n|º|i :+|: +i ª·||¤-| ,|·| l-z||-- =n|¤
+| =-¤l·|- +·-| -|t-| t+ :
Nishant, the director of a garments company, is planning to manufacture
bags for the utilization of waste material from one of his garment units. He
has decided that this manufacturing unit will be set-up in a rural area of
Orissa where people have very few job-opportunities and labour is
available at very low rates. He has also thought of giving equal
opportunities to men and women.
For this he wants four different heads for Sales, Accounts, Purchase and
page 137
Business Studies- XII
Production. He gives an advertisement and shortlists ten candidates per
post after conducting different selection-tests.
(i) Identify and state the next three steps for choosing the best candidate
out of the candidates short-listed.
(ii) Also identify two values which Nishant wants to communicate to the
society by setting up this manufacturing unit.
ze 'l-¤|¤- (¤ l-¤zº| ¤¤·| + ~¤·|++·º|i¤ l,¤·n t+' +=· :
'Planning and Controlling are inseparable twins of management.' How?
z. '=·|i =ªa-| n ¤·||¤i =¤·|º| n ¤|·||( ~l·|+ ¤| +n ~z| n l¤¤n|- ·t-i t+' :-
¤|·||~| +| ·¸· +·- + l+-ti ¤· -¤|¤| +| --nº| +il¤(+ e
vFkok
'¤¤¤-|+ =ªa- n ¤t- = +|¤| +| =-¤-- +·+ (+ nt·¤¤¸º| ·|¸ln+| l-·||-| t+' (=
l+-ti ¤· +|¤| +| --nº| +il¤(+
'The barriers to effective communication exist in all organisations to a
greater or lesser degree.' State any six measures to overcome these barriers.
OR
'The Supervisor performs a very important role in an organisation by
performing multiple functions.' State any six such functions.
zº 'n|·||z| l-º|¤' = +¤| ~l·|¤|¤ t· (+ +-¤-i + n|·||z| l-º|¤ +| ¤·||l¤- +·- ¤|n
l+-ti -|· +|·+| +| =n¤|+ e
vFkok
'l¤-|i¤ l-¤|¤-' +| +¤| ~·| t· l¤-|i¤ l-¤|¤- + nt·¤ ¤· ¤+|z| ÷|n- ¤|n l+-ti
¤|- l¤-·~| +| =n¤|+
What is meant by 'Dividend Decision'? Explain any four factors which
affect the dividend decision of a company.
page 138
Business Studies- XII
OR
What is meant by 'Financial Planning'? Explain any five points which
highlight its importance.
z- z|¤· ¤|¤|· + l+-ti -|· +|¤| +| ¤º|- +il¤(+
vFkok
n:| ¤|¤|· + l---lnlº|- ¤nº|| +| ¤º|- +il¤( ·
:+| ¤|--| ·|lz|
:º|| º¤·i l¤n
:ª| ¤|lº|lº¤+ ¤z
:·|| ¤-- ¤n|º| ¤z
Explain any four functions of stock exchange.
OR
Explain the following money market instruments :
(a) Call Money
(b) Treasury Bill and
(c) Commercial Paper
(d) Certificate of Deposit
.c ¤¤l+-+ l¤+¤ +i ~¤·||·º|| +| =n¤| -·|| (+ ~-¤ l¤+-| + l+-ti -|· ªº|| +|
¤º|- +il¤(+ e
vFkok
(+ -·¤|· + n¸-¤ l-·||·º| +| ¤·||l¤- +·- ¤|n l+-ti -|· +|·+| +| =n¤|+
Explain the concept of personal selling and any four qualities of a good
salesman.
OR
Explain any four factors which affect the determination of the price of a
product.
page 139
Business Studies- XII
SOLUTION
Ans1 Recruitment may be defined as the process of searching for prospective
employees and stimulating them to apply for jobs in the organization.
Ans2 Motivation is called a complex process because any type of motivation
may not have a uniform effect on all the members.
OR
Motivation is called a complex process because individuals are
heterogeneous in their expectations, perception and reactions.
Ans3 Directing takes place at every/all levels of management.
Ans4 When deviations go beyond the acceptable range especially in important
areas, immediate managerial attention is required so that the deviations do
not occur again.
OR
If the deviation cannot be corrected through managerial action the
standards may have to be revised.
Ans5 If the growth prospects for a concern are higher, it will require larger
amount of Working Capital to meet higher production and sales targets.
Ans6 The primary objective of Financial Management is Wealth maximization
i.e. to Maximize the market price of the shares.
Ans7 Money market is a market for short term funds which deals in monetary
assets whose period of maturity is up to one year.
Ans8 Consequence of a well performed a Allocative Function of financial
market (Any one)
i) The rate of return offered to the households would be higher.
ii) Scarce resources are allocated to those firms which have the highest
productivity for the economy.
Ans9 Marketing is called a social process because it involves interaction of
people.
page 140
Business Studies- XII
OR
Marketing is called a social process because it focuses on needs and wants
of people.
Ans10 Main focus of selling concept is on the existing product while main focus
of marketing concept is on Customer needs.
Ans11 State commission
Ans12 Right to safety
Ans13 Espirit de corps.
? Management should promote team spirit of unity and harmony among
employees.
? This will give rise to sprit of mutual trust and belongingness among
team members and will minimize the need for using penalties.
Ans14 HARMONY NOT DISCORD
? The principle emphasizes that there should be complete harmony
between the management and the workers.
? This requires mental revolution on the part of both management and
the workers. Both management and the workers should transform
their thinking.
? Management should share gains of the company if any with the
workers and should work hard and be willing to embrace change for
the good of the company.
Ans15 Objective
? An objective is the end which the management seeks to achieve.
? An objective needs to be expressed in specific/ quantitative terms and
is to be achieved within a given time period.
? It is set by the top management and focuses on broad general issues.
Ans16 (a) Planning is continuous because once a plan is framed it is
implemented and then it is followed by another plan and so on.
page 141
Business Studies- XII
(b) Planning is futuristic because it involves looking ahead and preparing
for the future to meet future events effectively to the best advantage of
the organization.
Ans17 (i) The channel of distribution, Ajay would adopt (any one)
? Indirect channel
? One level channel
? Two level channel
? Three level channel
? Longer channels.
Because he is distributing consumer goods.
(ii) Values which Ajay wants to communicate to the Society are (any two)
? Charity
? Concern for the underprivileged.
? Hygiene
? Sensitivity towards health
Ans18 Though branding adds to the cost, it provides several advantages to
the consumers. In the light of the statement, advantages of branding to
customers are:
(i) It helps in product identification because if a customer is satisfied with
the product, he need not make a close inspection every time he has to
buy the product.
(ii) It ensures quality because if there is any deviation in the quality, the
customers can have recourse to the manufacture which builds up their
confidence.
(iii) It is a status symbol and the consumers of branded products feel proud
of using them adding to their level of satisfaction.
page 142
Business Studies- XII
Ans19 Steps in the organizing process are:
(i) Identification and division of work into manageable activities so that
duplication is avoided.
(ii) Departmentalization to group together activities of a similar nature to
facilitate specialization.
(iii)Assignment of duties to job positions for effective performance.
(iv) Establishing reporting relationships so that each individual knows
who he has to take orders from and to whom he is accountable.
Ans 20 Difference between delegation and decentralization:
Basis Delegation Decentralization
(a) purpose To lessen the burden of the manager. To increase the role
of the subordinates
in the organization
by giving them
more autonomy.
(b) scope It has a narrow It has a wide scope
scope as it is limited to as it implies
superior and his immediate extension of
subordinate. delegation to the
lowest level of
management.
(c) Status It is a process followed to It is the result of
share tasks. the policy decision
of the top
management.
(d) Nature It is compulsory because no It is optional
individual can perform all tasks because it is done
on his own. at the discretion of
the top mana-
gement.
page 143
Business Studies- XII
Ans 21 The long term investment decision means committing the funds on a long
term basis on fixed assets or various projects of an organization. Factors
which affect the long term investment decision are:
The following are the factors affecting the long term Investment decision
(any three):
(a) Cash flows of the project during the life of an investment affect the
long term investment decision.
(b) The rate of return of the project based on expected return and the risk
involved affects the long term investment decision.
(c) The investment criteria involved must be considered before taking the
long term investment decision.
(d) Nature of business as a trading concern needs lower fixed capital than
a manufacturing concern since it does not require to purchase plant
and machinery etc.
(e) Scale of operations as a large scale organization requires higher
investment in fixed assets than a small scale organization.
(f) Choice of technique as a capital intensive organization requires higher
investment in plant and machinery as compared to a labour intensive
organization.
Ans 22 Importance of consumer protection from the point of view of
business:
(1) Long term Interest- Consumer's faith in an enterprise is of prime
importance as if business fails to provide safety the consumers, they
will shift over to competitors.
(2) Use of society resources- Business is a trustee of society's resources
and they must be used effectively to satisfy the needs of consumers
(3) Social responsibility- The social objectives arise because of several
stakeholders of business such as consumers, employees, suppliers,
society etc and the business can't ignore the interest of these groups.
(4) Government Invention- The importance of the consumer protection
also arises from the fact that Govt. is committed to the welfare of
page 144
Business Studies- XII
general public who are consumer also. Over the years, the Govt. has
passed several laws for protection of consumers.
Ans 23 Importance of management:
1. Help in achieving group goals: Success of an organization can be
measured in terms of group goals. Management creates team work
and coordination in the group. It reconciles the objectives of the group
with those of its members.
2. Increases efficiency: Management works out ways to attain
efficiency and effectiveness in its activities by planning, organizing,
staffing, directing and controlling. Its aim is to reduce the cost and
increase profitability and productivity through proper utilization of
resources.
3. Creates a dynamic organization: An enterprise has to adapt itself to
changing demands of the market and society. Management helps
people to adapt to these changes of complex and dynamic
environment quickly without any resistance.
4. Help in achieving personal objectives: Every manager tries to
harmonise individual goals with organization goals. Through
effective motivation and leadership, management develops team sprit
among employees which increases production. Thus employees earn
more by producing more which fulfils the objectives of both the
groups.
5. Help in development of society: Managers work for the
development of the society by proving qualitative goals and services,
creating employment opportunities and adopting new techniques of
production. This increases the national income and living standards of
the people. (Any other point with correct explanation, full credit will
be given where ½ mark is for heading and ½ mark is for explanation).
Ans 24 1- Legal environment: The court passed an order that all the schools
must have water purifier for the school children.
2- Social environment : Society in general is more concerned about
quality of life.
3- Technological environment: Innovative techniques are being
page 145
Business Studies- XII
developed to manufacture water purifier at competitive rates.
4- Economic environment : Incomes are rising and children at home
are also drinking purified water.
5- Political environment : The government is also showing positive
attitude towards the water purifier business. (1/2 mark is for
identifying the dimension and 1/2 mark for quoting the line).
Ans25 (i) The next three steps for choosing the best candidate are:
a) Employment Interview : Which is conducted to evaluate the
applicant's suitability for the job.
b) Reference and background checks : For the purpose of verifying the
information and gaining additional information.
c) Selection decision : From among the candidates : who pass the
tests, interviews and reference checks. (Each point careers i make and
½ marks should be deducted if sequence is incorrect)
(ii) The values which Nishant wants to communicate to the society are
(any two)
a) Equality
b) Development of rural area
c) Providing job opportunities in rural area
d) Optimum utilization of resources
(Full credit will be given for any other justified response of values)
Ans 26 Planning and controlling are inseparable twins of management
because:
1) Without planning there is no basis for controlling:- Controlling
requires standards with which performance can be measured and
evaluated. These standards are laid down in planning.
2) Planning is meaningless without controlling:- Planning sets the
standards, controlling observes the deviations from the standards and
initiates corrective actions.
page 146
Business Studies- XII
3) Planning is an intellectual process involving thinking and analysis to
discover and prescribe an appropriate course of action for achieving
Objectives Controlling on the other hand checks whether decisions
have been translated into desired actions. Planning is thus prescribing
and controlling is evaluative.
4) Planning and controlling both are forward looking:- Planning is
future oriented function as it involves looking in advance and making
policies for future. The controlling function makes sure that in future
actual performance and output match with planned performance so it
is forward looking.
5) Planning and controlling both are looking back- We book back to
the performance which is already achieved by the employees and
compare it with plan. (Each point carries with mark)
Ans 27 Measures to overcome communication barriers. (any six)
(1) Clarify the ideas before communicating.
(2) Communicate according to the needs of the receiver.
(3) Consult others before communicating.
(4) Beware of the language, tone and content of the message.
(5) Convey things of help and value to listeners.
(6) Ensure proper feedback by asking questions regarding the message
conveyed.
(Any other correct point will be given credit)
OR
Functions performed by a Supervisor (Any Six)
(1) Supervisor maintains day to day contact and friendly relations with
workers.
(2) Supervisor acts as a link between workers and management by
conveying management ideas to the workers and workers problems to
the management.
page 147
Business Studies- XII
(3) He maintains group unity among workers by sorting out their internal
differences.
(4) He provides good on the job training to the workers to build an
efficient team.
(5) He builds up high morale among workers through good leadership.
(6) He gives feedback to the workers after analyzing their work.
(Each point carries I mark, full credit shall be given for any other
suitable point)
Ans 28 Dividend decision is the decision about the proportion of profit to be
distributed among the shareholders and to be retained in business.
Factors which affect the dividend decision of the company are:
(1) Current earnings- Generally companies distribute higher rate of
dividend when earnings are substantially higher as compared to
previous year.
(2) Stability of dividend- Stable dividend policy ensures regular income
to shareholders and has a favorable impact on the value of shares and
reduces uncertainty from the point of view of shareholders as they are
assured of a reasonable rate of return.
(3) Liquidity or cash flow position- The Company must have sufficient
cash available with it to pay dividend. If the company has liquidity
problem; it may have to skip dividend for a year.
(4) Shareholders expectations- Small shareholders prefer current
income whereas big wealthy shareholders invest in shares for earning
capital gains. Management has to consider the expectations of both
the group of shareholders.
OR
The process of estimating the fund requirements of a business and
specifying the sources of funds is called financial planning.
OR
page 148
Business Studies- XII
Financial planning is the preparation of a financial blueprint of an
organization's future operations.
Importance of Financial Planning:
1. Financial planning provides policies and procedures for the sound
administration of finance function.
2. Financial planning results in preparation of plans for the future. Thus
new projects could be undertaken smoothly.
3. It ensures required funds from various sources for the smooth conduct
of business.
4. It achieves a balance between inflow and outflow of funds. Adequate
liquidity is ensured throughout the year.
5. It serves as the basis of financial control. The management attempts to
ensure utilization of funds in tune with the financial plans.
Ans 29 Four functions of stock exchange are:-
1. Providing liquidity to securities- Stock exchanges provides a ready
market for the securities issued by various institutions. The investors
can convert their money into securities and vice-versa very quickly.
2. Pricing of securities- It helps in determining the price of various
Securities. The prices at which transactions take place are recorded
and made public in the form of market quotations which helps the
investors to know current market prices.
3. Mobilization of savings- It helps in mobilizations of surplus fund of
individual firms for investment in securities.
4. Safety of transactions- It ensures fair dealing and safety of funds.
The members of stock exchange have to operate under certain rules
which seeks to check over-trading, illegitimate speculation and
manipulation.
(Or any other function of stock exchange can be explained)
OR
page 149
Business Studies- XII
(a) Call Money
? It is the method by which banks borrow from each other to be able
to maintain the cash reserve ratio.
? It is repayable on demand, with a maturity period of one day to
fifteen days.
(b) Treasury bill
? It is an instrument issued by Reserve Bank of India on behalf of the
Central Government to meet its short term requirements of funds.
? It is highly liquid, has an assured yield and negligible risk of
default.
(c) Commercial Paper
? It is an instrument issued by large and creditworthy companies to
raise short term funds at lower rates of interest than the market
rates.
? It is an unsecured, negotiable promissory note with a fixed
maturity period.
(d) Certificate of Deposit
? A certificate of deposit is a short term, unsecured, negotiable
instrument issued by commercial banks or development financial
institutions to individuals, corporations and companies.
? It is issued during periods of tight liquidity when the deposit
growth of banks is slow but the demand for credit is high.
Ans 30 Personal selling involves oral presentation of message in the form of
conversation with one or more prospective customers for the purpose
of making sales.
Qualities of good salesman:-
1. Personality - A good physical appearance is an asset for a salesman as
it creates good impression and self- confidence to salesman.
page 150
Business Studies- XII
2. Social qualities - A salesman should be social and have the ability to
mix up with the people. He should be polite, humble and courteous
with the customers.
3. Mental qualities - An effective salesman must possess certain mental
qualities like- imagination, foresightedness, presence of mind, strong
memory and initiative.
4. Communication ability - Communication skill is an asset for the
salesman. He should able to speak freely, clearly and in a well pitched
voice.
(Or any other quality like vocational skills, Patience, dependability
etc)
OR
Four factors which affect the determination of the price of product:-
1. Cost of product - While fixing the price of a product the cost of
production and distribution must be considered which should be
covered to avoid losses.
2. Demand of product - The market demand for a product has a big
impact on its pricing. If the demand is inelastic higher price may be
fixed and if the demand is elastic, the firm should not fix higher prices.
3. Extent of competition - Competition in the market is a crucial factor
in price determination. The price charged for similar product by
competition determines the price of our product.
4. Govt. Regulations - The maximum sale price of some products is
fixed by Govt. No firm can charge beyond the statutory price.
(Or any other factor likes types of customers, pricing objectives,
marketing methods etc.)
page 151
Business Studies- XII
doc_706094060.pdf
Management is an art of getting things done with and through others. Management can be defined as, the process of getting things done with the aim of achieving organizational goals effectively and efficiently.
UNIT 1
NATURE AND SIGNIFICANCE OF
MANAGEMENT
Management is an art of getting things done with and through others.
Management can be defined as, the process of getting things done with the aim
of achieving organizational goals effectively and efficiently.
Efficiency and effectiveness
Efficiency means doing the task correctly at minimum cost through optimum
utilization of resources while effectiveness is concerned with end result means
completing the task correctly within stipulated time. Although efficiency and
effectiveness are different yet they are inter related. It is important for
management to maintain a balance between the two.
Example : A business produces targeted 1000 units but at a higher cost is
effective but not efficient. Therefore if the business has to be effective and
efficient then it has to produce targeted 1000 units within cost.
Characteristics of Management
1. Goal oriented Process : It is a goal oriented process, which is
undertaken to achieve already specified and desired objectives by
proper utilization of available resources.
2. Pervasive : Management is universal in nature. It is used in all types of
organisations whether economic, social or political irrespective of its
size, nature and location and at every level.
3. Multidimensional : It is multidimensional as it involves management
of work, people and operations.
4. Continuous : It consists of a series of function and its functions are
being performed by all managers simultaneously. The process of
management continues till an organization exists for attaining its
objectives.
page 1
Business Studies- XII
5. Group Activity : It is a group activity since it involves managing and
coordinating activities of different people as a team to attain the desired
objectives.
6. Dynamic function :It is a dynamic function since it has to adapt
according to need, time and situation of the changing environment. For
example, Mc Donalds made major changes in its ‘Menu’ to survive in
the Indian market.
7. Intangible Force : It is intangible force as it can't be seen but its effects
can be felt in the form of results like whether the objectives are met and
whether people are motivated or not and there is orderliness and
coordination in the work environment.
Objectives of management
(A) Organizational objectives of Survival (Earning enough revenues to
cover cost); profit (To cover cost and risk); & Growth (To improve its
future prospects).
(B) Social objectives of giving benefits to society like using environmental
friendly practices and giving employment to disadvantaged sections of
society etc. Example :- TISCO, ITC, and Asian Paints.
(C) Personal Objectives because diverse personal objectives of people
working in the organization have to be reconciled with organizational
objectives.
n
n
a i l n
P g
g
n
i
f
f
a
t
S
O
r
g
a
n
i
s
i
n
g
Management
is a Continuous
Process
page 2
Business Studies- XII
Importance of Management
(1) Achieving Group Goals : Management creates team work and
coordination in the group. Managers give common direction to the
individual efforts in achieving the overall goals of the organization.
(2) Increases Efficiency : Management increases efficiency by using
resources in the best possible manner to reduce cost and increase
productivity.
(3) Creates Dynamic organization : Management helps the employees to
overcome their resistance to change and adapt as per changing situation
to ensure its survival and growth.
(4) Achieving personal objectives : Management helps the individuals to
achieve their personal goals while working towards organizational
objectives.
(5) Development of Society : Management helps in the development of
society by producing good quality products, creating employment
opportunities and adopting new technology.
Management as an Art
Art refers to skillful and personal application of existing knowledge to
achieve desired results. It can be acquired through study, observation
and experience. The features of art as follows :
(1) Existence of theoretical knowledge : In every art systematic and
organized study material should be available compulsorily to acquire
theoretical knowledge.
(2) Personalised application : The use of basic knowledge differs from
person to person and thus, art is a very personalised concept.
(3) Based on practice and creativity : Art involves the creative practice of
existing theoretical knowledge.
In management also a huge volume of literature and books are available
on different aspects of management. Every manager has his own unique
style of managing things and people. He uses his creativity in applying
management techniques and his skills improve with regular application.
Since all the features of art are present in management so it can be
called an art.
page 3
Business Studies- XII
Management as a Science
Science is a systematised body of knowledge that is based on general
truths which can be tested anywhere, anytime. The features of Science
are as follows :
(1) Systematized body of knowledge : Science has a systematized body of
knowledge based on principles and experiments.
(2) Principles based on experiments and observation : Scientific
principles are developed through experiments and observation.
(3) Universal validity : Scientific principles have universal validity and
application.
Management has systematic body of knowledge and its principles are
developed over a period of time based on repeated experiments &
observations, which are universally applicable.
As the principles of management are not as exact as the principles of
pure science, so it may be called an inexact science. The prominence of
human factor in the management on process makes it a Social Science.
Management as Profession :
Profession means an occupation for which specialized knowledge and
skills are required and entry is restricted. The main features of
profession are as follows :
(1) Well defined body of knowledge : All the professions are based on
well defined body of knowledge.
(2) Restricted entry : The entry in every profession is restricted through
examination or through some minimum educational qualification.
(3) Professional Associations : All professions are affiliated to a
professional association which regulates entry and frames code of
conduct relating to the profession.
(4) Ethical code of conduct : All professions are bound by a code of
conduct which guides the behaviours of its members.
(5) Service Motive : The main aim of a profession is to serve its clients.
page 4
Business Studies- XII
Management does not fulfill all the features of a profession and thus it is not a
full fledged profession because anybody can proclaim to be a manager as no
prescribed compulsory educational degree or license is required. Besides there
are not formal ethical codes which are required to be observed.
Levels of Management : Top, Middle and Operational levels.
“ Levels of management” means different categories of managers, from
the lowest to the highest on the basis of their relative responsibilities, authority
and status.
Top Level
Consists of Chairperson, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Operating
Officer or equivalent and their team.
Chief task is to integrate and to coordinate the various activities of the
business, framing policies, formulating organisational goals &
strategies.
Levels of management
Top Level
Framing plans
& policies
Middle Level
Interpretation of plans
Lower Level
Execution and implementation of plans
R
e
s
p
o
n
s
i
b
i
l
i
t
y
/
A
c
c
o
u
n
t
a
b
i
l
i
t
y
A
u
t
h
o
r
o
t
y
page 5
Business Studies- XII
Middle Level
Consist of Divisional or Departmental heads, Plant Superintendents and
Operation Managers etc.
Main tasks are to interpret the policies of the top management to ensure
the availability of resources to implement policies, to coordinate all
activities, ensure availability of necessary personnel & assign duties
and responsibilities to them.
Lower Level / Supervisory Level
Consists of Foremen and supervisor etc.
Main task is to ensure actual implementation of the policies as per
directions, bring workers’ grievances before the management &
maintain discipline among the workers.
Functions of Management : Planning, Organising, Staffing, Directing and
Controlling are the main functions of management.
Planning is deciding in advance what to do in future and how to do it.
Organising is to assign duties, grouping tasks, establishing authority and
allocating resources required to carry out a specific plan.
Staffing is finding the right people for the right job.
Directing is leading, influencing and motivating employees to perform the
tasks assigned to them.
Controlling is monitoring the organizational performance towards the
attainment of the organizational goals.
Coordination : (The essence of Management) : Coordination is the force
which synchronizes all the functions of management and activities of different
departments. Lack of coordination results in overlapping, duplication, delays
and chaos.
page 6
Business Studies- XII
Features of Coordination :
1. Coordination integrates group efforts: It integrates diverse business
activities into purposeful group activity ensuring that all people work in
one direction to achieve organizational goals.
2. Coordination ensures unity of action : It directs the activities of
different departments and employees towards achievement of common
goals and brings unity in individual efforts.
3. Coordination is a continuous process : It is not a specific activity rather
it is required at all levels, in all departments till the organization
continues its operations.
4. Coordination is all pervasive function : It is universal in nature. It
synchronizes the activities of all levels and departments as they are
interdependent to maintain organizational balance.
5. Coordination is the responsibility of all managers : It is equally
important at all the three-top, middle and lower levels of management.
Thus it is the responsibility of all managers that they make efforts to
establish coordination.
6. Coordination is a deliberate function : Coordination is never established
by itself rather it is a conscious effort on the part of every manager.
Cooperation is voluntary effort of employees to help one another.
Effective coordination can not be achieved without cooperation of
group members.
Plannning
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g
Coordination
D
i
r
e
c
t
i
n
g
S
t
a
f
f
in
g
O
r
g
a
n
i
s
i
n
g
page 7
Business Studies- XII
Important Questions :
1 Mark Questions ( To be answered in one word or one sentence)
1. In order to be successful an organization must change its goals
according to the needs to the environment. Which characteristic of
management is highlighted in the statement ? (Answer : It is a dynamic
function).
2. To meet the objectives of the firm the management of Angora Limited
offers employment to physically challenged persons. Identify the
organizational objective it is trying to achieve (Answer : Social
Objective.)
3. Management of any organization strives to attain different objectives.
Enumerate any two such objectives.
4. Give any two characteristics of management.
5. Management is multidimensional. Enumerate any two dimensions of
management.
6. Managerial activities are performed in all types of organization in all
departments at all levels. Which management characteristic is
highlighted here ? (Answer : It is all pervasive)
7. Your grandfather has retired where he was responsible for
implementing the plans developed by the top management. At which
level of management was he working? State one more function of this
level of management. (Answer : Middle level management)
8. List any two social objectives of management.
9. Your grandfather has retired as a Director of manufacturing company.
At which level of management was he working? Different functions are
performed at this level. State any one such function. (Answer : Top
level of management)
10. What is meant by 'Management' ?
11. Pizza Hut keeps introducing new varieties of pizza in its menu. Which
characteristic of management is highlighted in this ?
12. Which ‘function’ of management binds the all other functions?
page 8
Business Studies- XII
13. “In an organization, the employees are happy and satisfied, there is no
chaos and the effect of management is noticeable.” Which
characteristic of management is highlighted by this statement ?
3/4 Marks Questions (To be answered in about 50 to 70 words)
1. Explain how Management is an art.
2. Identify and explain the nature of management when it is said to be a
systemaised body of knowledge that explains certain general truths.
3. 'Coordination is the essence of management.' Explain
5/6 marks Questions (To be answered in about 150 words)
1. Management is a Profession like Accounting, Medicine and Law as it
also has a well defined body of knowledge. Yet management does not
qualify to be a full fledged profession. Why? (Hint : No formal
qualification is prescribed to enter management, no code of conduct is
prescribed).
2. Success of an organization largely depends upon its management.
Explain any five reasons to justify the statement. (Hint : Give five
points of Importance of management).
page 9
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 2
PRINCIPLES OE MANAGEMENT
Concept of Principles of Management :
Principles of Management are the broad and general guidelines for managerial
decision making. They are different from principles of science as they deal
with human behaviour. They are different from techniques of management as
techniques are methods whereas principles are guidelines to action and
decision making. Principles of management are different from values which are
formed as generally accepted behaviour in society and are having moral
coordination whereas principles are formed through research having technical
nature.
The management principles are derived from observation, analysis,
experimental studies and personal experiences of the managers.
Nature of Principles of Management
The nature of principles of management can be described in the following
points :
(1) Universal applicability i.e. they can be applied in all types of
organizations, business as well as non-business, small as well as large
enterprises.
(2) General Guidelines : They are general guidelines to action and
decision making however they do not provide readymade solutions as
the business environment is ever changing or dynamic.
(3) Formed by practice and experimentation : They are developed after
thorough research work on the basis of experiences of managers.
(4) Flexible Which can be adapted and modified by the practicing
managers as per the demands of the situations.
(5) Mainly Behavioural : Since the principles aim at influencing complex
human behaviour they are behavioural in nature.
(6) Cause and Effect relationship : They intend to establish relationship
between cause & effect so that they can be used in similar situations.
(7) Contingent - Their applicability depends upon the prevailing situation
page 10
Business Studies- XII
at a particular point of time. According to Terry, " Management
principles are 'capsules' of selected management wisdom to be used
carefully and discretely".
Significance of the Principles of Management
The significance of principles of management can be derived from their
utility which can be understood from the following points :
1. Providing managers with useful insights into reality :-
Management principles guide managers to take right decision at right
time by improving their knowledge, ability and understanding of
various managerial situations and circumstances.
2. Optimum utilization of resources and effective administration :
Management principles facilitate optimum use of resources by
coordinating the physical, financial and human resources. They also
help in better administration by discouraging personal prejudices and
adopting an objective approach.
3. Scientific decisions : Decisions based on management principles tend
to be more realistic, balanced and free from personal bias.
4. Meeting the changing environmental requirements : Management
principles provide an effective and dynamic leadership and help the
organizations to implement the changes.
5. Fulfilling social responsibility : Principles of management not only help
in achieving organizational goals but also guide managers in
performing social responsibilities. Example : “Equity” and “Fair”
remuneration.
6. Management training, education and research : Management principles
are helpful in identifying the areas in which existing and future
managers should be trained. They also provide the basis for future
research.
page 11
Business Studies- XII
Fayol’s Principles of Management
About Henry Fayol :-
Henry Fayol (1841-1925) got degree in Mining Engineering and joined
French Mining Company in 1860 as an Engineer . He rose to the position of
Managing Director in 1988. When the company was on the verge of
bankruptcy. He accepted the challenge and by using rich and broad
administrative experience, he turned the fortune of the company. For his
contributions, he is well known as the “Father of General Management”.
Principles of Management developed by Fayol
1. Division of work : Work is divided in small tasks / job and each work is
done by a trained specialist which leads to greater efficiency,
specialisation, increased productivity and reduction of unnecessary
wastage and movements
.2. Authority and Responsibility : Authority means power to take decisions
and responsibility means obligation to complete the job assigned on
time. Authority and responsibility should go hand in hand. Mere
responsibility without authority makes an executive less interested in
discharging his duties. Similarly giving authority without assigning
responsibility makes him arrogant and there is fear of misuse of power.
3. Discipline : It is the obedience to organizational rules by the
subordinates. Discipline requires good supervisors at all levels, clear
and fair agreements and judicious application of penalties.
4. Unity of Command : It implies that every worker should receive orders
and instructions from one superior only, otherwise it will create
confusion, conflict, disturbance and overlapping of activities.
Unity of Command Multiplicity of Command
Superior
Subordinate
Superior 1 Superior 2 Superior 3
Subordinate
page 12
Business Studies- XII
5. Unity of Direction : Each group of activities having the same objective
must have one head and one plan. This ensures unity of action and
coordination.
Presence of Unity of Direction Lack of Unity of Direction
6. Subordination of Individual Interest to General Interest : The interest of
an organization should take priority over the interest of any one
individual employee.
7. Remuneration of Employees : The overall pay and compensation should
be fair to both employees and the organization. The wages should
encourage the workers to work more and better.
8. Centralisation and Decentralisation : Centralisation means
concentration of decisions making authority in few hands at top level.
Decentralisation means evenly distribution of power at every level of
management. Both should be balanced as no organization can be
completely centralised or completely decentralised.
9. Scalar Chain : The formal lines of authority between superiors and
subordinates from the highest to the lowest ranks is known as scalar
chain. This chain should not be violated but in emergency employees at
same level can contact through Gang Plank by informing their
immediate superiors.
A
B E
C
F
D
G
Gang Plank
page 13
Business Studies- XII
10. Order : A place for everything and everyone and everything and
everyone should be in its designated place. People & material must be
in suitable places at appropriate time for maximum efficiency.
11. Equity : The working environment of any organization should be free
from all forms of discrimination (religion, language, caste, sex, belief
or nationality) and principles of justice and fair play should be
followed. No worker should be unduly favoured or punished.
12. Stability of Personnel : After being selected and appointed after due
and rigorous procedure, the selected person should be kept at the post
for a minimum period decided to show results.
13. Initiative : Workers should be encouraged to develop and carry out
their plan for improvements. Initiative means taking the first step with
self motivation. It is thinking out and executing the plan.
14. Espirit De Corps : Management should promote team spirit, unity and
harmony among employees. Management should promote a team work.
Difference between Unity of command and Unity of direction
Basis Unity of Command Unity of Direction
(1) Meaning One subordinate should Each group of
receive orders from & activities having
should be responsible same objective
to only one superior must have one
head and one .
(2) Aim Prevents dual Prevents
subordination. overlapping of
activities.
(3) Implications Affects an individual Affects the entire
employee. organization.
Taylor’s Scientific Management :
Fredrick Winslow Taylor (1856-1915) was a person who within a very short
duration (1878-1884) rose from ranks of an ordinary apprentice to chief
engineer in Midvale Steel Company, U.S.A.. Taylor conducted a number of
experiments and came to conclusion that workers were producing much less
than the targeted standard task. Also, both the parties - Management and
page 14
Business Studies- XII
workers are hostile towards each other. He gave a number of suggestions to
solve this problem and correctly propounded the theory of scientific
management to emphasize the use of scientific approach in managing an
enterprise instead of hit and trial method. For his contributions, he is well
known as the “ Father of the Scientific Management”
Scientific Management attempts to eliminate wastes to ensure maximum
production at minimum cost.
Principles of Scientific Management :-
(1) Science, not rule of Thumb : There should be scientific study and
analysis of each element of a job in order to replace the old rule of
thumb approach or hit and miss method. We should be constantly
experimenting to develop new techniques which make the work much
simpler, easier and quicker.
(2) Harmony, Not discord : It implies that there should be mental
revolution on part of managers and workers in order to respect each
other's role and eliminate any class conflict to realize organizational
objectives.
(3) Cooperation not individualism : It is an extension of the Principle of
Harmony not discord whereby constructive suggestions of workers
should be adopted and they should not go on strike as both management
and workers share responsibility and perform together.
(4) Development of each and every person to his or her greatest
Efficiency and Prosperity : It implies development of competencies of
all persons of an organization after their scientific selection and
assigning work suited to their temperament and abilities. This will
increase the productivity by utilizing the skills of the workers to the
fullest possible extent.
Techniques of Scientific Management
l) Functional Foremanship : Functional forernanship is a technique in
which planning and execution are separated. There are eight types of
specialized and professionals four each under planning and execution
who keep a watch on all workers to extract optimum performance.
page 15
Business Studies- XII
Planning Incharges :
1. Route Clerk to specify the exact sequence and route of production.
2. Instruction card clerk is responsible for drafting instructions for the
workers.
3. Time and cost clerk to prepare time and cost sheet for the job.
4. Shop Disciplinarian to ensure discipline and enforcement of rules and
regulations among the workers.
Production Incharges :-
1. Gang boss is responsible for keeping tools and machines ready for
operation.
2. Speed boss is responsible for timely and accurate completion of job.
3. Repair boss to ensure proper working conditions of tools and
machines.
4. Inspector to check quality of work.
2) Standardisation and Simplification of work : Standardization refers
to developing standards for every business activity whereas
Simplification refers to eliminating superfluous varieties of product or
service. It results in savings of cost of labour, machines and tools. It
Planning Incharge
Workman
Factory Manager
Instruction
Card clerk
Route
clerk
Time&cost
clerk
Disciplinarian
Speed
Boss
Gang
Boss
Inspector Repair
Boss
Production Incharge
page 16
Business Studies- XII
leads to fuller utilization of equipment and increase in turnover.
(3) Method Study : The objective of method study is to find out one best
way of doing the job to maximise efficiency in the use of materials,
machinery, manpower and capital.
(4) Motion Study: It is the science of eliminating wastefulness resulting
from using unnecessary, ill-directed and inefficient motions by workers
and machines to identify best method of work.
(5) Time study : It determines the standard time taken to perform a well
defined job. The objective of time study is to determine the number of
workers to be employed, frame suitable incentive schemes & determine
labour costs.
(6) Fatigue study : Fatigue study seeks to determine time and frequency of
rest intervals in completing a task. The rest interval will enable workers
to regain their lost stamina thereby avoiding accidents, rejections and
industrial sickness.
7. Differential piece wage system : This system links wages and
productivity. The standard output per day is established and two piece
rates are used : higher for those who achieve upto and more than
standard output i.e. efficient workers and lower for inefficient and slow
workers. Thus, efficient workers will be rewarded & inefficient will be
motivated to improve their performance.
? For example : Standard task is 10 units. Rates are :- Rs 50 per unit for
producing 10 units or more and Rs 40 per unit for producing less than
10 units
? .Worker A produces 11 Units; he gets Rs 550 (11 units x 50 per unit)
? Worker B produces 09 units; he gets Rs 360 (9 units x 40 per unit)
? This difference of Rs 190 will motivate B to perform better.
8. Mental revolution : It involves a complete change in mental outlook
and attitude of workers and management towards one another from
competition to cooperation. The management should create pleasant
working conditions & workers should work with devotion and loyalty.
Instead of fighting over distribution of profits, they must focus attention
on increasing it.
page 17
Business Studies- XII
Fayol versus Taylor :
While the work of Taylor concerned shop floor, the work of Fayol
concerned General Principles applicable to all types of situations. So,
their principles are mutually complementary to each other.
Important Questions
1 Mark questions ( to be answered in one word or one sentence)
1. Why is that management principles are universal ?
2. How are management principles derived ?
3. Which principles of Fayol is violated in Taylor's Functional
Foremanship?
4. A manager should replace 'I' with 'We' in all his conversations to
encourage team spirit. Identify the principle of management
emphasized here.
5. Give one consequence of violating principle of remuneration.
6. Which technique of Taylor insists on paying higher wages to efficient
workers ?
7. Name the device which permits direct communication between
employees working at same level.
8. Which technique of Taylor insists on using the most optimum way of
doing a job.
9. What is meant by 'Principles of Management'?
10. Which principle of Taylor suggests that the job performed should be
based on scientific enquiry and not on intuition ?
3/4 marks questions :
1. Explain the following principles of management:-
a) Equity
b) Remuneration of Employees.
page 18
Business Studies- XII
2. In your school, you observe that books, are kept in office, chalks in the
library and office records in the staffroom. How will this affect the
achievement of school objectives ? Which aspect of management is
lacking and why ? As a manager, what steps will you take to rectify the
shortcomings ?
5/6 Marks Question (to be answered in about 150 words)
1. Explain any two techniques of Taylor's Scientific Management.
2. Explain the following principles of Fayol with example.
a) Unity of Command
b) Unity of Direction
c) Order
page 19
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 3
BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Business environment can be defined as those forces, individuals and
institutions who have the ability to influence the working of an organisation.
Features of Business Environment :
(l) Totality of external forces : Business environment is the sum total of
all the forces/factors external to a business firm.
(2) Specific and General forces : Business environment includes both
specific and general forces. Specific forces include investors,
competitors, customers etc who influence business firm directly while
general forces include social, political, economic, legal and
technological conditions which affect a business firm indirectly.
(3) Inter-relatedness : All the forces/factors of a business environment are
closely interrelated. For example, increased awareness of health care
has raised the demand for organic food and roasted snacks.
(4) Dynamic : Business environment is dynamic in nature which keeps on
changing with the change in technology, consumer's fashion and tastes
etc.
(5) Uncertainty : Business environment is uncertain as it is difficult to
predict the future environmental changes and their impact with full
accuracy.
(6) Complexity : Business environment is complex which is easy to
understand in parts separately but it is difficult to understand in totality.
(7) Relativity : Business environment is a relative concept whose impact
differs from country to country, region to region and firm to firm. For
example, a shift of preference from soft drinks to juices will be
welcomed as an opportunity by juice making companies while a threat
to soft drink manufacturers.
IMPORTANCE OF BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
l. Identification of opportunities to get first mover advantage.:
page 20
Business Studies- XII
Understanding of business environment helps an organisation in
identifying advantageous opportunities and getting their benefits prior
to competitors, thus reaping the benefits of being a pioneer.
2. Identification of threats : Correct knowledge of business environment
helps an organisation to identify those threats which may adversely
affect its operations. For example, Bajaj Auto made considerable
improvements in its two wheelers when Honda & other companies
entered the auto industry.
3. Tapping useful resources : Business environment makes available
various resources such as capital, labour, machines, raw material etc to
a business firm. In order to know the availability of resources and
making them available on time at economical price, knowledge of
business environment is necessary.
4. Coping with Rapid changes : Continuous study/scanning of business
environment helps in knowing the changes which are taking place and
thus they can be faced effectively.
5. Assistance in planning and policy formulation : Understanding and
analysis of business environment helps an organisation in planning &
policy formulation. For example, ITC Hotels planned new hotels in
India after observing boom in tourism sector.
6. Helps in Improving performance : Correct analysis and continuous
monitoring of business environment helps an organisation in improving
its performance.
Components of Business Environment
Internal / Specific Environment
- Customers
- Owners and investors
- Suppliers
- Creditors
- Employees and trade union
- Competitors
External/ General Environment
-
Economic Environment
-
Social Environment
-
Political Environment
-
Technological Environment
-
Legal Environment
page 21
Business Studies- XII
DIMENSIONS / COMPONENTS OF BUSINESS
ENVIRONMENT
1. Economic Environment : It has immediate and direct economic
impact on a business. Rate of interest, inflation rate, change in the
income of people, monetary policy, price level etc. are some economic
factors which could affect business firms. Economic environment may
offers opportunities to a firm or it may put constraints.
2. Social Environment : It includes various social forces such as
customs, beliefs, literacy rate, educational levels, lifestyle, values etc.
Changes in social environment affect an organisation in the long run.
Example : Now a days people are paying more attention towards their
health as a result of which demand for mineral water, diet coke etc has
increased while demand of tobacco, fatty food products has decreased.
3. Technological Environment : lt provides new and advance ways/
techniques of production. A businessman must closely monitor the
technological changes taking place in the industry as it helps in facing
competition and improving quality of the product. For Example, Digital
watches in place of traditional watches, artificial fabrics in place of
traditional cotton and silk fabrics, booking of railway tickets on internet
etc.
4. Political Environment : Changes in political situation also affect
business organisations. Political stability builds confidence among
business community while political instability and bad law & order
situation may bring uncertainty in business activities. Ideology of the
political party, attitude of government towards business, type of
government-single party or coalition government affects the business
Example : Bangalore and Hyderabad have become the most popular
locations for IT due to supportive political climate.
5. Legal Environment : lt constitutes the laws and legislations passed by
the Government, administrative orders, court judgements, decisions of
various commissions and agencies. Businessmen have to act according
to various legislations and their knowledge is very necessary. Example
: Advertisement of Alcoholic products is prohibited and it is
compulsory to give statutory warning on advertisement of cigarettes.
Economic Environment in India :
As a part of economic reforms, the Government of India announced
page 22
Business Studies- XII
New Economic Policy in July 1991 for taking out the country out of
economic difficulty and speeding up the development of the country.
Main features of NEP, 1991 are as follows :
1. Only six industries were kept under licencing scheme.
2. The role of public sector was limited only to four industries.
3. Disinvestment was carried out in many public sector enterprises.
4. Foreign capital/investment policy was liberalised and in many
sectors 100% direct foreign investment was allowed.
5. Automatic permission was given for signing technology
agreements with foreign companies.
6. Foreign investment promotion board (FIPB) was setup to
promote & bring foreign investment in India.
7. Various benefits were offered to small scale industries.
The Main objective of New Industrial Policy was to promote
Liberalization, Privatization and Globalization.
1. Liberalisation : It means freeing of Indian Industry from all
unnecessary government controls and restrictions. Abolishing licensing
requirements; Freedom in deciding the scale of business; removals of
restriction on movements of goods and service; reduction in tax rates;
freedom in fixing prices; simplifying procedures; making it easier to
attract foreign investment.
2. Privatization : Giving greater role to private sector in the nation
building process and reduced role of public sector; Disinvestment in
many Public Sector undertaking etc, Setting up of BIFR to revive sick
units in public sector enterprises suffering losses. It aimed at improving
efficiency and performance of government undertakings, reducing
budgetary deficit & better utilization of national resources.
3. Globalization : lt means integration of various economies of the world
leading to the emergence of cohesive global economy. The measures
taken by the Government include trade liberalization which includes
import liberalization; Export Promotion through rationalization of tariff
structure; Foreign exchange liberalization; increased interaction among
global economies under the aegis (protection/support) of World Trade
page 23
Business Studies- XII
Organization. It resulted in addition of Export duty, reduction of
import.
IMPACT OF GOVERNMENT POLICY CHANGES ON
BUSINESS AND INDUSTRY
1. Increasing Competition : Delicencing and entry of foreign firms in
Indian market is increased the level of competition for Indian firms.
2. More Demanding Customers : Now customers are more aware and
they keep maximum information of the market as the result of which
now market is customer/buyer oriented. Now products are produced
keeping in mind the demands of the customers.
3. Rapid Changing Technological Environment : Rapid Technological
advancement has changed/ improved the production process as a result
of which maximum production is possible at minimum cost but it leads
to tough challenges in front of small firms.
4. Necessity for change : After New Industrial Policy the market forces
(demand & supply) are changing at a very fast rate. Change in the
various components of business environment has made it necessary for
the business firms to modify their policies & operations from time to
time.
5. Need for Developing Human resources : The changing market
conditions of today require people with higher competence and greater
commitment, hence there is a need for developing human resources
which could increase their effectiveness and efficiency.
6. Market orientation : Earlier selling concept was famous in the market
now its place is taken by the marketing concept. Today firms produce
those goods & services which are required by the customers. Marketing
research, educational advertising, after sales services have become
more significant.
7. Reduction ln budgetary Support to Public Sector : The budgetary
support given by the government to the public sector is reducing and
thus the public sector has to survive and grow by utilising their own
resources efficiently.
page 24
Business Studies- XII
IMPORTANT QUESTIONS
1 Mark Questions (To be answered in 1 word or 1 sentence)
1. Govt. of India is seriously thinking to allow oil marketing public sector
undertaking to fix their own price for diesel. Which economic reform is
the reason of this change in Governments' Policy (Answer:
Liberalization)
2. Just after declaration of Lok Sabha Elections 2009 results, the Bombay
stock exchange's price index (Sensex) rose by 2100 points in a day.
Identify the environmental factor which led to this rise. (Answer :
Political Environment)
3. State any two impacts of change of 'Governments policy on business
and industry.
4. The understanding of business environment helps the managers to
identify threats. What is meant by threats here? (Answer: Threats refer
to the external environment trends and changes that will hinder a firm's
performance)
5. Business environment includes both specific and general forces. List
any four specific forces. (Answer : Suppliers, investors, customers and
competions).
6. The understanding of business environment helps the managers to
identify Opportunities . What is meant by Opportunities here? (Answer-
Opportunities refer to positive changes and trends that will help the
business to improve its performance.)
7. Business Environment includes both specific and general forces. List
any four general forces. (Answer: Social, Economic, Political, Legal
and Technological).
3/4 Marks Questions (To be answered in about 50 to 75 words)
1. Explain any three features of Business Environment.
2. What changes have been made in Industrial policy in recent past?
3. Explain Increasing Competition and More demanding customers as
impact of Government policy changes on Business and Industry.
page 25
Business Studies- XII
5 Marks Questions (To be answered about 150 words)
1. Identify the type of dimension of environment to which the following
are related :
i) Banks reducing interest rate on housing loans.
ii) An increasing number of working women.
iii) Booking of air tickets through internet.
iv) Alcohol beverages are prohibited to be advertised on Door
Darshan.
v) A stable government has built up confidence among the firms to
invest in big project.
Answer :
i) Economic Environment,
ii) Social Environment
iii) Technological Environment
iv) Legal Environment
v) Political Environment
2. Explain the various dimensions of business environment with
examples.
3. Explain by giving any five reasons, why understanding of business
environment is important for managers.
page 26
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 4
PLANNING
Concept-
Planning is deciding in advance what to do, how to do when to do, and
who is to do it. Planning bridges the gap from where we are to where
we want to go. lt is one of the basic managerial functions. Planning
involves setting objectives and developing appropriate courses of action
to achieve these objectives. Thus, it is closely connected with creativity
and innovation.
Importance of Planning :-
1. Planning provides directions : By stating in advance how work is to
be done planning provides direction for action. If there was no
planning, employees would be working in different directions and the
organisation would not be able to achieve its goals efficiently.
2. Planning reduces the risk of uncertainty :- Planning is an activity
which enables a manager to look ahead, anticipate change, consider the
impact of change and develop appropriate responses.
3. Planning reduces wasteful activities :- Planning serves as the basis of
coordinating the activities and efforts of different departments and
individuals whereby useless and redundant activities are minimised.
4 Planning promotes innovative ideas : Planning is the first function of
management. Managers get the opportunity to develop new ideas and
new ideas can take the shape of concrete plans.
5. Planning facilitates decision making : Under planning targets are laid
down. The manager has to evaluate each alternative and select the most
viable option.
6. Planning establishes standards for controlling :- Planning provides
the standards against which the actual performance can be measured
and evaluated. Control is blind without planning. Thus planning
provides the basis for control.
page 27
Business Studies- XII
Limitations of Planning :-
1. Planning leads to rigidity : Planning discourages individual initiative
& creativity. The managers do not make changes according to changing
business environment. They stop taking or giving suggestions and new
ideas. Thus detailed planning may create a rigid framework in the
organisation.
2. Planning may not work in dynamic environment : Planning is based
on anticipation of future happenings and since future is uncertain and
dynamic therefore, the future anticipations are not always true.
4. Planning involves huge costs : When plans are drawn up, huge cost is
involved in their formulation.
5. Planning is time consuming : Sometimes plans to be drawn up take so
much of time that there is not much time left for their implementation.
6. Planning does not guarantee success : The success of an enterprise is
possible only when plans are properly drawn and implemented.
Sometimes managers depend on previously tried successful plans, but it
is not always true that a plan which has worked before will work
effectively again.
Planning Process :-
1. Setting Objectives : The first and foremost step is setting objectives.
Objectives may be set for the entire organisation and each
department.2. Developing premises : Planning premises are the
assumptions about the likely shape of events in future. lt forecasts the
obstacles, problems or limitations in the path of the effective planning
because of which the plans may deviate. Planning premises supply
relevant facts & information relating to future.
3. Identifying alternative courses of action :- Once objectives are set
and premises are developed. Then the next step would be to act upon
them. All the alterative courses of action should be identified.
4. Evaluating alternative Courses : The next step is to be weigh pros
and cons of each alternative. Each course will have many variables
which have to be weighed against each other.
5. Selecting an alternative :- After comparison and evaluation, the best
alternative is chosen for reaching organisation objectives. On the basis
page 28
Business Studies- XII
of merits, demerits, resources and consequences, the best plan has to be
adopted, which must be the most feasible, profitable and with least
negative consequences.
6. Implementing the plan : Once the plans are developed they are put
into action. Successful implementation of the plan ensures
understanding and whole-hearted cooperation of all the employees.
7. Follow up action : To see whether plans are being implemented,
activities are performed according to schedule. In case of any
devitations, changes are made in the plans.
Types of Plan : -
Plan
A Plan is a specific action proposed to help the organization achieve its
objectives. It is a document that outlines how goals are going to be met.
The importance of developing plans is evident from the fact that there
may be more than one means of reaching a particular goal. So with the
help of logical plans, objectives of an organization could be achieved
easily.
SINGLE USE PLAN
A Single use plan in a business refers to plan developed for a one-time
project or event that has one specific objective. It applies to activities
that do not recur or repeat. It is specifically designed to achieve a
particular goal. Such plan is developed to meet the needs of a unique
situation. The length of a single-use plan differs greatly depending on
the project in question, as a single event plan may only last one day
while a single project may last one week or months. For example, an
outline for an advertising campaign. After the campaign runs its course,
the short term plan will lose its relevance except as a guide for creating
future plans.
Types of Single Use Plan : -
1) Program :- A program is a single use plan containing detailed
statements about a project outlining the objectives, policies, procedures,
rules, tasks, physical & human resources required to implement any
course of action.
2. Budget :- A budget is a statement of expected result expressed in
numerical terms for a definite period of time in the future.
page 29
Business Studies- XII
STANDING PLANS
Standing plans are used over and over again because they focus on
organizational situations that occur repeatedly. They are usually made
once and retain their value over a period of years while undergoing
revisions and updates. That is why they are also called repeated use
plans. For example, Businessman plans to establish a new business.
Entrepreneur drafts business plan before opening the doors to their
business, and they can use their plan to guide their efforts for years into
the future.
Types of Standing Plans : -
l. Objective : Objectives can be said to be the desired future
position that the management would like to reach.
2. Strategy : A strategy refers to a future decision defining the
organizations' direction and scope in the long run.
3. Policy : Policies are general statements that guide thinking or
channelize energies towards a particular direction. "We don't sell on
Credit" is the example of sales policy.
4. Procedure : Procedures are routine steps on how to carry out
activities.
5. Rules are specific statement that tell what is to be done and what
not to be done. For example 'No Smoking' is a rule.
6. Methods are standardized ways or manner in which a task
has to be performed considering the objectives.
page 30
Business Studies- XII
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN SINGLE USE AND STANDING PLANS
BASIS OF SINGLE USE PLANS STANDING PLANS
DIFFERENCE
1. Meaning A single-use plan in a business A standing plan in a business refers
refers to plans developed for a to plans developed for using over and
one-time project or event that has over again because they focus on
one specific objective. organizational situations that occur
repeatedly.
2. Objective Single use plan is developed to Standing plan however is developed
carry out a course of action that is for activities that occur regularly over
not likely to be repeated in future a period of time.
time.
3. Scope Single use plans generally Standing plans generally encompass a
encompass a narrow scope wider scope involving more than one
targeting a specific project or department or business function.
event.
4. Stability Single use plans are discarded Standing plans are relatively stable
when the situation, project or and used over and over again with
event is over. necessary modifications or updations.
5. Example Budget for Annual General Recruitment and selection procedure
Meeting of shareholders. for a particular post in the company.
1 Mark Questions
1. Define planning.
2. Explain Procedures.
3. Define Rules.
4. Write the meaning of Budgets.
5. Write one difference between Policies & Procedure.
6.` One of the function of management is considered as base for all
other functions. Name that function;
7. Name the types of plan in which the movement of competitors
is considered.
8. “No Smoking in the Work shop”. This statement is related to
which type of plan.
page 31
Business Studies- XII
9. “We do not sell on credit”. This statement is related to which
type of plan.
10. Write the meaning of strategies.
11. What do you understand single use plan?
12. What do you understand by standing plans?
3 and 4 Marks Questions
1. ‘Planning is the heart of management’. How?
2. 'Control is blind without planning’. How?
3. How planning provides base to controlling?
4. Write the difference between rules and policies.
5. Write the difference between Policies & Procedures.
6. XYZ Limited follows a standard procedure for recruiting Production
Manager for its company. Which type of plan is it? Justify your answer.
(1+2= 3 Marks)
7. ABC Limited prepares budget for its Annual General Meeting for
Financial Year 2013-14. What kind of plan is it? Justify your
answer. (1+2= 3 Marks)
5 -6 Marks Questions :-
l. Explain any four types of plans.
2. “lnspite of best efforts of managers sometimes Planning fails to achieve
desired result due to its limitation”. Explain.
3. “Planning keeps the organisation on the right path.” In this reference
explain the importance of planning.
4. Differentiate between Single use plans and Standing plans.
5. Explain the process of planning.
page 32
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 5
ORGANISING
Meaning of Organising :-
After laying down the plans and objectives the next function to be
performed by the managers is organising. It determines what activities and
resources are required and decides who will do a particular task, where it
will be done and when it will be done.
Thus organising means establishing relationship between various
factors of production and it is concerned with establishing relationship
amongst jobs, sections, departments & positions.
'Organising is the process of identifying and grouping the work to be
performed, defining and delegating responsibility and authority and
establishing relationships for the purpose of enabling people to work most
effectively together in accomplishing objectives.'
Steps Involved in the Process of Organising :-
1. ldentification and Division of Work :- lt involves identification and
division of total work to be done into specific activities (called jobs) in
accordance with previously determined plans. By dividing the work, the
burden of work can be shared among the employees. It facilitates
specialisation of work & skills. Duplication of work can be avoided by
dividing the work into manageable activities.
2. Departmentalisation :- The second step in organising is to combine or
group similar or related jobs into larger units called departments, divisions
or sections. They can be grouped on the basis of functions , products,
customers and territories etc.
Departmentalisation is done to achieve coordination & to facilitate unity
of efforts.
3. Assignment of duties :- Once departments have been formed each of
them is placed under the charge of an individual called departmental head
(eg., production manager, finance manager etc.) Jobs are then allocated to
the members of each department according to their skills and
qualifications.
page 33
Business Studies- XII
4. Establishing Reporting Relationships :- Merely allocating work is not
enough. Each individual should also know from whom he has to take
orders and to whom he is accountable. It helps in coordination amongst
various departments.
Importance of Organising :-
1. Benefits of specialisation : - In organising every individual is assigned a
part of total work and not the whole task. This division of work into smaller
units and repetitive performance leads to specialisation. Thus organising
promotes specialisation which in turn leads to efficient & speedy
performance of tasks.
2. Clarity in working relationships :- It helps in creating well defined jobs
and also clarifying the limits of authority and responsibility of each job.
The superior-subordinate relationship is clearly defined in organising.
3. Effective Administration : It provides a clear description of jobs and
related duties which helps to avoid confusion and duplication. Clarity in
working relationships enables proper execution of work which results in
effective administration.
4. Optimum utilisation of resources : The proper assignment of jobs
avoids overlapping/duplication of work. This helps in preventing
confusion and minimising the wastage of resources and efforts.
5. Adoption to Change: A properly designed organizational structure is
flexible which facilitates adjustment to changes in workload caused by
change in external environment related to technology, products, resources
and markets.
6. Development of Personnel: Sound organization encourages initiative
and relative thinking on part of the employees. When managers delegate
their authority, it reduces their workload so they can focus on more
important issues related to growth & innovation. This also develops the
subordinates' ability and helps him to realize his full potential.
7. Expansion and growth: It helps in growth & diversification of and
enterprise by adding more job positions, departments, products lines, new
geographical territories etc.
Meaning of Organisational Structure :-
lt seeks to establish relations among all the persons working in the
page 34
Business Studies- XII
organisation. Under the organisational structure various posts are created
to perform different activities for the attainment of the objectives of the
enterprise. Relations among persons working on different posts are
determined. The structure provides a basis or framework for managers and
other employees for performing their functions.
The organisation structure can be defined as the frame work within which
managerial and operating tasks are performed.
Relation between Span of Management and Organisation structure: -
Span of mangement refers to the number of subordinates that can be
effectively managed by a superior. The Span of management to a large
extent gives shape to the organisation structure. This determines the levels
of management in the structure. Narrow span of management results in tall
structure whereas wider span of management results in flat structure.
Types of Organisation Structures
Functional Structure Divisional Structure
I. Functional Structure :- In functional structure activities are
grouped and departments are created on the basis of specific
functions to be performed. For example all the jobs related to
production are grouped under production department, Sales to
sales department etc.
Managing Director
Personnel Marketing Research & Purchasing
Development
Suitability :-
(1) Large organisations producing one line of product.
(2) Organisations which require high degree of functional specialisation with
diversified activities.
Advantages :-
1. Specialisation - Better division of labour takes place which
results in specialisation of functions and its consequent benefits.
page 35
Business Studies- XII
2. Coordination is established :- All the persons working within a
department are specialists of their respective jobs. It makes the
coordination easier at department level.
3. Helps in increasing managerial efficiency : Managers of one
department are performing same type of function again and again which
makes them specialised and improves their efficiency.
4. Minimises cost - It leads to minimum duplication of effort
which results in economies of scale and thus lowers cost.
Disadvantages:-
1. Ignorance of organisational objectives - Each departmental head works
according to his own wishes. They always give more weight to their
departmental objectives. Hence overall organisational objectives suffer.
2. Difficulty in Inter-departmental Coordination - All departrmental
heads work as per their own wishes which leads to coordination within the
department easier but it makes inter-departmental coordination difficult.
3. Hurdle in complete development - because each employee specialises
only in a small part of the whole job.
II. DIVISIONAL ORGANISATION STRUCTURE :
Dividing the whole enterprise according to the major products to be up
manufactured (like metal, plastic, cosmetics etc) is known as divisional
organisation structure.
Managing Director
Cosmetics Garments Footwear Skincare
Personnel Marketing Research & Purchases Production Marketing Finance
Development Dept. Dept. Dept.
This structure is suitable in organisations producing multi product or different
lines of product requiring product specialisation. Also growing companies which
intend to add more lines of products in future adopt this structure.Advantages:-
1. Quick decision making - Divisional manager can take any decision
regarding his division independently which makes decisions quick and effective.
2. Divisional results can be assessed - Divisional results (profit / loss) can
be assessed easily. On this basis any unprofitable division can be closed.
page 36
Business Studies- XII
3. Growth and Expansion - It facilitates growth and expansion as new
divisions can be added without disturbing existing departments.
Disadvantages :-
1. Conflicts among different divisions on allocation of resources.
2. Duplicity of Functions : - Entire set of functions is required for all
divisions. It gives rise to duplicity of efforts among divisions & increases
cost.
3. Selfish Attitude :- Every division tries to display better performance and
sometimes even at the cost of other divisions. This shows their selfish
attitude.
FORMAL ORGANISATION
This structure is designed by the management to achieve organisational goals
in which the responsibilities, authority and mutual relationships among all the
employees working in an enterprise are clearly defined. It can be functional or
divisional.
Features :-
1. It is deliberately created by the top management.
2. It is based on rules and procedures which are in written form.
3. lt is impersonal i.e does not takes into consideration emotional aspect.
4. It clearly defines the authority and responsibility of every individual.
5. It is created to achieve organisational objectives.
Advantages :-
1. Easier to fix responsibility since mutual relationships are clearly defined.
2. No overlapping of work - because things move according to a definite
plan.
3. Unity of command through an established chain of command.
4. Easy to achieve objectives - because of coordination and optimum use of
human and material resources.
page 37
Business Studies- XII
5. Stability in the organisation - because behaviour of employees can be
fairly predicted since there are specific rules to guide them.
Disadvantages :-
1. The Work is based on rules which causes unnecessary delays.
2. Lack of initiative - The employees have to do what they are told to do and
they have no opportunity of thinking.
3. Limited in scope - It is difficult to understand all human relationships in
an enterprise as it places more emphasis on structure and work.
Informal Organisation :
An informal organisation is that organisation which is not established deliberately
but comes into existence because of common interests, taste and religious and
communal relations. The main purpose of this organisation . structure is getting
psychological satisfaction. For example, employees with similar interest in
sports, films, religion etc may form their own informal groups.
Features :
1. It originates from within the formal organisation as a result of
personal interaction among employees.
2. It has no written rules and procedures.
3. It does not have fixed lines of communication.
4. It is not deliberately created by the management.
5. It is personal - means the feelings of individuals are kept in mind.
Advantages:-
1. Speed : Prescribed lines of communication are not followed which leads
to faster spread of information.
2. Fulfillment of social needs - enhances job satisfaction which gives them a
sense of belongingness in the organisation.
3. Quick solution of the problems - because the subordinates can speak
without hesitation before the officers, it helps the officers to understand the
problems of their subordinates.
page 38
Business Studies- XII
Disadvantages :-
1. It creates rumours :- All the persons in an informal organisation talk
carelessly and sometimes a wrong thing is conveyed to the other persons.
2. It resists change and lays stress on adopting the old techniques.
3. Priority to group interests - Pressurises members to confirm to group
expectations.
Difference between Formal Informal organisation
Basis Formal organisation Informal organisation
1. Meaning If refers to the structure of It refers to the network of
well defined authority and social relationships which
and responsibility. develops automatically.
2. Nature Rigid & Stable Flexible and unstable
3. Authority Arises by virtue of positions Ari ses out of personal
in management. qualities.
4. Adherence Violation of rules may lead No s uch puni s hment s .
to rules to penalties and punishments.
5. Flow of Takes place through the Not t hrough a pl anned
communi- scalar chain. route. It can take place in
cation any direction.
6. Purpose To achieve planned organisational To satisfy social and cultural
objectives. needs and fulfil common
interests.
7. Formation/ Deliberately planned and created by Emerges spontaneously as a
origin management. result of social interaction
among employees.
8. Structure Well-defined structure of tasks & No cl ear - cut s t r uct ur e
relationships. because of complex network
of relationships.
9. Flow of Authority flows from top to bottom Authority flows vertically as
authority i.e downwards. well as horizontally.
10. Interdepen- Independent. Depends on
dence formal structure.
page 39
Business Studies- XII
Delegation of Authority
Meaning - It means the granting of authority to subordinates to operate within the
prescribed limits. The manager who delegates authority holds his subordinates
responsible for proper performance of the assigned tasks. To make sure that his
subordinates perform all the work effectively and efficiently in expected manner
the manager creates accountability.
Process / Elements of Delegation :-
1. Authority - The power of taking decisions in order to guide the
activities of others. Authority is that power which influences the
conduct of others.
2. Responsibility : It is the obligation of a subordinate to properly
perform the assigned duty. When a superior issues orders it
becomes the responsibility of the subordinate to carry it out.
3. Accountability - When a superior assigns some work to a
subordinate, he is answerable to his superior for its success or
failure.
Principle of Absoluteness of Accountability - Authority can be delegated but
responsibility / accountability cannot be delegated by a manager. The authority
granted to a subordinate can be taken back and re-delegated to another person. The
manager cannot escape from the responsibility for any default or mistake on the
part of his subordinates. For example, If the chief executive asks marketing
manager to achieve a sales target of sale of 100 units/ day. The marketing manager
delegates this task to deputy sales manager, who fails to achieve the target. Then
marketing manager will be answerable for the work performance of his
subordinates. Thus, accountability is always of the person who delegates
authority.
page 40
Business Studies- XII
Assigning Responsibility Granting Authority Fixing Accountability
Process of Delegation of Authority
Difference between Authority, Resposibility and Accountability
Basis Authority Responsibility Accountability
l. Meaning Right to command Obligation to Answerability for
perform an outcome of the
assigned task assigned task.
2. Origin Arises from formal Arises from Arises from
position delegated authority responsibility
3. Flow Downward - from Upward - from Upward - from
Superior to Subordinate to Subordinate to
Subordinate Superior Superior
4. Withdrawl Can be withdrawn Cannot be Cannot be
anytime by giving withdrawn once withdrawn once
notice. created. created.
Importance of Delegation of Authority
1. Reduction of Executives work load - It reduces the work load of officers.
They can thus utilise their time in more important and creative works
instead of works of daily routine.
2. Employee development - Employees get more opportunities to utilise
their talent which allows them to develop those skills which will enable
them to perform complex tasks.
3. Quick and better decision are possible - The subordinate are granted
sufficient authority so they need not to go to their superiors for taking
decisions concerning the routine matters.
4. High Morale of subordinates - Because of delegation of authority to the
subordinates they get an opportunity to display their efficiency and
capacity.
5. Better coordination - The elements of delegation - authority,
responsibility and accountability help to define the powers, duties and
answerability related to various job positions which results in developing
page 41
Business Studies- XII
and maintaining effective co-ordination.
Decentralisation :-
It is defined as even and systematic distribution of authority at every level of
management. Under this, the authority is transferred to the level where it is to be
exercised, so the numbers of centres for taking decisions increases. It should be
noted that 'Decentralisation' is an extension of delegation.
Centralisation and Decentralisation - represents the pattern of authority among
managers at different levels. Centralisation of authority means concentration of
power of decision making in a few hands. In such an organisation very little
authority is delegated to managers at middle and lower levels. No organisation can
be completely centralised or decentralised. They exist together and there is a need
for a balance between the two. As the organisation grows in size, there is tendency
to move towards decentralisation. Thus, every organisation is characterised by
both.
Importance of Decentralisation :-
1. Develops initiative amongst subordinates - It helps to promote
confidence because the subordinates are given freedom to take their
own decisions.
2. Quick and better decisions - The burden of managerial decisions
does not lie in the hands of few individuals but gets divided among various
persons which helps them to take better and quick decisions.
3. Relieves the top executives from excess workload - The daily
managerial works are assigned to the subordinates which leaves
enough time with the superiors which they can utilise in developing
new strategies.
4. Managerial Development - It means giving authority to the
subordinates upto the lower level to take decisions regarding their
work. In this way the opportunity to take decisions helps in the
development of the organisation.
5. Better Control - It makes it possible to evaluate performance at each level
which results in complete control over all the activities.
page 42
Business Studies- XII
Difference between - Delegation & Decentralisation
Basis Delegation Decenralisation
1. Nature It is a compulsory act. It is an optional policy.
2. Freedom Less freedom to take More freedom of action due
of action decisions due to more to less control by the top
control by the superiors. management.
3. Status It is a process of sharing It is the result of policy
tasks and authority. decisions taken by top
management.
4. Scope Narrow - as it is confined Wide - lt includes extension
to a superior and his of delegation to the levels
immediate subordinate. of management.
5. Purpose To reduce the burden of To increase the role and the
manager. autonomy of lower level of
management.
QUESTIONS
1 marks questions
1. How effective administration is possible through organising ?
2. Name the function of management which coordinates the physical,
financial and human resources and establishes productive relations
among them for achievement of specific goals.
3. Name the organisation which is directed by group norms.
4. What is meant by organisational structure ?
5. Difficulty in inter-departmental coordination is one of the limitations of
which organisational structure.
6. What is meant by Authority ?
7. What is the basis of delegation of authority ?
8. How effective management is possible through delegation of authority ?
page 43
Business Studies- XII
3 marks questions
1. What is functional organisational structure ? Write two advantages of
this structure.
2. How is accountability related to authority ? Explain.
3. Why is it necessary to delegate authority ? Give three reasons.
4. State three steps in the process of organising.
4/5 marks questions
1. Explain briefly any four features of formal organisation.
2. The employees of Sachin Ltd. a software company, have formed
a Dramatic group for their recreation. Name the type of organisation
and state its three features.
3. Distinguish between Formal and Informal organisation (any four
points)
4. A manager is of the view that he is not responsible for the quality
of work that he has delegated to his subordinates. Do you agree ?
5. 'Delegation of authority provides the means whereby a manager
multiples himself.' Comment.
6 marks questions
l. Explain the importance of organising as a function of management.
2. 'Formal organisation is considered better than informal organisation'. Do
you agree with this statement ? Give reasons.
3. What is meant by Divisional structure of an organisation ? Explain
any two advantages and two limitations of it.
4. 'Decentralisation is an optional policy'. Explain why an organisation
would choose to be decentralised.
5. Explain the meaning and process of delegation of authority.
page 44
Business Studies- XII
UNIT-6
STAFFING
Meaning
Staffing means putting people to jobs. It begins with human resource planning and
includes different other functions like recruitment, selection, training,
development, promotion and performance appraisal of work force.
Need and Importance of Staffing :-
1. Obtaining Competent Personnel : Proper staffing helps in
discovering and obtaining competent personnel for various jobs.
2. High Performance : Proper staffing ensures higher performance by
putting right person on the right job.
3. Continuous growth : Proper staffing ensures continuous survival
and growth of the enterprise.
4. Optimum utilization of human resources : It prevents under-
utilization of personnel and high labour cost.
5. Improves job satisfaction : It improves job satisfaction and morale
of employee.
Human Resource Management: (HRM)
The function of Human Resource Management is to provide skilled human
elements to the enterprises. Therefore big enterprises create a separate department
called HRD. This department works under H.R. Managers.
Definition : Human Resource management is the recruitment, selection,
development, utilization, compensation and motivation of human resources of
the organization.
Staffing as a part of Human Resource Management : The scope of Human
Resource Management is wider than staffing. It involves staffing, reeping
personnel records, providing expert service and other works.
It facilitates procurement and placement of right people on the right jobs. The
nature of staffing as a part of HRM is discussed in following points :-
page 45
Business Studies- XII
1. Staffing is people centred and is relevant in all types of organization and
with all categories of personnel from top to bottom.
2. It is duty of every manager to perform the staffing activities. In many
enterprises, Personnel Department is established to provide assistance to
managers in performing their staffing function.
3. Staffing function is concerned with training, development and performance
appraisal of human resources.
PROCESS OF STAFFING :
1. Estimating Manpower Requirement : It involves the following:-
(a) Making inventory of current human resources in terms of
qualification, training & skills.
(b) Assessing future human resource needs of all departments.
(c) Developing a programme to provide the human resources.
Job Analysis is an intensive way of finding details related to all jobs.
2. Recruitment : It refers to identification of the sources of manpower
availability and making efforts to secure applicants for the various job
positions in an organization.
Estimating manpower requirements
Recruitment
Selecting from among the applications
Placement and Orientation
Training and Development
Performance Appraisal
page 46
Business Studies- XII
3. Selection : It is the process of choosing and appointing the right candidates
for various jobs in an organization through various exams, tests &
interviews.
4. Placement and Orientation : When a new employee reports for duty, he is
to be placed on the job for which he is best suited. Placement is very
important process as it can ensure. “ Right person for right job”.
Orientation / Induction is concerned with the process of introducing a new
employee to the organization. The new employees are familiarized with
their units, supervisors and fellow employees. They are also to be informed
about working hours, procedure for availing leave, medical facilities.
history and geography of organization and rules / regulations relating to
their wages etc.
5. Training and Development - Systematic training helps in increasing the
skills and knowledge of employees in doing their jobs through various
methods.
Development involves growth of an employee in all respects. It is the
process by which the employees acquire skills and competance to do their
present jobs and increase their capabilities for higher jobs in future.
6. Performance Appraisal - It is concerned with rating or evaluating the
performance of employees. Transfers and promotions of the staff are based
on performance appraisal.
RECRUITMENT :
(A) Recruitment : Recruitment may be defined as the process of
searching for prospective employees and stimulating them to apply
for jobs in the organisation.
Sources of Recruitment :-
(A) Internal Sources (B) External Sources
Internal Sources of Recruitment :- Internal sources refer to inviting
candidates from within the organisation. Following are important sources
of internal recruitment:-
1. Transfers :- It involves the shifting of an employee from one job to
another, from one department to another or from one shift to another shift.
page 47
Business Studies- XII
2. Promotions :- It refers to shifting an employee to a higher position
carrying higher responsibilities, prestige, facilities and pay.
3. Lay off :- To recall the temporary worker for work is called Lay-off, who
were temporarily separated from organisation due to lack of work.
Advantages of Internal Sources Recruitment :-
(1) Employees are motivated to improve their performance.
(2) Internal recruitment also simplifies the process of selection &
placement.
(3) No wastage of time on the employee training and development.
(4) Filling of jobs internally is cheaper.
Limitation of Internal Sources :-
(1) The scope for induction of fresh talent is reduced.
(2) The employee may become lethargic.
(3) The spirit of competition among the employees may be hampered.
(4) Frequent transfers of employees may often reduce the productivity of
the organisation.
External Sources of Recruitment :-
When the candidates from out side the organisation are invited to fill the
vacant job position then it is known as external recruitment.
The common methods of external sources of recruitments are:
1. Direct Recruitment :- Under the direct recruitment, a notice is placed on
the notice board of the enterprise specifying the details of the jobs
available.
2. Casual callers : Many reputed business organisations keep a data base of
unsolicited applicants in their office. This list can be used for Recruitment.
3. Advertisement : - Advertisement in media is generally used when a wider
choice is required. Example- Newspapers, Internet, Radio, Television etc.
page 48
Business Studies- XII
4. Employment Exchange :
Employment exchange is regarded as a good
source of recruitment for un
skilled and skilled operative jobs.
5. Campus recruitment and labour contractors can be used for the purpose.
Merits of External Sources :-
1. Qualified Personnel : By using external source of recruitment the
management can attract qualified and trained people to apply for the
vacant jobs in the organisation.
2. Wider Choice : The management has a wider choice in selecting the
people for employment.
3. Fresh Talent : It provides wider choice and brings new blood in the
organisation.
4. Competitive Spirit : If a company taps external sources, the staff will
have to compete with the outsiders.
Limitations of External Sources of Recruitment :-
1. Dissatisfaction among existing employees :- Recruitment from outside
may cause dissatisfaction among the employees. They may feel that their
chances of promotion are reduced.
2. Costly process : A lot of money has to be spent on advertisement therefore
this is costly process.
3. Lengthy Process : It takes more time than internal sources of recruitment
Selection :
Selection is the process of choosing from among the candidates from
within the organisation or from outside, the most suitable person for the
current position or for the future position.
PROCESS OF SELECTION
Preliminary
Screening
Selection
Test
Employment
Interview
Reference
Check
Selection
Decision
Medical
Exam
Job
Offer
Contract
of
Employment
page 49
Business Studies- XII
The successive stages in selection process are :-
1. Preliminary Screening : After applications have been received, they are
properly checked as regarding qualification etc. by screening committee.
A list of candidates to be called for employment test is made and unsuitable
candidates are rejected altogether.
2. Selection Tests: These tests include :
(a) Psychological tests which are based on assumption that human
behaviour at work can be predicted by giving various tests like
aptitude, personality test etc.
(b) Employment test for judging the applicant's suitability for the job.
3. Employment Interviews: The main purpose of interview is
(a) to find out suitability of the candidates.
(b) to seek more information about the candidate.
(c) to give the candidate an accurate picture of job with details of terms
and conditions.
4. Reference Checks - Prior to final selection, the prospective employer
makes an investigation of the references supplied by the applicant. He
undertakes a thorough search into candidates' family background, past
employment, education, police records etc.
5. Selection Decisions : A list of candidate who clear the employment tests,
interviews and reference checks is prepared and then the selected
candidates are listed in order of merit.
6. Medical / Physical Examination : A qualified medical expert appointed
by organization should certify whether the candidate is physically fit to the
requirements of a specific job. A proper physical exam will ensure higher
standard of health & physical fitness of employees thereby reducing
absenteeism.
7. Job Offer : After a candidate has cleared all hurdles in the selection
procedure, he is formally appointed by issuing him an Appointment
Letter. The broad terms and conditions, pay scale are integral part of
Appointment Letter.
8. Contract of Employment : After getting the job offer, the candidate has to
page 50
Business Studies- XII
give his acceptance. After acceptance, both employer and employee will
sign a contract of employment which contains terms & conditions , pay
scale, leave rules, hours of work, mode of termination of employment etc.
Training : Training is the act of increasing the knowledge and technical
skills of an employee for doing a particular job efficiently for existing
employees and new employees to get acquainted with their jobs and
increasing job related skills.
Benefits to the Organisation :-
1. It enhances employee's productivity and quality.
2. Training increases employee's morale.
3. Employees get new technical knowledge.
4. Efficient use of machines.
Benefits to the Employee :-
1. Improved skills and knowledge of employee.
2. Increased performance by the individual help him to earn more.
3. Less accidents.
4. Training increases the satisfaction and morale of the employee.
Training Methods
(A) On the Job Method :- It refers to the methods that are applied at the work
place, while the employee is actually working. It means learning while
doing .
The following are the methods of On-the job training :-
1. Apprenticeship Training : Under this, the trainee is placed under
supervision of an experienced person (master worker) who imparts him
necessary skills and regulates his performance. The trainee is given
stipend while learning so he/she can enjoy “earn while you learn” scheme.
2. Internship Training : Under this method an educational institute enters
into agreement with industrial enterprises for providing practical
knowledge to its students by sending them to business organizations for
page 51
Business Studies- XII
gaining practical experience.
3. Coaching : Under this, the supervisor imparts job knowledge and skill to
his subordinates with an emphasis on “learning by doing”.
4. Job Rotation : The trainee or employee is systematically transferred from
one job to another so that he may get the experience of different jobs. This
will broaden his horizon and capacity to do a variety of jobs.
(5) Induction training is a type of training given to help a new employee in
settling down quickly into the job by becoming familiar with the people,
the surroundings, the job and the business. The duration of such type of
training may be from a few hours to a few days. The induction provides a
good opportunity to socialize and brief the newcomer with the company's
overall strategy, performance standards etc. If carefully done, it saves time
and cost (in terms of effectiveness or efficiency etc.)
(B) Off the job Method : These methods are used away from the work place.
It means 'learning before doing.'
1. Class room lectures : The lecture approach is well adapted to convey
specific information. The use of audio-visuals can often make a formal
classroom.
2. Films : They can provide information to the employee by showing them
films based on their work.
3. Case study : Trainee studies the cases to determine problems & analyses
causes. It is a means of simulating experience in the classroom. Under this,
the trainees are given a problem or a case which is more or less related to
principles already taught. They analyze the problem and suggest solutions
with the help of an instructor.
4. Computer Modelling : Under this, a computer is programmed to show
some real problems of jobs and steps to overcome such problems.
5. Conferences and Seminars : It is a group meeting conducted according
to an organised plan in which the members seek to develop knowledge and
understanding of a topic by oral participation. It is an effective training
device in which a person can learn from others by sharing his opinions
with them.
page 52
Business Studies- XII
Training and Development
Training is concerned with imparting technical knowledge in doing a
particular job. But development is a wider process concerned with growth
of an individual in all respects. However both are related processes;
training helps the employees in learning job skills whereas development
shapes attitude of the employees.
Comparison of Training and Development
Basis Training Development
1. Definition It means imparting skills and It means growth of an
knowledge for doing a particular employee in all respects.
Job.
2. Purpose It is concerned with maintaining It seeks to develop
and improving current job perfo- competence and skills for
-rmance. future performance.
3. Methods It is imparted through on the job It is imparted through off
method. the job method.
4. Initiative The boss takes the initiative for The individual takes
imparting training to his the initiative for self
subordinates. growth and development.
5.Duration Training programmes are Development takes place
organised for short term. over a larger period of time.
1 Mark Questions:-
1. Explain the meaning of Staffing.
2. Define Placement.
3. Why is selection considered to be a negative process?
4. Give one advantage of Job Rotation training.
5. State one objective of Preliminary screening.
page 53
Business Studies- XII
6. What is an interview?
7. What do you mean by on the job Training?
8. What do you mean by Recruitment?
9. Define Lay off.
10. Give the last step of staffing process.
11. Give the first step of selection process.
12. Define Induction training.
13. What is the main objective of Induction training.
3 - 4 Marks Questions:-
1. Explain any three types of selection Tests.
2. Explain the meaning of selection and training.
3. 'Internal sources of Recruitment are better than external sources of
Recruitment Do you agree ? Give reasons in support of your answer. Do
you agree?
4. How does Induction training help in reducing cost and saves time?
5. Write a short note on Induction training.
6. “Staffing is an important function of management”. Why ? Explain any four
reasons.
7. “Some learning opportunities are designed and delivered to improve skills
and abilities of employees whereas some others are designed to help in the
growth of individual in all respects” Identify and explain two concepts
referred above.
page 54
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 7
DIRECTING
Meaning
Directing as a function of management, refers to the process of instructing,
guiding, counselling, motivating and leading people in the organisation to achieve
its objectives. It does not mean only instructions but also includes supervising the
employees when they are performing the job, motivating them to perform more
efficiently and leading them towards the achievement of organisational goal.
Features :
1. Directing initiates action : The other functions of management prepare a
setting for action, but directing initiates action in the organisation.
2. Directing takes place at every level of Management :- Every manager
from top executive to supervisor performs the function of directing.
3. Directing is a continuous process of supervision, communication,
leadership and motivation. It takes place throughout the life of the
organisation.
4. Directing flows from top to bottom :- It is initiated at the top level and
flows to the bottom through organisational hierarchy.
Importance :
1. Initiates Action : It helps to initiate action by the people in the
organisation towards attainment of desired objectives. The employees
start working only when they get instructions and directions from their
superiors. It is the directing function which starts actual work to convert
plans into results.
2. Integrates Employee's Efforts :- All the activities of the organisation are
interrelated so it is necessary to coordinate all the activities. It integrates
the activities of subordinates by supervision, guidance and counselling.
3. Means of motivation : It motivates the subordinates to work efficiently
and to contribute their maximum efforts towards the achievement of
organisational goals.
4. Facilities change : Employees often resist changes due to fear of adverse
effects on their employment and promotion. Directing facilitates
page 55
Business Studies- XII
adjustment in the organisation to cope with changes in the environment.
5. Stability and balance in the organisation : Managers while performing
directing function instruct, guide, supervise and inspire their subordinates
in a manner that they are able to strike a balance between individual and
organisational interests.
1. Supervision - It means observing the subordinates at work to see that they
are working in accordance with plans and to help them in solving their
problems. The important thing in supervision is that it involves face to face
contact between superiors and subordinates. Supervisor's position is
immediately above the worker.
2. Motivation - It is systematic process of generating enthusiasm among
employees to dedicate their best of efforts to the enterprise.
3. Leadership - It is the quality of behaviour by which an individual guides
and directs the activities of his subordinates. He leads, guides and directs
the activities of his subordinates. He leads the group efforts towards
attainingthe objectives of the business.
4. Communication : It is the process of exchange of information between
two or more persons to reach common understanding.
I. Importance of Supervision / Role of a Supervisor / Functions
1. Link between workers and management because the supervisor
explains management policies to worker and brings workers problems to
the notice of the management.
2. Ensures issuing Instructions : To make sure that the instructions are
communicated to each and every employee.
3. Facilities Control : Control means match between actual and planned
output. It ensures checking on the methods in use and progress of work
according to planned schedule.
Elements of Direction
Elements of
Directing
Supervision
Leadership
Motivation
Communication
page 56
Business Studies- XII
4. Maintenance of discipline : The strict supervision and guidance of
supervisor encourages the employees and workers to be more disciplined
in the activities.
Under the guidance of superior the workers follow a fixed or strict time
table and execute the plans in right directions.
5. Feedback : The supervisors are directly dealing with the subordinates. As
a result, feedback in the form of suggestions, grievances keep coming to
the management. It improves quality management decisions and revision
of plans & policies.
6. Improved Motivation : A supervisor with good leadership qualities can
build up high morale among workers.
The relationship with the supervisor is a very good incentive to improve
the motivation level of the employees while guiding the employees, the
supervisors encourage the subordinates to perform to their best capacities.
7. Optimum utilisation of resources : All the activities are under the
observation of supervisor so less wastage and optimum utilisation of
resources is possible.
II. Motivation :-
Meaning :- It is the process of stimulating people to act to their best ability
to accomplish desired goals.
Motivation means inspiring the employees to work with greater
enthusiasm and more efficiency for the accomplishment of the objectives
of the enterprise. It involves arousing needs and desires in people as to
initiate and direct their behaviour in a purposive manner.
Features
1. Psychological Phenomenon : Motivation is an internal feeling which
means it can not be forced on employees. The internal feeling such as
need, desire, aspiration etc. influence human behaviour to behave in a
particular manner.
2. Goal Directed Behaviour : It induces people to behave in such a manner
so that they can achieve their goals. A motivated person works towards the
achievement of desired goals.
page 57
Business Studies- XII
3. Motivation can be either positive or Negative : Positive motivation
means inspiring people to work better and appreciating a work that is well
done. Eg. pay increase promotion recognition. Negative motivation
means forcing people to work by threatening or punishing them. e.g, issue
of memo, demotion, stopping increments etc.
4. Complex Process : It is a complex and difficult process. Individuals differ
in their needs and wants and moreover human needs change from time to
time.
5. Continuous Process : Human needs are unlimited and so they keep on
changing continuously, satisfaction of one need gives rise to another. As
soon as one need is satisfied another need arises. So managers have to
continuously perform the function of motivation.
Maslow's Need Hierarchy-Theory of Motivation:- Maslow's Theory
focuses on the needs as the basis for motivation. It classified human needs
into the following five categories.
It helps managers to realise that need level of employees should be
identified to provide motivation to them. It is based on the following
assumptions:
(i) People's behaviour is based on their needs
(ii) People's needs are in hierarchical order.
(iii) A satisfied need can no longer motivate a person.
(iv) A person moves to the next higher level of hierarchy only when the
lower need is satisfied.
Example from the point
view of Individual
Self fulfilments
Status
Friendship
Stability of Income
Hunger
Example from the point
of view of organisation
Achievement of goals
Jobtitle
Cordial relation with collegues
Pension Plan
Basic Salary
page 58
Business Studies- XII
Financial and Non-Financial Incentives - Incentive means all measures
which are used to motivate people to improve performance.
Financial Non-Financial
- Which can be calculated in terms - Which can not be calculated in
terms of money of money
- Profit sharing - Status
- Pay and Allowances - Career Advancement
- Bonus - Opportunity
- Retirement Benefits - Job enrichment
- Perquisites - Employee Recognition Programmer
- Productivity linked wages - Employees participation
- Co-partnership / stock option - Job security
- Employees empowerment
Self
Actualisation
Needs
Esteem or Status
needs self confidence,
prestige
Social Needs - Sense of
Belongingness, association,
friendship
Safety or Security Needs - Oldage,
sickness, job security, stability of Income
Basic or physiological needs - Food, clothing,
Shelter, air, water, other necessities of life.
Needs of the highest order
Generally found in persons
whose first four needs have
already been fulfilled
KINDS OF
INCENTIVES
page 59
Business Studies- XII
III. Leadership -
Leadership is the activity of influencing people to strive willingly for mutual
objectives. Managers at all levels are expected to be the leaders of their
subordinates.
Leadership indicates the ability of an individual to maintain good interpersonal
relations with followers and motivate them to contribute for achieving
organisational objectives. It is a process of interaction between the leader and his
followers. It helps in persuading employees to work cooperatively and
enthusiastically towards common goals.
Styles of Leadership
Leadership styles refer to a leader’s behaviour. Behavioural pattern which the
leader reflects in his role as a leader is often described as the style of leadership.
A Leadership style is the result of the leader’s philosophy, personality, experience
and value system. It also depends upon the type of followers and the atmosphere
revailing in the organization.
Different types of leadership style are:
l. Autocratic leadership
2. Participative leadership - Democratic
3. Free rein leadership - Laissez Faire
A leader may use all styles over a period of time but one style tends to predominate
as his normal way of using power.
1. Autocratic or Authoritarian Leader
An autocratic leader gives orders and insists that they are obeyed. He
determines the policies for the group without consulting them.
He does not give information about future plans but simply tells the group
what immediate steps they must take.
Under this style, all decision making power is centralized in the leader . He
does not give the subordinates any freedom to influence his decisions.
page 60
Business Studies- XII
lt is like "bossing people around.” This style should normally be used on
rare occasion
A is the leader - Boss -- Centered - Leadership
When should authoritarian leadership be applied?
- It is best applied to situations where there is little time for group decision
making.
- or where the leader is the most knowledgeable member of the group.
2. Democratic or Participative Leader
A democratic leader gives order only after consulting the group and works out
the policies with the acceptance of the group.
He never asks people to do things without working out the long term plans on
which they are working. He favours decision making by the group as shown in
the diagram. This improves the attitude of the employees towards their jobs and
the organization thereby increasing their morale.
Using this style is of mutual benefit - it allows them (subordinates) to become
part of the team and helps leaders (seniors) to make better decisions.
A is the leader - Group Centered - Leadership
A
B C D
C
A B D
E
page 61
Business Studies- XII
When should Participative / democratic leadership be applied ?
- It works best in situations where group members are skilled and eager to share
their knowledge.
- It is also important to have plenty of time to allow people to contribute, develop
a plan and then vote on the best course of action.
This style should NOT be used when:
In situations where roles are unclear or time is of the essence, democratic
leadership can lead to communication failures and incompleted projects.
3. Laissez Faire or Free Rein Leader
A free rein leader gives complete freedom to the subordinates. Such a leader
avoids use of power. He depends largely upon the group to establish its own
goals and work out its own problems. Group members work themselves as per
their own choice and competence. The leader exists as a contact man with the
outsiders to bring information and the resources which the group requires for
accomplishing the job.
NOTE: This is also known as laissez faire which means no interference in the
affairs of others. [French laissez means to let/ allow fair means to
do].
A is the leader
(Leadership is Subordinate - Centered - Leadership)
A
D
C
E
B
page 62
Business Studies- XII
?When should laissez faire/free rein leadership be applie
This is an effective style to use when:
? Followers are highly skilled, experienced and educated.
? Followers have pride in their work and the drive to do it successfully on their
own.
? Outside experts, such as staff specialists or consultants are being used.
? Followers are trustworthy and experienced.
?This style should NOT be used when:
? Followers feel insecure at the non - availability of a leader.
? The leader cannot or will not provide regular feedback to his followers.
Example: Mr. Ulhas, CEO of 'I Create India,' distributes the work for the month.
He delegates the work to his staff Ms. Ranju, Ms. Anjana, Ms. Geeta and Mr.
Dinesh as per his discretion. (Mr. Ulhas is behaving as an autocratic leader) Mr.
Ulhas has realized that due to absence of Ms. Geeta, the work will not get over as
scheduled. He discusses with his staff members to meet the dead line. Everybody
decides to do over time and plans to stay back accordingly. (Mr. Ulhas is behaving
as a democratic leader)
Mr. Ulhas wants to give a party to all staff members for timely completion of the
task.
Mr. Ulhas asks the other members of staff to fix the venue and the menu for the
occasion. (Mr. Ulhas is behaving as a free rein leader)
?IV Communication - It is transfer of information from the sender to the
receiver with the information being undertood by the receiver.
Communication plays key role in the success of a manager. Directing
abilities of manager mainly depend upon his communication skills. That is
why organization always emphasizes on improving communication skills
of managers as well as employees. Communication is important for the
directing function because all other elements of directing become possible
only when there is adequate communication.
page 63
Business Studies- XII
Elements of Communication Process -
l. Sender - Who conveys his thoughts or ideas.
2. Message - Ideas, feelings, suggestions, order etc.
3. Encoding - Converting the message into communication symbols such as
words / pictures etc.
4. Media- Path/ Channel through which encoded message is
transmitted to receiver e.g., face to face, phone call, internet etc.
5. Decoding - Converting encoded symbols of the sender.
6. Receiver - Who receives communication of the sender.
7. Feed back - All those actions of receiver indicating that he has received and
understood the message of the sender.
8. Noise - Some obstruction or hindrance to communication like poor
telephone connection, inattentive receiver.
Importance of Communication
l. Facilitates Coordination - between interrelated departments and
sections thus creating a unity of purpose and action.
2. Provides data necessary for decision makings - When information is
effectively and efficiently communicated to management.
3. Increases managerial efficiency- Every individual in the organisation is
assigned a job or task. The employee must know clearly who has to report
to whom, what part of total job they are expected to perform and what are
their decisions. The clarity comes only with smooth flow of communication
which keeps the organisation at work with efficiency.
4. Promotes cooperation and Industrial Peace- The two way
communication promotes cooperation and mutual understanding between
the management and workers and brings peace in the organisation.
5. Establishes effective leadership - Effective communication helps to
influence subordinates - while influencing, a leader should possess good
communication skills.
If there is two way information flow between the superior and subordinates
then there will be positive reaction of employees.
page 64
Business Studies- XII
Communication taking place within an organisation may be broadly
classified into two categories.
I. Formal Communication - refers to official communication which takes
place following the chain of command. Classification of formal
communication -
1. Vertical communication - Flows vertically i.e., upwards or
downwards through formal channels
i) Downward Communication - Higher to lower level like plans,
policies, rules etc.
ii) Upward Communi cati on - Subordi nat e t o superi or l i ke
suggestions, grievances, reports etc.
2. Horizontal / lateral Communication - between persons holding
positions at the same level of the organisation e.g., production
manager may contact marketing manager about product design,
quality etc.
Communication networks of a Formal Communication.
A
B
C D
E A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
Single Chain Wheel Circular
It flows from
every superior
to his subordinate
through single chain
It flows
through one
central person
(Superior)
It moves in
a circle each
person can
communicate
with his adjoining
two person
A
B
C D
E
A
B
C D
Free Flow Inverted V
In this network a
subordinate is allowed
to communicate with his
immediate superior as well
as his superior’s superior
In this network
each person can
communicate with
others freely
page 65
Business Studies- XII
II. Informal Communication : Communication that takes place without
following the formal lines of communication is said to be informal
communication. There is no fixed direction or path for the flow of
information.
Grapevine or Informal Communication Networks:-
1. Single Strand - Each person communicates with the other in a sequence.
2. Gossip - Each person communicates with all on non-selective basis. A
person shares the information with many other people in his social group.
3. Probability - The individual communicates randomly with other
individuals.
4. Cluster - The individual communicates with only those people whom he
trusts.
Difference between Formal & Informal Communication
Basis Formal Communication Informal Communication
1. Meaning Within the official chain of Between individuals and
command groups which are not
officially recognised.
2. Channel Through a definite path No definite path.
3. Speed Slow - because all infor- Very fast - Cuts across all
mation has to pass. the official channels.
through an established chain of command.
4. Nature More rigid and cannot be Flexible and varies from
modified. individual to individual.
5. Expression It is mostly expressed in lt mostly tends to be oral.
written form.
X
Y
X
X
X
1 2 3 4
Single Strand Gossip Probability Cluster
page 66
Business Studies- XII
Barriers to Effective Communication -
Semantic Barriers - Concerned with problems and obstructions in the
process of encoding or decoding of message into words or impressions
Semantic barriers are as follows:-
1. Badly expressed message. Sometimes intended meaning may not be
conveyed.
2. Words with different meanings confuses the receiver.
3. Faulty translations may transfer wrong messages.
4. Unclarified assumption subject to different interpretations may result in
confusion.
5. Technical Jargon - Technical words may not be understood by the workers.
Psychological / Emotional barriers
1. Premature evaluation - judgement before listening leads to
misunderstanding.
2. Lack of attention / poor listening may disappoint the employees.
3. Loss by transmission and poor retention – When oral communication passes
through various levels it destroys the structure of the message or leads to
transmission of inaccurate message.
4. Distrust – If the parties do not believe each other. They can not understand
each other's message in its original sense.
Organisational barriers : -
Factors related to organisation structure:-
1. If organizational policy does not support free flow of information it creates a
problem.
2. Rules and regulations:- rigid rules and regulations may lead to red tapism
and delay of action.
3. Status conscious managers may not allow subordinates to express their
page 67
Business Studies- XII
feelings freely.
4. Complexity in organization structure results in delay and distortion.
Personal Barriers - of superiors and subordinates.
1. Fear of challenge to authority may withhold or suppress a particular
communication.
2. Lack of confidence of superior on his subordinates.
3. Unwillingness to communicate. e. g. fear of punishment / demotion.
4. Lack of proper incentives stops the subordinates to offer useful suggestions.
Improving communication effectiveness.
1. Clarify the ideas before communication.
2. Communicate according to the needs of receiver.
3. Consult others before communicating.
4. Be aware of language, tone and content of message.
5. Ensure proper feedback. Feedback provides opportunity for suggestions
and criticism.
6. Follow up communication helps to remove hurdles, misunderstanding of
information given by managers to subordination.
7. Be a good listener
QUESTIONS
1 Mark questions
1. Which function of management is known as Management-in-action ?
2. How supervision is helpful in maintaining discipline ?
3. What is Economic Safety ?
4. What is meant by Job Enrichment as a type of non-monetary incentives ?
5. What is meant by Leadership ?
6. What is meant by NOISE in communication process ?
page 68
Business Studies- XII
7. What is meant by feedback in communication process ?
8. What is meant by Grapenive ?
9. Define autocratic style of leadership.
3 Marks Questions
11. Direction is the least important function of management. Do you agree with
this statement? Give any two reasons in support of your answer.
12. The post of supervisor should be abolished in the hierarchy of Managers .
Do you agree? Give any three reasons in support of your answer.
13. Explain how supervision facilitates control?
14. Motivation can be either positive or negative. How?
15. Motivation helps to reduce absenteeism in the organisation. Clarify.
4/5 Marks Questions
16. State any four characteristics of motivation.
17. Clarify Job Enrichment and job security as non-financial motivators.
18. Explain the importance of leadership as the directing function of
management.
19. Explain any four factors which are likely to disrupt effective
communication.
20. Why do leaders use different styles of leadership in different situations.
Explain with the help of examples.
6 Marks Questions
21. 'Supervision is an important element of directing function.' Explain any
four reasons in support of the above statement.
22. Explain differences financial and non-financial incentives used to motivate
employees of a company.
23. Explain the meaning and importance of communication process.
page 69
Business Studies- XII
24. Differentiate between autocratic, democratic and laissez fair style of
leadership.
25. Mr. A,B and C are discussing the 3 different leadership styles Mr. A
advocates that autocratic style of leadership is the best in an organisation
while Mr. B thinks that democratic style provides better results in the
performance of employees. Mr. C emphasizes on Iaissez faire style of
leadership. What according to you is the best style of leadership and why ?
page 70
Business Studies- XII
UNIT - 8
CONTROLLING
Meaning & Definition
Controlling means ensuring that activities in an organisation are performed as per
the plans. Controlling also ensures that an organisation's resources are being used
effectively and efficiently for the achievement of predetermined goals.
It can be defined as comparison of actual performance with the planned
performance.
The controlling functions finds out how far actual performance deviates from
standards, analyses the causes of such deviations and attempts to take corrective
actions based on the same.
Importance of Controlling :-
1. Controlling helps in achieving organisational goals :- The controlling
function measures progress towards the organisational goals and brings to
light/ indicates corrective action.
2. For Evaluating /Judging accuracy of standards :- A good control system
enables management to verify whether the standards set are accurate or not
by careful check on the changes taking place in the organisational
environment.
3. Making efficient use of resources :- By the process of control, a manager .
seeks to reduce wastage of resources.
4. Improves employees motivation :- A good control system ensures that
employees know well in advance what they are expected to do & also the
standard of performance. It thus motivates & helps them to give better
performance.
5. Facilitating Coordination in action :- In controlling each department and
employee is governed by predetermined standards which are well
coordinated with one another. Control provides unity of direction.
6. Ensuring order and discipline :- Controlling creates an atmosphere of
order and discipline in the organisation by keeping a close check on the
activities of its employees.
page 71
Business Studies- XII
Nature of Controlling
1. Controlling is a goal oriented function.
Controlling as a function of management ensures that the overall directions
of individuals and groups are consistent with short and long range plans of
the organization. So it is completely a goal oriented function.
2. Controlling is an all pervasive function.
Controlling is a function which is applicable to all types of organizations and at all
levels. For example the top managers are concerned with administrative control,
which is exercised through broad policies, plans and other directives. The middle
level managers are concerned with the executive control for the purpose of getting
the plans, policies, and programmes executed. At the lower level, supervisors
exercise operational control to ensure successful performing of actual operations.
3. Controlling is a continuous function
Control is not a one time activity. Rather, it is a dynamic process that involves
constant analysis of actual and planned performance. The resultant deviations, if
any, are corrected as per the need of the situation. For example if a firm X Ltd., a
ready made garment manufacturing unit sets a target of manufacturing 10,000
premium shirts in a month and is only able to manufacture 8,000 shirts than the
controlling mechanism will help in finding the deviation and causes associated
with it. This process will carry on every month for the organization in this case.
4. Controlling is both a backward looking as well as forward looking
function:- Effective control is not possible without analyzing our past
mistakes so from this point of view we can call it backward looking. But the
business environment is ever changing and controlling helps bring in
changes in the organization in a conducive manner. So we cannot ignore the
forward looking aspect of it as well.
top level
middle level
lower level management
concerned with administrative
management
concerned with the executve
control
supervisors exercise
operational control
manufacturing
units
trading units
NGO's and
others
financial units
controlling is applicable to all
forms of organisation
page 72
Business Studies- XII
5. Controlling is a dynamic process- Since controlling requires taking
reviewable methods, changes have to be made wherever possible.
6. Controlling is a positive process- George Terry says, the function of
controlling is positive -it is to make things happen, i.e. to achieve the goal
within stated constraints, or by means of the planned activities. Controlling
should never be viewed as being negative in character - as a hurdle in getting
objectives won. Controlling is a managerial necessity and a help, not an
impediment or a hindrance.
Limitations of Controlling
1. Little control on external factors : Generally no enterprise can control
external factors such as government policies, technological changes,
competitions etc.
2. Resistance from employees : Control is often resisted by employees. They
see it as a restriction on their freedom e.g. Employees may resist and go
against the use of cameras to observe them minutely.
3. Costly affair : Control is a costly affair as it involves a lot of expenditure
time and efforts.
4. Difficulty in setting quantitative standards : Control system looses some
of its effectiveness, when standards cannot be defined in quantitative terms.
In the absence of quantitative standards, comparison with standards
becomes difficult.
Relationship between Planning and Controlling :
Planning and controlling are interrelated and infact reinforce each other in
the sense that:-
1. Planning is pre-requisite for controlling. Plans provide the standard for
controlling. Thus, without planning, controlling is blind. If the standards are
not set in advance managers have nothing to control.
2. Planning is meaningless without controlling. It is fruitful when control is
exercised. It discovers deviations and initiates corrective measures.
3. Effectiveness of planning can be measured with the help of controlling.
4. Planning is looking ahead and controlling is looking back:- Planning is a
future oriented function as it involves looking in advance and making
policies for the maximum utilisation of resources in future that is why it is
page 73
Business Studies- XII
considered as forward looking function. In controlling we look back to the
performance which is already achieved by the employees and compare it
with plans. If there are deviations in actual and standard performance or
output then controlling function makes sure that in future actual
performance matches with the planned performance. Therefore, controlling
is also a forward looking function.
Thus planning & controlling cannot be separated. The two are
supplementary functions which support each other for successful execution
of both the functions.
Planning makes controlling effective where as controlling improves future
planning.
Controlling Process :
1. Setting performance Standards : Standards are the criteria against which
actual performance would be measured. Thus standards become basis for
comparison and the manager insists on following of standards.
2. Measurement of Actual performance : Performance should be measured
in an objective and reliable manner which includes personal observation,
sample checking. Performance should be measured in same terms in which
standards have been established, this will facilitate comparison.
3. Comparing Actual performance with standard : This step involves
comparison of actual performance with the standard. Such comparison will
reveal the deviation between actual and desired performance. If the
performance matches the standards it may be assumed that everything is
under control.
4. Analysing Deviations - The deviations from the standards are assessed and
analysed to identify the causes of deviations.
5. Taking Corrective Action :- The final step in the controlling process is
taking corrective action. No corrective action is required when the
deviations are within the acceptable limits. But where significant deviations
occur corrective action is taken.
1 Mark Questions :-
1. Explain the meaning of controlling.
2. Write the first step of controlling process.
page 74
Business Studies- XII
3. What are the two types of deviations.
4. Which feature of controlling does it refer to when it is said that 'Controlling
is exercised at all levels of management' ?
3-4 Marks Questions
5. Why is controlling called an all pervasive function ? Explain.
6. Why is controlling called a positive process ?
7. How is controlling both forward looking as well as backward looking ?
8. Explain the characteristics of controlling.
9. There are two managers Mr. X and Mr. Y. They both have different point of
views. Mr. X says that “controlling is backward looking” while Mr. Y
contradicts by saying that “controlling is forward looking”. Who do you
think is right ? Give reason.
9. ABC Ltd. is engaged in manufacturing readymade garments. The target
production is 500 shirts per day. The company has been successfully
attaining this target until last three months. The actual production has been
varying between 400-450 shirts. Which management function is needed to
rectify the situation ? Write any two features associated with it.
5-6 Marks Questions :
11. Explain the various steps involved in the process of control.
12. Explain the importance of controlling in an organisation.
13. 'Planning and controlling are mutually interrelated and inter-dependent
activities'. Explain.
14. Explain the limitations of controlling .
page 75
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 9
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Introduction :-
Money required for carrying out business activities is called business finance.
Finance is needed to establish a business, to run it, to modernize it, to expand or
diversify it.
Financial management is the activity concerned with the planning, raising,
controlling and administering of funds used in the business. It is concerned with
optimal procurement as well as usage of finance. It aims at ensuring availability of
enough funds whenever required as well as avoiding idle finance.
Objectives of Financial Management
1. Wealth Maximisation :- The main objective of Financial management is
to maximise shareholder's wealth, for which achievement of optimum
capital structure and proper utilization of funds is a must.
2. To procure sufficient funds for the organisation – Adequate and regular
supply of funds is to be maintained for smooth operations of the business.
3. To ensure effective utilisation of funds.
4. To ensure safety of funds- The chances of risk in investments should be
minimum possible.
5. To attain optimum capital structure- A sound and economical
combination of shares and debentures must be attempted so as to maintain
optimum capital structure.
Financial Decisions
Financial Decisions
Investment Decision
Financing Decision
Dividend Decision
Working Capital
Capital Budgeting
Financial Institutions
Debt
Equity
Distribution of Dividends
Retained Earnings
page 76
Business Studies- XII
Every company is required to take three main financial decisions which are
as follows:-
1. Investment Decision :-
It relates to how the firm's funds are invested in different assets. Investment
decision can be long-term or short-term. A long term investment decision is called
capital budgeting decision as they involve huge amounts of funds and are
irreversible except at a huge cost while short term investment decisions are called
working capital decisions, which affect day to day working of a business.
Factors affecting Investment Decisions / Capital Budgeting decisions
l. Cash flows of the project : The series of cash receipts and payments over
the life of an investment proposal should be considered and analysed for
selecting the best proposal.
2. Rate of Return : The expected returns from each proposal and risk involved
in them should be taken into account to select the best proposal.
3. Investment Criteria Involved : The various investment proposals are
evaluated on the basis of capital budgeting techniques. These involve
calculation regarding investment amount, interest rate, cash flows, rate of
return etc.
2. Financing Decision : It relates to the amount of finance to be raised from
various long term sources. The main sources of funds are owner’s funds i.e.
equity / share holder's funds and the borrowed funds i.e. Debts. Borrowed
funds have to be repaid at a fixed time and thus some amount of financial risk
(i.e. risk of default on payment) is there in debt financing. Moreover interest
on borrowed funds has to be paid regardless of whether or not a firm has
made a profit. On the other hand, shareholder's fund involve no commitment
regarding payment of returns or repayment of capital. A firm mixes both
debt and equity in making financing decisions.
Factors Affecting Financing Decision
1. Cost :- The cost of raising funds from different sources are different. The
cheapest source should be selected.
2. Risk :- The risk associated with different sources is different. More risk is
associated with borrowed funds as compared to owner's fund as interest is
paid on it and it is repaid also, after a fixed period of time or on expiry of its
tenure.
page 77
Business Studies- XII
3. Floation Cost :- The costs involved in issuing securities such as brokers
commission, underwriters' fees, expenses on prospectus etc are called
flotation costs. Higher the flotation cost, less attractive is the source of
finance.
4. Cash flow position of the business :- In case the cash flow position of a
company is good enough then it can easily use borrowed funds and pay
interest on time.
5. Control Considerations : In case the existing shareholders want to retain
the complete control of business then finance can be raised through
borrowed funds but when they are ready for dilution of control over
business, equity can be used for raising finance.
6. State of Capital Markets : - During boom, finance can easily be raised by
issuing shares but during depression period, raising finance by means of
debt is easy.
7. Period of Finance - For permanent capital requirement, Equity shares must
be issued as they are not to be paid back and for long and medium term
requirement, preference shares or debentures can be issued.
3. Dividend Decision :-
Dividend refers to that part of the profit which is distributed to shareholders.
A company is required to decide how much of the profit earned by it should
be distributed among shareholders and how much should be retained. The
decision regarding dividend should be taken keeping in view the overall
objective of maximising shareholder's wealth.
Factors affecting Dividend Decision :
1. Earnings : - Companies having high and stable earning could declare high
rate of dividends as dividends are paid out of current and past earnings.
2. Stability of Dividends : Companies generally follow the policy of stable
dividend. The dividend per share is not altered/ changed in case earnings
change by small proportion or increase in earnings is temporary in nature.
3. Growth Prospects : In case there are growth prospects for the company in
the near future them it will retain its earning and thus, no or less dividend
will be declared.
4. Cash Flow Positions : Dividends involve an outflow of cash and thus,
availability of adequate cash is foremost requirement for declaration of
page 78
Business Studies- XII
dividends.
5. Preference of Shareholders : While deciding about dividend the
preference of shareholders is also taken into account. In case shareholders
desire for dividend then company may go for declaring the same.
6. Taxation Policy : A company is required to pay tax on dividend declared by
it. If tax on dividend is higher, company will prefer to pay less by way of
dividends whereas if tax rates are lower then more dividends can be declared
by the company.
7. Issue of bonus shares - Companies with large reserves may also distribute
bonus shares to increase their capital base as it signifies growth of the
company and enhances its reputation also.
8. Legal constraints – Under provisions of Companies Act, all earnings can't
be distributed and the company has to provide for various reserves. This
limits the capacity of company to declare dividend.
FINANCIAL PLANNING
Financial Planning :-
The process of estimating the fund requirement of a business and specifying
the sources of funds is called financial planning. It ensures that enough
funds are available at right time so that a firm could honour its commitments
and carry out its plans.
Importance of Financial Planning
(1) To ensure availability of adequate funds at right time.
(2) To see that the firm does not raise funds unnecessarily.
(3) It provides policies and procedures for the sound administration of finance
function.
(4) It results in preparation of plans for future. Thus new projects can be under
taken smoothly.
(5) It attempts to achieve a balance between inflow and outflow of funds.
Adequate liquidity is ensured throughout the year.
(6) It serves as the basis of financial control. The management attempts to
ensure utilization of funds in tune with the financial plans.
page 79
Business Studies- XII
Capital Structure
Capital structure refers to the mix between owner's funds and borrowed
funds. It will be said to be optimal when the proportion of debt and equity is
such that it results in an increase in the value of the equity share. The
proportion of debt in the overall capital of a firm is called Financial
Leverage or Capital Gearing. When the proportion of debt in the total capital
is high then the firm will be called highly levered firm but when the
proportion of debts in the total capital is less, then the firm will be called low
levered firm.
Factors affecting Capital Structure:-
(1) Trading on Equity : It refers to the increase in profit earned by the equity
shareholders due to the presence of fixed financial charges like interest.
Trading on equity happens when the rate of earning of an organisation is
higher than the cost at which funds have been borrowed and as a result
equity shareholders get higher rate of dividend per share. The use of more
debt along with the equity increases EPS as the debt carries fixed amount of
interest which is tax deductible. Let us understand with an example :-
Thus the EPS of company Y is higher than company X because of
application of 'Trading on equity'.
2. Cash flow position :- In case a company has strong cash flow position then
it may raise finance by issuing debts, as they are to be paid back after some
time.
3. Interest Coverage Ratio :- It refers to the number of times earning before
interest and taxes of a company covers the interest obligation. High Interest
Company X
Company Y
Share capital ( of Rs. 10
each )
Debentures @ 10%
10,00,000
5,00,000
5,00,000
Total capital
10,00,000
10,00,000
Earning before int. and taxes(EBIT)
@ 25 % p.a
Less interest on deb.
Profit before tax
Less tax (40%)
Profit after tax ( available for
equity share holders)
No. of equity shares.
Earnings per share
2,50,000
2,50,000
(1,00,000)
1,50,000
1,00,000
`. 1.50
2,50,000
(50,000)
2,00,000
(80,000)
1,20,000
50,000
`. 2.40
page 80
Business Studies- XII
coverage ratio indicates that company can have more of borrowed funds.
Formula for calculating ICR = EBIT / interest.
4. Return on Investment :- If return on investment is higher than the rate of
interest on debt then it will be beneficial for a firm to raise finance through
borrowed funds.
5. Floatation Cost :- The cost involved in issuing securities such as brokers'
commission, under -writers' fees, cost of prospectus etc is called flotation
cost. While selecting the source of finance, flotation cost should be taken
into account.
6. Control :- When existing shareholders are ready to dilute their control over
the firm then new equity shares can be issued for raising finance but in
reverse situation debts should be used.
7. Tax Rate :- Interest on debt is allowed as a deduction, thus in case of high
tax rate, debts are preferred over equity but in case of low tax rate more
preference is given to equity.
8. Flexibility:- A good financial structure should be flexible enough to have
scope for expansion or contraction of capitalization whenever the need
arises. Issue of debenture and preference shares brings flexibility.
9. Capital market conditions :– Conditions prevailing in capital market
influences the determination of securities to be issued. Like during
depression, people do not like to take risk and so are not interested in equity
shares but during boom, investors are ready to take risk and invest in equity
shares.
Fixed Capital
Fixed capital refers to investment in long-term assets. Investment in fixed
assets is for longer duration and they must be financed through long-term
sources of capital. Decisions relating to fixed capital involve huge capital/
funds and are not reversible without incurring heavy losses.
Factors affecting requirement of Fixed capital
1. Nature of Business : Manufacturing concerns require huge investment in
fixed assets & thus huge fixed capital is required for them but trading
concerns need less fixed capital as they are not required to purchase plant
and machinery etc.
2. Scale of Operations : An organisation operating on large scale requires
page 81
Business Studies- XII
more fixed capital as compared to an organisation operating on small scale.
For Example - A large scale steel enterprise like TISCO requires large
investment as compared to a mini steel plant.
3. Choice of Technique :- An organisation using capital intensive
techniques requires more investment in plant & machinery as compared to
an organisation using labour intensive techniques.
4. Technology upgradation :- Organisations using assets which become
obsolete faster require more fixed capital as compared to other
organisations.
5. Growth Prospects :- Companies having more growth plans require more
fixed capital. In order to expand production capacity more plant &
machinery are required.
6. Diversification :- In case a company goes for diversification then it will
require more fixed capital to invest in fixed assets like plant and machinery.
7. Distribution Channels :- The firm which sells its product through
wholesalers and retailers requires less fixed capital.
8. Collaboration :- If companies are under collaboration, Joint venture, then
they need less fixed capital as they share plant & machinery with their
collaborators.
Working Capital
Working Capital refers to the capital required for day to day working of an
organisation. Apart from the investment in fixed assets every business
organisation needs to invest in current assets, which can be converted into cash or
cash equivalents within a period of one year. They provide liquidity to the
business. Working capital is of two types - Gross working capital and Net working
capital. Investment in all the current assets is called Gross Working Capital
whereas the excess of current assets over current liabilities is called Net Working
Capital. Following are the factors which affect working capital requirements of an
organisation:-
1. Nature of Business : A trading organisation needs a lower amount of
working capital as compared to a manufacturing organisation, as trading
organisation undertakes no processing work.
2. Scale of operations : - An organisation operating on large scale will require
page 82
Business Studies- XII
more inventory and thus, its working capital requirement will be more as
compared to small organisation.
3. Business Cycle: In the time of boom more production will be undertaken
and so more working capital will be required during that time as compared
to depression.
4. Seasonal Factors : During peak season demand of a product will be high
and thus high working capital will be required as compared to lean season.
5. Credit allowed : If credit is allowed by a concern to its customers than it
will require more working capital but if goods are sold on cash basis than
less working capital is required.
6. Credit availed : If a firm is able to purchase raw materials on credit from its
suppliers than less working capital will be required.
7. Inflation : Working capital requirement is also determined by price level
changes. For example, during inflation prices of raw material, wages also
rise resulting in increase in working capital requirements.
8. Turnover of working capital- Turnover means speed with which the
working capital is converted into cash by sale of goods. If it is speedier, the
amount of working capital required will be less.
1 Mark Questions
1. Name the concept which increases the return on equity shares with a
change in the capital structure.
2. A company wants to establish a new unit in which a machinery worth
` 10 lakhs is involved. Identify the type of decision involved in financial
management.
3. What is the primary aim of financial management ?
4. What is financial risk ?
5. Why service-industry requires less working capital ?
6. Identify the decision taken in financial management which affects the
liquidity as well as profitability of business.
7. 'A' Ltd. earns a net profit of Rs 50 crores. Atul, the finance manager of 'A'
page 83
Business Studies- XII
Ltd. has to decide how to appropriate their profits. Which financial decision
will help him in deciding it ?
3/4 Marks Questions
1. What are Capital Budgeting Decisions? Explain three factors affecting
capital budgeting decisions.
2. What is meant by financial planning ? Explain its objectives.
3. Explain the meaning and objectives of financial management.
4. Explain Financial Leverage and Trading on Equity.
5. Explain the various financial decisions taken by an organisation.
6. How does 'Trading on equity' affect the capital structure of a company ?
Explain with the help of a suitable example.
5/6 Marks Questions
1. Define capital structure. Explain five factors affecting it.
2. Explain six factors affecting fixed capital of a concern.
3. Give the meaning of Working capital. Explain any five factors determing
Working capital requirements.
4. What is meant by Dividend Decision ? Explain any five factors affecting it.
5. Suggest Working capital requirement for the following manufacturing
concerns:-
a) Bread
b) Sugar
c) Coolers
d) Motor Car
e) Locomotive
f) Furniture on Specific order.
6. Explain the three major decisions taken by a Finance Manager.
page 84
Business Studies- XII
UNIT - 10
FINANCIAL MARKETS
Introduction :
Financial Market is a market for creation and exchange of financial assets like
shares, bonds etc. It helps in mobilising savings and channelising them into the
most productive uses. It helps to link the savers and the investors by mobilizing
funds between them. The persons or institutions by which allocation of funds is
done are called Financial Intermediaries. They bring together borrowers and
lenders and make funds available to those willing to pay for their use.
Functions of Financial Market:-
1. Mobilisation of Savings and channeling them into the most productive
uses: Financial market facilitates the transfer of savings from savers to
investors and thus helps to channelise surplus funds into the most
productive use.
2. Helps in Price Determination : Financial Market helps in interaction of
savers and investors which in turn helps in the determination of prices of the
financial assets such as shares, debentures etc.
3. Provide Liquidity to Financial Assets : Financial market facilitates easy
purchase and sale of financial assets. Thus, it provides liquidity to them so
that they can be easily converted into cash whenever required.
4. Reduce cost of transactions : Financial market provides valuable
information about securities which helps in saving time, efforts and money
and thus it reduces cost of transactions.
Household
(Savers)
Banks and
Financial Markets
Business Firms
(Investors)
page 85
Business Studies- XII
Types of Financial Markets
Money Market :-
It is a market for short term funds / securities whose period of maturity is upto one
year. The major participants in the money market are RBI, Commercial Banks,
Non-Banking Finance Companies, State Government, Large Corporate Houses
and Mutual Funds. The main instruments of money market are as follows:-
1. Treasury Bills : They are issued by the RBI on behalf of the Central
Government to meet its short-term requirement of funds. They are issued at
a price which is lower than their face value and are repaid at par. They are
available for a minimum amount of ` 25000 and in multiples thereof. They
are also known as Zero Coupon Bonds. They are negotiable instruments i.e.
they are freely transferable.
2. Commercial Paper : It is a short term unsecured promissory note issued by
large credit worthy companies to raise short term funds at lower rates of
interest than market rates. They are negotiable instruments transferable by
endorsement and delivery with a fixed maturity period of 15 days to one
year.
3. Call Money : It is short term finance repayable on demand, with a maturity
period of one day to 15 days, used for interbank transactions. Call Money is
a method by which banks borrow from each other to be able to maintain the
Money Market
(forshort term requirement)
Capital Market
(for long term requirement)
Participants :
R.B.I., Com. Bank, Investor, LIC
& others
Financial Markets
Primary Market
(for new issue
of shares and
deb.)
Secondary
Market
(Issued
Securities are
Traded)
Market Instruments
1.
Treasury Bill
2.
Com. Paper
3.
Call Money
4.
Certificate of Deposits
5.
Commercial Bill
Participants :
Bank, Investor, Mut. Fund.
LIC and others
Controlled by SEBI
page 86
Business Studies- XII
cash reserve ratio as per RBI. The interest rate paid on call money loans is
known as the call rate.
4. Certificate of Deposit : It is an unsecured instrument issued in bearer form
by Commercial Banks & Financial Institutions. They can be issued to
individuals, Corporations and companies for raising money for a short
period ranging from 91 days to one year.
5. Commercial Bill : It is a bill of exchange used to finance the working
capital requirements of business firms. A seller of the goods draws the bill
on the buyer when goods are sold on credit. When the bill is accepted by the
buyer it becomes a marketable instrument and is called a trade bill. These
bills can be discounted with a bank if the seller needs funds before the bill
maturity.
Capital Market :
It is a market for long term funds where debt and equity are traded. It
consists of development banks, commercial banks and stock exchanges.
The capital market can be divided into two parts:-
1. Primary Market.
2. Secondary Market.
Primary Market :
lt deals with the new securities which are issued for the first time. It is also known
as the New Issue Market. The investors in this market are banks, financial
institutions, insurance companies, mutual funds and individuals. It has no fixed
geographical location and only buying of securities takes place in the primary
market.
Methods of floatation of New Issues in the Primary Market:-
1. Offer through Prospectus : It involves inviting subscription from the
public through issue of prospectus. A prospectus makes a direct appeal to
investors to raise capital through an advertisement in newspapers and
magazines.
2. Offer for sale : Under this method securities are offered for sale through
intermediaries like issuing houses or stock brokers. The company sells
securities to intermediary / broker at an agreed price and the broker resells
them to investors at a higher price.
page 87
Business Studies- XII
3. Private Placements : It refers to the process in which securities are allotted
to institutional investor and some selected individuals.
4. Rights Issue : It refers to the issue in which new shares are offered to the
existing shareholders in proportion to the number of shares they already
possess.
5. e-IPOs :- It is a method of issuing securities through an on-line system of
stock exchange. A company proposing to issue capital to the public through
the on-line system of the stock exchange has to enter into an agreement with
the stock exchange. This is called an e-initial public offer. SEBI's registered
brokers have to be appointed for the purpose of accepting applications and
placing orders with the company.
Secondary Market :
It is also known as the stock market or stock exchange where purchase and sale of
existing securities takes place. They are located at specified places and both the
buying as well as selling of securities takes place.
Difference between Primary and Secondary Market
Basis Primary Market Secondary Market
1. Securities Only new Securities Existing securities
are traded. are traded.
2. Price of Prices of securities Price are determined
Securities are determined by the by the forces of demand
management of the and supply of the
company securities.
3. Purchase & Securities are sold to Investors exchange
Sale. investors directly by the ownership of securities.
company or through
intermediary.
4. Place of There is no fixed Located at specified
Market geographical location. places.
5. Medium Only buying of securities Both buying & selling of
takes place. securities can take place.
page 88
Business Studies- XII
Stock Exchange / Share Market
A Stock Exchange is an institution which provides a platform for buying and
selling of existing securities. It facilitates the exchange of a security i.e. share,
debenture etc. into money and vice versa. Following are some of the important
functions of a Stock Exchange:-
1. Providing liquidity and Marketability to Existing Securities : Stock
Exchange provides a ready and continuous market for the sale and purchase
of securities.
2. Pricing of Securities : Stock Exchange helps in constant valuation of
securities which provide instant information to both buyers and sellers and
thus helps in pricing of securities which is based on the forces of demand &
supply.
3. Safety of transaction : The members of a stock exchange are well
regulated, who are required to work within the legal framework. This
ensures safety of transactions.
4. Contributes to Economic Growth : Stock exchange provides a platform
by which savings get channelised into the most productive investment
proposals, which leads to capital formation & economic growth.
5. Spreading of Equity culture : Stock exchange helps in educating public
about investments in securities which leads to spreading of Equity culture.
6. Providing scope for speculation : Stock exchange provides scope within
the provisions of law for speculation in a restricted and controlled manner.
Trading Procedure on a Stock Exchange:-
1. Selection of Broker : In order to trade on a Stock Exchange first a broker is
selected who should be a member of stock exchange as they can only trade
on the stock exchange.
2. Placing the order : After selecting a broker, the investors specify the type
and number of securities they want to buy or sell.
3. Executing the order : The broker will buy or sell the securities as per the
instructions of the investor.
4. Settlement : Transactions on a stock exchange may be carried out on either
cash basis or carry over basis (i.e. badla). The time period for which the
page 89
Business Studies- XII
transactions are carried forward is referred to as accounts which vary from a
fortnight to a month. All transactions made during one account are to be
settled by payment for purchases and by delivery of share certificates,
which is a proof of ownership of securities by an individual.
Earlier trading on a stock exchange took place through a public outcry or
auction system which is now replaced by an online screen based electronic
trading system. Moreover, to eliminate, the problems of theft, forgery,
transfer, delays etc an electronic book entry from a holding and transferring
securities has been introduced, which is called process of dematerialisation
of securities.
(Difference between Capital and Money Market.)
S.No. Basis Capital Market Money Market
1. Participants Financial Institutions, Banks, RBI, Banks Financial
Corporate Entities, foreign Institutions & finance
investors and individuals. companies
2. Instruments Equity shares, bonds Treasury Bills, Trade bills,
Traded preference shares and commercial paper, call
debentures. money etc.
3. Investment Does not necessarily Entail huge sums of
outlay require a huge financial money as the instruments
outlay. are quite expensive.
4. Duration Deals in medium & long Deals in short term funds
term securities having having maturity period
maturity period of over upto one year. one year.
5. Liquidity Securities are less liquid Money market instruments
as compared to money are highly liquid. market
securities.
6. Expected High return Low return
7. Safety Capital Market instruments Money market instruments
are riskier both with respect are generally much safer
to return and repayment. with a minimum risk of
default.
page 90
Business Studies- XII
Depository Services and DEMAT Accounts :Keeping in the mind the
difficulties to transfer of shares in physical form, SEBI has developed a new
system in which trading in shares is made compulsory in electronic form
Depository services system. and D-Mat Account are very basis of this system.
Depository services:-'Depository' is an institution / organization which holds
securities (e.g. shares, debentures, bonds, mutual funds etc.) in electronic form, in
which trading is done. The services provided by a Depository are termed as
'Depository Services'. At present there are two depositories in India: NSDL
(National Securities Depository Ltd.) and CDSL (Central Depository Services
Ltd.). which are known as "Depository Participants". (DPs)
Services provided by Depository
? Dematerialisation (usually known as demat) is converting physical
certificates to electronic form.
? Rematerialisation, known as remat, is reverse of demat, i.e getting
physical certificates from the electronic securities.
? Transfer of securities, change of beneficial ownership.
? Settlement of trades done on exchange connected to the
Depository. Now a days on-line paper-less trading in shares of the
company is compulsory in India. Depository services is the name of that
mechanism. In this system transfer of ownership in shares take place by
means of book entry without the physical delivery of shares. When an
investor wants to deal in shares of any company he has to open a Demat
account. There are four players who participate in this system.
1. The Depository : A depository is an institution which holds the shares of
an investor in electronic form. There are two depository institutions in
India these are NSDL and CDSL.
2. The Depository Participant : He opens the account of Investor and
maintains securities records.
?3. The Investor : He is a person who wants to deal in shares whose name is
recorded
?.4. The Issuing Company : That organisation which issues the
securities. This issuing company sends a list of the shareholders to the
page 91
Business Studies- XII
depositories.
Benefits of Depository Services
? Sale and Purchase of shares and stocks of any company on any stock
Exchange.
? Saves time.
? Lower transaction costs.
? Ease in trading.
? Transparency in transactions.
? No counterfeiting of security certificate
.? Physical presence of investor is not required in stock exchange.
? Risk of mutilation and loss of security certificate is eliminated.
Demat Account
Demat account is the abbreviation of 'Dematerialized Account'. Demat
(Dematerialized account refers to an account which an Indian citizen must open
with the depository) participant (banks, stockbrokers) to trade in listed securities
in electronic form wherein one can hold shares of various companies in the
Dematerialized {electronic} form. Access to De-mat account requires an internet
password and a transaction password. Transfer and purchase of securities can then
be initiated. Purchase and sale of securities on the De-mat account are
automatically made once transaction is confirmed and completed.
Benefits of Demat Account
1. Reduces paper work.
2. Elimination of problems on transfer of shares such as loss, theft and delay.
3. Exemption of stamp duty when transfer of shares.
4. The concept of odd lot stand abolished.
5. Increase liquidity through speedy settlement.
6. Attract foreign investors and promoting foreign investment.
page 92
Business Studies- XII
7. A single demat account can hold investments in both equity and debt
instruments.
8. Traders can work from anywhere.
9. Automatic credit into demat account for shares arising out of bonus / split
/consolidation / merger.
10. Immediate transfer of securities.
11. Change in address recorded with a DP gets registered with all companies in
which investor holds securities eliminating the need to correspond with
each of them.
Opening of Demat Account
A Demat account is opened on the same lines as that of a bank account. Prescribed
account opening forms available with the DP, need to be filled in. Standard
agreement is to be signed by the client and the DP, which details the rights and
obligation of both parties. Along with the form, the client is required to attach
photograph, attested copies of residence proof and proof of identity need to be
submitted.
Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI)
SEBI was established by Government of India on 12 April 1988 as an interim
administrative body to promote orderly and healthy growth of securities market
and for investor protection. It was given a statutory status on 30 January 1992
through an ordinance, which was later replaced by an Act of Parliament known as
the SEBI Act, 1992. It seeks to protect the interest of investors in new and second
hand securities.
Objectives of SEBI
1. To regulate stock exchange and the securities market to promote their
orderly functioning.
2. To protect the rights and interests of investors and to guide & educate them.
3 To prevent trade mal practices such as internal trading.
page 93
Business Studies- XII
4. To regulate and develop a code of conduct and fair practices by
intermediaries like brokers, merchant bankers etc.
Functions of SEBI
The SEBI performs three important functions :-
1. Regulatory functions - These functions are performed by SEBI to regulate
the business in stock exchange.
2. Development functions - These functions are performed by SEBI to
promote and develop activities in stock.
3. Protective functions - These functions are performed by SEBI to protect
the interest of investors and provide safety on investments.
Functions of SEBI
Regulatory Functions Development Functions Protective Functions
1. Framing Rule & Regulations 1. Training of intermediaries 1. Prohibiting of fraudulent &
unfair trade practices.
2. Registration of brokers 2. Conducting Research & 2. Check on insider trading.
& sub-brokers. Publishing useful
information.
3. Registration of collective 3. Undertaking measures to 3. Ensure investors protection.
investmemt schemes & develop capital market by
mutual funds. adopting flexible approach
4. Regulation of stock broker, 4. Educating Investors to 4. Promote fair practices & code of
portfolio exchanges, broaden their understanding conduct in securities market.
underwriters & merchant
bankers
5. Regulation of task over bids 5. Permitting lnternet trading 5. Check on price rigging
by companies. through registered stock
brokers
6. Levying fee or other charges 6. Check on preferential allotment.
as per act.
page 94
Business Studies- XII
One Marks Questions :
1. What is the maturity period of a commercial Paper?
2. What is a Treasury Bill?
3. AB Ltd. has sold 1 lakh equity shares of Rs. 10 each at Rs. 12 per share
to an investment banker, who offered them to the public at Rs. 20 each.
Identify the method of floatation.
4. State any two instruments of Capital Market.
5. Who acts as the Watchdog of Security Market in India ?
6. Who is the Borrower of call money ?
7. What is the other name of Zero coupon Bonds ?
8. Who issues the treasury Bill ?
9. What is the other name of Primary Market ?
10. What is a Prospectus ?
11. What is Dematerialization ?
12. What is the minimum amount of Treasury Bill ?
13. What is Demat A/C ?
14. Write one benefit of Demat Account ?
15. What do you mean by 'Depository' ?
I6. What is the full form of CDSL?
17. What is the full form of NSDL?
18. What is the full form of DEMAT ?
19. Where is a DEMAT account used?
20. Shabnam wants to invest her savings in share market. What is the most
important requirement for this?
21. Julie wants to get her share certificates in electronic form. What is the
name of service provided by Depository?
page 95
Business Studies- XII
3/4 Marks Questions
1. State the various protective functions of SEBI.
2. What is money market? Explain its three instruments.
3. What is meant by commercial paper & certificate of Deposit ?
4. State any four regulatory functions of the SEBI.
5. Write difference between Primary and Secondary Market.
6. What are the services provided by a Depository?
7. What are the benefits of opening a DEMAT account?
8. Harjeet wants to invest money in share market. As a Financial advisor
what will you suggest him to do and why?
(Hint: Open a Demat account and explain benefits)
5/6 Marks Questions
1. Explain any five functions of stock exchange.
2. Why was SEBI set up ? State its development functions.
3. Explain any five methods of floating new issues in the primary market.
4. Explain the trading procedure on stock exchange.
5. Distinguish between capital market and money market on the following
basis:-
a) Participants.
b) Instruments Traded.
c) Duration of Securities Traded.
d) Expected Return.
e) Safety.
f) Liquidity.
page 96
Business Studies- XII
6. 'Primary Markets contribute to capital formation directly Secondary
Market does so indirectly'. Explain.
7. You are finance expert. Your father feels that there is no difference between
Primary Market and Secondary Market. Where do you differ with him.
How would you convince him. Give reasons in support of your answer.
8. What are the benefits of depository services and Demat Account.
9. Explain the constituents of depository services.
10. Mohan wants to sell 50 shares of Tata Motors. Explain the trading
procedure of shares.
page 97
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 11
MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Market : is used for a place where the buyers and sellers meet and conduct
buying and selling activities. In the traditional sense, the market means a place
where buyers and sellers gather to enter into transaction involving the exchange
of goods and services but today business can be conducted on telephone, through
mail, internet etc. In modern marketing sense the term market has a broad
meaning. It refers to a set of actual and potential buyers of a product or service.
Marketeer or seller : If a customer is the seeker of satisfaction the marketeer is
the provider of satisfaction. Marketeer can be a person or an organisation who
makes available the products or services and offers them to the customer with an
intention of satisfying the customer needs and wants.
Marketing :
Marketing is a social process whereby people exchange goods & services for
money or for something of value to them. Anything that is of value to the other can
be marketed e.g.
1. Physical Products - T.V, Mobile phone etc.
2. Services - Insurance, education etc.
3. Person - Selection for different posts.
4. Place- visit - Agra, Taj Mahal , etc.
5. Events - Fashion show, Films, Festivals
Important features of Marketing :-
1. Needs and wants : Satisfaction of the needs and wants of individuals and
organisations.
2. Creating a market offering : Complete offer for a product of service.
3. Customer value : greatest benefit or value for the money.
4. Exchange mechanism : Exchange of products / services for money / for
something of value to them.
page 98
Business Studies- XII
Meaning and concept of Marketing management -
Marketing management means management of the marketing functions.- It is the
process of organising, directing and controlling the activities related to marketing
of goods and services to satisfy customers' needs & achieve organisational goals.
Marketing management involves the following steps or activities:-
1. Choosing a target market - e.g., a manufacturer may choose to make
ready-made garments upto the age of 5 years for children.
2. Creating customers in target market - To increase the number of
customers by analysing their needs, wants etc.
3. Creating superior value - To make the product better than competitors
products for customers .
Functions of Marketing / Marketing activities
1. Marketing research : Gathering and analyzing marketing information i.e.
what the customers want to buy, when they are likely to buy, in what
quantities do they buy, from where do they buy etc.
2. Marketing planning : Specific plan for increasing the level of production,
promotion of the products etc and specify the action programmes to achieve
these objectives.
3. Product designing and development : Marketeer must take decision like,
what-product ? which model / size ? brand name ? Packaging ? quality
level ? So that customer needs are satisfied.
4. Buying & assembling : e.g. Car-Raw materials like steel, tyres, batteries,
seats, stearing wheel etc are bought & then assembled in the form of a
complete product.
5. Packaging / Labelling : designing the package for the product and put label
on the package.
6. Branding : Creating a distinct identity of the product from that of
competitors e.g. Videocon washing machine, Usha Fans, Lux Soap etc.
Concepts & Philosophies of Marketing :-
1. Production concept : Profits could be maximized by producing products
on a large scale, thereby reducing average cost of production.
page 99
Business Studies- XII
Drawback : Customers do not always buy inexpensive products.
2. Product Concept : When the supply of products increases customers begin
to prefer products of superior quality and features. Therefore the focus
shifted from quantity of production to quality of products.
3. Sales Concept : With the passage of time the marketing environment
underwent future change of quality and availability does not ensure survival
and growth of the firm because of competition to sell quality products.
Therefore firms must undertake aggressive selling and promotion efforts to
make customer buy their products.
4. Marketing Concept : Implies that a firm can achieve its goals by
identifying needs of the customer and satisfying them better than the
competitors. Customer satisfaction is the precondition for realising the
firm's goal and objectives.
5. Societal Marketing Concept : Under this concept customer satisfaction is
supplemented by social welfare. Some products bring harmful effect on
environment so these should not be supplied. It pays attention to the social,
ethical and ecological aspects of marketing.
Meaning and concept of Marketing and selling :
Marketing is a wide term. It refers to a large set of activities of which selling is just
one part. A marketeer before making the sale does a lot of other activities such as
planning the type, design of the product, the price and selecting the distribution
outlets at which the same would be available.
Selling - refers to the sale of goods or service through publicity, promotion and
salesmanship. The title of the product is transferred from seller to buyer. The
entire focus in selling is to covert the product into cash.
page 100
Business Studies- XII
Difference between selling & marketing
Meaning and concept of Marketing Mix-In orders to satisfy the needs and wants
of its customer, every business firm must develop an appropriate marketing mix.
Marketing Mix
Marketing mix refers to ingredients or the tools or the variables which the
marketeer mixes in order to interact with a particular market.
Basis
Selling
Marketing
Scope
It is only a part of
process of
marketing .
It is a wide term
consisting of a
number of
activities such as
identification,
customers need
etc.
Focus
Transfer of the
title from seller to
consumer.
Achieving
maximum
satisfaction of
customer's needs
and wants.
Pre-dominance Product is given
priority
Costumer is
treated as the king.
Aim Profits through
sales volume.
Profits through
customer
satisfaction.
Emphasis Bending the
customer
according to the
product.
To develop the
products as per
the customers
needs.
S.no.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
page 101
Business Studies- XII
Elements / 4 Ps of Marketing mix
1. Product mix : All the features of the product or service to be offered for
sale.
2. Price Mix : Value (Money) in lieu of product / service received by seller
from a buyer.
3. Promotion mix : Informing the customers about the products & persuading
them to buy the same.
4. Place Mix : Physical distribution : Various decisions regarding distribution
of products.
- Channels of distribution : Whether wholesalers, retailers are to be
used or not.
- Physical movement of the products from producer to consumers.
- Storage, transportation, managing inventory (stock) etc.
Elements
Branding Packaging Labelling
Company's
Objectives
Costs
Competition
Customer
Demand
Factors
Elements
Personal
Selling
Publicity Sales
Promotion
Advertising
page 102
Business Studies- XII
IP - PRODUCT MIX
Meaning and Concept of Product - Product is anything that can be offered to
a market to satisfy a want or need.
1. Product mix refers to a combination of various features relating to the
product or service like quality, size, range, package, warranty etc.
Classification of Products
2. Industrial Products : used as inputs in producing other products e.g. raw
material, tools etc.
Consumer Products
Durability Basis
Shopping Efforts Involved
Non Durable
|
which are
consumed in a
short period of
time e.g. soap,
toothpaste
Durable
|
Which are used
for a longer
period of the
time
e.g. T.V., washing
Machine
Services
|
Benefits or
satisfaction
offered for sale
e.g. repair, dry
cleaning etc.
Convenience Products
|
Which are purchased
frequently, immediately
with minimum time and
efforts e.g. medicine,
salt, bread etc.
Shopping Products
|
Which are purchased
after some shopping
efforts on the basis of
price, quality etc. e.g.
T.V. Jewellery etc.
Speciality Products
|
Which have certain
special features. Buyers
spend a lot of time and
efforts to purchase them
e.g. Restaurant,
Collection of Art work,
Particular Hair Cutting
Salon etc.
page 103
Business Studies- XII
Features:
1. The number of buyers are limited
2. The sale of industrial products is generally made with the help of short
channels of distribution.
Manufacturer Retailer Consumer ( O n e l e v e l )
Manufacturer Consumer ( Direct Selling)
PRODUCT MIX -Three components are - Branding, Packaging, Labelling
1. i) Branding - giving a name / a sign / a symbol etc to a product
eg. : Pepsi
Nike
Qualities of a good Brand Name :
1. Simple and short :A brand name should be simple and short as Tata, Bata.
2. Easily Pronunceable : A brand names should be easily pronunceable as
Lux, Dalda.
3. Suggestive : Brand name should be self explanatory, suggesting the
inherent quality of the product as Ujjala suggests more whiteness.
4. Distinctive : Brand name should be so distinctive that it highlights itself in
the group of other brand names such as : Tide, Perk.
Advantages of Branding:-
1. Brand name helps in advertising it in an easier way.
2. Brand name establishes permanent identity of the product.
3. Branded products can be easily identified by consumers.
4. Brand name promotes repurchasing.
5. Branding ensures a particular level of quality of the product: If there is
any deviation in the quality the customers can make a complaint to the
manufacturer.
2. ii) Packaging : Act of designing and producing the container or
wrapper of a product. Good packaging often helps in selling the product so
it is called a silent salesman.
page 104
Business Studies- XII
Levels of packaging
1. Primary package - refers to the product's immediate containere.g. toffee
in a wrapper, a match box.
2. Secondary package - refers to additional layers of protection that are kept
till the product is ready for use e.g. a Colgate toothpaste usually comes in a
card board box.
3. Transportation package - refers to further packaging components
necessary for storage, identification and transportation e.g. package of
toffees are put into corrugated boxes for storing at a manufacturer's
warehouse and for transportation.
Functions of Packaging:-
1. Product Identification : Packaging helps in identification of the product.
2. Product Protection : The main function of the packing is to provide
protection to the product from dirt, insects and breakage.
3. Convenience : It provides convenience in carriage, stocking and in
consumption.
4. Product Promotion : Packaging simplifies the work of sales promotion.
Advantages of Packaging :-
1. Rising standards of Health and Sanitation : The people are becoming
health conscious so they like to buy packed goods. The reason is that the
chances of adulteration in such goods are minimised.
2. Innovational Opportunity : With the increasing use of packaging more
innovational opportunity becomes available in this area for the researchers.
3. Product Differentiation : Packaging is helpful in creating product
differentiation. The colour, material and size of the package makes
differences in the quantity of the product.
3. Labelling : A label is a carrier of information which is to be provided to the
customers which describes the product, its contents, the date and time of
manufacturing etc.
Functions:
1. Helps in identifying the product or brand from the various types available,
page 105
Business Studies- XII
say deodorants, chocolates, biscuits imprinted on its package helps us to
identify from number of packages, which is our favourite brand.
2. Helps in grading the products into different categories.
3. Carrier of information:- Labelling helps in describing salient features of a
product such as contents, price, instructions for use etc.
4. Legal Requirement- It provides information required by law e.g. statutory
warning on the package of cigaratte.
5. Helps in promotion of products - Attractive labels increase sales volume by
mentioning the promotional schemes launched by companies.
II P - PRICE MIX : Meaning and concept of Price: - Price may be defined as the
amount of money paid by a buyer (or received by a seller) in consideration of the
purchase of a product or a service. Pricing is crucial for manufacturers, customers
and intermediaries. A customer will buy a product only when he perceives that
value or a product is at least equal to value of money, which he has to pay in the
form of price. Before framing any pricing policy following factors should be
considered:-
1. Pricing objectives -
(a) to maximise profits in the short term-tend to charge maximum
price.
2. (b) Obtain large share of the market i.e., by maximising sales it will
charge lower price.
3. (c) Firm is operating in the competitive market it may charge low
price for it.
2. Cost of Production - Needs to be fully realised before fixing prices.
3. Demand - High Demand and less supply may permit increase in price while
low demand and more supply may not allow increase in price.
4. Competition in market - Prices of competitors need to be considered before
fixing prices.
5. Government Policies- Products regulated by government pricing
regulations need to be priced as per government policies.
page 106
Business Studies- XII
III. P - Place Mix/ Physical Distribution Mix :
Covers all the activities required to physically move goods from
manufacturers to the customers Important activities include.
1. Order Processing : Accurate & speedy order processing leads to profit &
goodwill & vice versa.
2. Transportation : Add value of the goods by moving them to the place
where they are required.
3. Inventory control : Additional demand can be met in less time, the need
for inventory will also be low.
4. Ware housing : Need arises to fill the gap between the time when the
product is produced & time when it is required for consumption.
Channels of Distribution :
Direct Channel - Manufacturer - Customer
Indirect Channel - Manufacturer - Retailer - Customer
Manufacture - wholesaler - Retailer -customer.
Manufacturer - Agent - wholesaler - Retailer customer
Factors Determining Choice of Channels of Distribution:-
Choice of appropriate channel of distribution is a very important marketing
decision, which affects the performance of an organisation . Whether the
firm will adopt direct marketing channels or long channels involving a no.
of intermediaries is a strategic decision.
page 107
Business Studies- XII
Factors Determining Choice of Channels of Distribution
Market related Factors Product Related Factors Company related factor
1. Size of the market - 1. Nature of product - 1. Financial strength of the
no of customers - technical (made to order) company - strong - direct
more customers more - direct selling / own channel - weak -
intermediates. middleman required.
2. Geographical concentration- 2. Perishable (direct / short 2. Degree of control -
concentrated buyers - direct Channels), Non perishable Greater control-Short /
selling spread customers- - Long Channels. direct channel, less
more intermediaries control- long channels.
3. Size or order - i.e. quantity 3. The unit value of the 3. Management - Sufficient
of purchase product- costly- direct knowledge - direct
Less - more intermediaries selling, Low- long channels selling & Vice versa.
More - direct selling
4. Products' Complexity -
Complex products - direct
selling, Non- Complex - long
channels.
IV.P- Promotion Mix
It refers to combination of promotional tools used by an organisation to
communicate and persuade customers to buy its products.
Tools/ Elements of Promotion mix:-
1. Advertising : Most commonly used tool of promotion. It is an impersonal
form to communication, which is paid by the marketers (sponsors) to
promote goods and services. Common mediums are newspaper, magazine,
television & radio.
Role or Importance of Advertising:
1. Enhancing customer satisfaction and confidence.
2. Helpful in increasing the demand of existing product.
3. Helpful to increase the market share.
page 108
Business Studies- XII
4. Helpful in generating more employment.
5. Helpful in the economic development of the country.
6. Knowledge of various product.
7. No fear of exploitation.
Objections Against Advertising - Though advertising is one of the most
frequently used medium of promotion of goods & services but it attracts a lot of
criticism / objections against it, which are as follows:-
1. Increased Product Price - Which is ultimately added to product cost,
manufacturers pass this cost to ultimate customers.
2. Confusion to Customers - The number of advertisements shown for a
single product having different brands confuse the customers and it becomes
very difficult for them to make choice.
3. Encouraging sale of inferior products - In many cases some product
features are over emphasized.
4. Advertisement of Bad Tastes - Events, models degrade the human dignity.
5. Undermines social values and promotes materialism:- It induces the
customers to buy more and more products. Because of emphasis on
materialism, social relationships are distorted which brings social disorder.
In the changed economic environment of globalisation, advertising is
considered as an important tool of marketing. It helps a firm in effectively
communicating with its target market, increasing the sale and thereby
reducing the per unit cost of production. It is not a social waste rather it adds
value to the social cause by giving a boost to production and generating
employment.
2. Personal Selling:
Personal selling consists of contacting prospective buyers of product
personally i.e face to face interaction between seller and buyer for the
purpose of sale.
Features of the Personal Selling :
1. Personal contact is established under personal selling.
2 Oral conversation.
page 109
Business Studies- XII
3. Quick solution of queries.
4. Receipt of additional information.
5. Development of relationship with the prospective customers which
may become important in making sale.
Qualities of a good Salesman :
1. Physical Qualities : Physical qualities include personality health, stamina
and tolerance. A salesman can instantly connect with the customers if he is
good looking and smart.
2. Mental Qualities : These include mainly skills, mental alertness,
imagination and self confidence.
3. Technical Qualities : He should have full and updated knowledge about
the product he is selling-its features, price and variety available. He should
be aware of the nature of work carried on by the firm, he is working for.
4. Good communication skills : He should be able to develop a good
conversation with the customer. He should be confident while he is
communicating and should be able to answer all the queries of the customer
satisfactorily.
5. Honesty : It is a very important quality of a good salesman. In order to
establish the goodwill of firm he must be honest and sincere in performing
his duty. A salesman who resorts to selling inferior goods, charging higher
rates, providing wrong information, giving exaggerated claims etc will
cause a decline in goodwill of the firm in the long run.
6. Courtesy : A Salesman who is polite and courteous generates buyer's
confidence selling product becomes easy for him.
7. Persistent : "Never give up", is the spirit that a salesman should have.
Making the customer buy maximum amount of a product is the ultimate
task given to him.
8. Capacity to inspire trust : The salesman should have the convincing
power to develop the belief in a customer that the product he is buying is the
best product in the market.
3. Sales Promotion :Short term incentives designed to encourage the buyers
to make immediate purchase of a product / service.
page 110
Business Studies- XII
Techniques
1. Rebate : Special price to clear off excess inventory.
2. Discounts : Price reduced to induce buyers to buy more.
3. Sampling : Free sample of a product to customers to try product & learn
about it.
4. Lucky draw : Lucky draw coupon eg. purchase an easy product & win a
car etc.
5. Full Finance @ 0% : Easy financing schemes.
6. Contents : Competitive events involving application of skills or luck.
7. Product Combination : Offering another product as gift along with the
purchase of a product.
8. Instant draws and assigned gift : Scratch a card and instantly win a prize
with the purchase of a TV, T. Shirt, Refrigerator etc.
9. Quantity Gift : Offering extra quantity of the product e.g., Buy three LUX
soaps and get one free.
Public Relations
“The Chartered Institute of Public Relations” defines Public Relations
as ‘a strategic management function that adds value to an organization by
helping it to manage its reputation'
Public relations covers a wide range of tactics, usually involve providing
information to independent media sources in the hope of gaining favorable
coverage. It also involves a mix of promoting specific products, services
and events and promoting the overall brand of an organization, which is an
ongoing tact.
Public Relation Tools include-
1. Press release : A press release is an announcement of an event,
performance, or other newsworthy item that is issued to the press by a
public relations professional of an organisation.
It is written in the form of a story with an attractive heading so that the media
quickly grasps and circulates the message through newspapers / radio /
television / internet.
page 111
Business Studies- XII
2. Press Kits: It is a comprehensive package of information outlining a
company's products and services most frequently sent to members of the
press. It includes
? A brief company biography.
? information of senior management.
? comments from customers.
? Reprints of newspaper and magazine articles.
? Photos of products.
3. Brochures: It is a booklet published by the organization which contains the
organization’s background, its ethics, vision, mission, its past, present and
future projects, its USP, etc. Eg: brochure given to new employees to give
them a gist of the organization.
4. Newsletter: It is a printed publication produced at regular intervals
focussing on a particular set of people. The content of a newsletter is
presented in a writing style that is less formal and letter-like. For example, a
newsletter published by a college consists of information about activities
conducted during a particular period, special achievements by students or
teachers, etc.
5. Events and Press support: Special events are acts of news development.
The ingredients are time, place, people, activities, drama, showmanship;
one special event may have many subsidiary events, such as luncheons,
banquets, contests, speeches, and many others as part of the build up.
6. Conferences and Seminars: Conferences and seminars are conducted for
making people aware about the organization. For example travel
companies generally call prospective clients and offer travel packages. The
members are contacted through telephones and asked to attend seminar.
7. Websites: A website acts as a window for the outside world to know an
organization. So it is designed not just to serve as a resource for members,
but also to present a positive message to non-members who are browsing
through.
page 112
Business Studies- XII
ROLE OF ‘PR’ IN AN ORGANISAION
(i) Smooth functioning of business and achievement of objectives.
(ii) Building corporate image that affects favorably on its products.
- Up keep of parks, gardens, sponsoring sports activities etc.
(iii) Build interest in the established product and help in launching new products.
(iv) Establishing positive image of products facing adverse publicity. For
example, soft drink majors- Pepsi, Coco-cola was subjected to a
controversy that there were pesticides found in the samples collected from
different areas. In this situation, the companies attracted severe criticism
from various sectors like consumers, investors, government etc. This called
for public relations exercise so that damage control could be done.
(V) It acts as a supplement to advertising in promoting (new and existing)
products.
1 Mark Questions.
1. Define marketing management in present context.
2. Outline one objective of marketing management.
3. What is marketing research?
4. What is meant by product Mix?
5. What is a trade mark?
6. Which marketing philosophy gives more importance to consumer welfare
instead of consumer satisfaction.
7. State any one pillar of marketing concept.
8. Name the channel wherein goods are made directly available by the
manufacturer to consumers without involving any intermediary.
9. A lunch box free with Kissan Sauce is an example of the techniques of sales
promotion. Name the technique.
10. Write any two brand names available in the market.
11. State any one feature of convenience goods.
page 113
Business Studies- XII
12. Toothpaste is packed in a tube is an example of which type of packing.
13. Which concept of Marketing suggests that the organisation should earn
profit through volume of production.
14. Name any two products which are subject to the process of grading.
15. Name the element of marketing mix which makes the products available to
the target customers.
3-4 Marks Questions
1. Explain any three advantages of labelling to the customers.
2. Differentiate between marketing and selling on the basis of :
(i) Meaning (ii) Scope (iii) Objectives.
3. Write any four differences between advertising and personal selling.
4. State any three advantages of sales promotion.
5. Explain any four functions of packaging.
6. 'Advertising confuses rather than helps'. Do you agree? Give reasons.
5-6 Marks Questions
1. Explain the various functions of marketing mix
2. Explain four important elements of marketing mix.
3. Explain any four factors on which the choice of channels of distribution
depends.
4. “Advertising encourages sale of inferior products” Do you agree ? Give
reasons.
5. Why Public Relations are important for an organisation ?
6. Explain four qualities of a good brand.
7. Explain three methods of sales promotion.
8. A new movie "XYZ" is to be released in the month of December. Which
department is going to look into the techniques of promoting the movie ?
page 114
Business Studies- XII
What tools will they employ for the same ? Explain any three.
9. A mobile company is launching a new high tech mobile phone in the market.
What will be the role of public relations department in this case. What tools
can it use to promote it?
10. What are the most important requirements for personal selling ? What skills
are needed to perform it effectively?
page 115
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 12
CONSUMER PROTECTION
Protecting consumers from unfair trade practices, adopted by the producers and
sellers of goods and services is termed as consumer protection. It not only includes
educating consumers about their rights and responsibilities, but also helps in
getting their grievances redressed.
Importance of Consumer Protection (from consumer’s point of view ):
1. Consumers Ignorance : Majority of consumers are not aware of their
rights and reliefs available to them as a result of which they are exploited. In
order to save consumers from exploitation, consumer protection is needed.
2. Unorganised Consumers : In India consumers are still unorganised and
there is lack of consumer organisations also, thus consumer protection is
required.
3. Widespread exploitation of Consumers : Consumers are exploited on
large scale by means of various unfair trade practices and consumer
protection is required to protect them from exploitation.
Importance of Consumer Protection (from the point of view of Business):-
1. Long term business interest : It is always in the interest of the business to
keep its customer satisfied. Global competition could be won only after
satisfying customers. Satisfied customers lead to repeat sales and help in
increasing customer base of business.
2. Moral Justification : It is the moral duty of any business to take care of
consumer interest & avoid any form of their exploitation & unfair trade
practices like defective & unsafe products, adultration, false and misleading
advertising, hoardings, black marketing etc.
3. Business uses resources of society: Every business uses the resources of
the society and thus it is their responsibility to work in the interest of the
society.
4. Social Responsibility : A business has social responsibilities towards
various groups like owners, workers, government, customers etc. Thus,
customers should be provided qualitative goods at reasonable prices.
5. Government Intervention : If a business engages in any form of unfair
page 116
Business Studies- XII
trade practices then government takes action against it, which adversely
affects its goodwill.
CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 1986 (CPA, 1986)
Meaning of Consumer
Consumer protection Act 1986 was introduced to make consumers aware
about their rights and to give them legal protection. According to it
consumer is defined as follows.
1. Any person who buys any goods for a consideration. It includes any user
of such goods with the approval of the buyer. But it does not include a
person who obtains goods for resale or any commercial purpose.
2. Any person who avails any services for a consideration. It includes any
beneficiary of such services but it does not include a person who avails
such service for any commercial purpose.
Meaning of Consumer Protection
CPA, 1986 defines consumer protection as : -
1. To protect and promote the interest of consumers by recognising consumers
rights such as right to saftety, right to be informed, right to choose, right to
be heard, right to seek redressal and right to consumer education.
2. To provide for a simple , speedy and inexpenssive redressal of consumer
grievances by setting a 3 tier enforcement machinery.
Rights of a Consumer-
Consumer protection Act, 1986 has provided six rights to the consumers,
which are as follows:-
1. Right to Safety : Consumer has the right to be protected against products, &
services which are hazardous to health & life (should use ISI marked
electronic device.
2. Right to be informed : Consumer has right to have complete information
about the product before buying it.
3. Right to choose : Consumer has a right to choose any product out of the
available products as per his own decision making.
4. Right to be heard : Consumer has the right to file a complaint to be heard in
page 117
Business Studies- XII
case of dissatisfaction with goods or services (use of grievance cell)
5. Right to Seek Redressal : Consumer has the right to get relief in case the
product or service falls short of his expectations or is dangerous. He may be
provided with replacement / removal of defect or compensation for any
loss. Various redressal forums are set up by the Govt. at National and State
level.
6. Right to consumer education:- Consumer has the right to acquire
knowledge and to be well informed throughout life. He should be made
aware of his rights and reliefs available to him in case of the product or
service falls short of his exceptions. The Govt. of India has included
consumer education in the school curriculum & is making use of media to
make consumers aware of their rights.
Responsibilities / Duties of a Consumer
1. Consumer must exercise his rights : Consumers must be aware of their
rights with regard to the products or services they buy from the market.
2. Consumer must be a Cautious consumer : While buying a product or
services, a consumer should read labels carefully .
3. Consumer must file a complaint in an appropriate forum in case of any
shortcoming in product / service availed.
4. Consumer must insist on cash memo i.e a proof of purchase is required to
file a complaint.
5. Consumer must be quality conscious. He should ask / look for ISI mark on
electric goods. FPO mark on food products, Hall mark on jewellery etc.
6. Consumer must bring the discrepancy in the advertisement to the notice of
the sponsor.
7. Consumer must exercise his legal right. If any of these rights is violated by
manufacturer or seller, the consumers must file a complaint with the legal
machinery constituted under CPA, 1986.
THE SALIENT FEATURES AND PROVISIONS OF
CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT, 1986
Who Can File A Complaint Under CPA, 1986
A complaint before the appropriate consumer forum can be made by : -
page 118
Business Studies- XII
(1) Any consumer.
(2) Any registered consumer association.
(3) The central or state government.
(4) One or more consumers on behalf of numerous consumers having
same interest.
(5) A legal heir or representative of a deceased consumer.
Against whom a complaint can be filed ?
Consumer Protection Act, 1986 is applicable to all types of undertakings, whether
big or small, private or public, or in co-operative sector, manufacturer or a trader,
wholesaler or retailer, supplying goods or providing services.
Thus, a complaint can be filed against:
1. The seller, manufacturer or dealer of defective goods. Defect means any
fault, imperfection or shortcoming in the quality, quantity or purity of
goods.
2. The provider of services if they are deficient in any manner. Deficiency
means any imperfection, shortcoming or inadequacy in the quality, nature
and manner of performance of services.
Consumer Protection Act, 1986 defines deficiency as “any fault,
imperfection, shortcoming or inadequacy in the quality, nature and manner
of performance which is required to be maintained by or under any law for
the time being in force or has been undertaken to be performed by a person in
pursuance of a contract or otherwise in relation to any service”.
The term service includes any service that is not rendered free of charge.
The term deficiency has been applied differently to different sectors. For
example, in the banking sector acts such as delay in issuing a cheque book,
non encashment of a cheque and delay have been held to be deficiency and
whereas in the medical sector, courts are not as liberal and count only gross
negligence as deficiency. The courts have however been proactive in
holding that even departments such as the housing boards are liable for any
deficiency in services rendered.
page 119
Business Studies- XII
REDRESSAL AGENCIES UNDER CONSUMER PROTECTION
ACT, 1986
For the redressal of consumer grievances the act provides a three - tier
machinery as : -
National Commission
State Commission
District Forum
(1) DISTRICT FORUM District forum are set up in each district by
the state concerned. The important features are : -
(a) It consists of a President and two members, one of whom should be
a woman, duly appointed by State Govt.
(b) It can receive consumer complaints of not more than Rs. 20 Lakhs
value.
(c) On receiving the complaint, the district forum shall refer the
complaint to the opposite party concerned and send the sample of
goods for testing in a laboratory.
(d) The district forum after being satisfied that goods are defective or
there is some unfair trade practice can issue an order to opposite
party directing him to either replace or return the price or pay
compensation. In case the aggrieved party is not satisfied with the
order of district forum. He can appeal before state forum within 30
days of passing an order.
(2) STATE COMMISSION
It is set up in each state by the govt. concerned . The salient features
are : -
(a) Each commission consists of a president and at least 2 members
appointed by state Govt.
(b) Complaints of at least Rs. 20 lakhs but not more than 1 crore can be
filed with state commission.
(c) On receiving the complaint, the state commission can also refer
the complaint to opposite party and send the goods for testing in
laboratory.
page 120
Business Studies- XII
(d) The state commission after being satisfied can order to
oppositeparty to either replace or repay or pay compensation.
In case the aggrieved party is not satisfied, they can appeal before
national commission within 30 days of passing an order.
(3) NATIONAL COMMISSION
It is set up by Central Govt. The provisions of act are : -
(a) It consists of a President and at least 4 members appointed by
Central Govt.
(b) All complaints are pertaining to goods and services of value more
than Rs. 1 crore can be filed with national commission.
(c) On receiving the complaint, the national commission can also
refer it to opposite party and send goods for testing.
(d) The National Commission has the power to issue orders for
replacement or removal and to pay the compensation for loss.
REMEDIES AVAILABLE TO CONSUMERS
1. To remove the defect in goods or services.
2. To replace the defective product with new one free from defect.
3. To refund the price paid for the product/service.
4. To pay compensation for the loss or injury suffered by the consumer due to
product/service.
5. To discontinue the unfair trade practice and not to repeat them.
6. To withdraw the hazardous goods from sale.
7. To pay any amount (not less than 5% of value of defective goods) to any
person, consumer organisation.
8. To issue corrective advertisement to neutralise the effect of a misleading
advertisement.
CONSUMER AWARENESS -
page 121
Business Studies- XII
Some important consumer organization and NGO's engaged in protecting
consumer interests are:-
1. Consumer coordination council, Delhi.
2. Voluntary organisation in Interest of Consumer Education, Delhi.
3. Mumbai Grahak Panchayat, Mumbai.
4. Consumer Association, Kolkata.
5. Consumer Unity and Trust Society Jaipur.
Role of Consumer organisations and NGO's
1. Educating the general pubic about consumer rights by organising training
programmes, seminars and workshops.
2. Publishing periodical & other publications to educate consumers.
3. Providing legal assistance to consumers by providing legal advice etc.
4. Producing films or cassettes on food adultration, misuse of drugs etc.
5. Filing complaints in appropriate consumer courts on behalf of consumers.
6. Encouraging consumers to take on action against unfair trade practices.
7. Taking an initiative in filing cases in consumer courts on behalf of
consumers.
Ways and Means of Consumer Protection.
1. Government : Protects the interest of consumers by enacting various
legislations like CPA' 1986, Sale of goods Act 1930, Bureau of Indian
Standard 1986 etc. Consumer Protection Act provides for a three-tier
machinery at the district, state & national level for speedy & inexpensive
redressal of consumer grievances.
2. Consumer Organisation : Force business firms to avoid mal practices &
exploitation of consumers.
3. Business Association : The associations of trade, Commerce & business
like federation of Indian Chambers of Commerce (FICCI), Confederation
of Indian Industries (CII) have laid down their code of conduct for their
members in their dealings with the customers.
page 122
Business Studies- XII
IMPORTANT QUESTIONS :
1 marks
1. What are the two aspects of consumer protection?
(Hint - Educating consumers and Redressal of their grievances)
2. Give an example of consumer exploitation.
(unsafe products / Black marketing)
3. Name any two legitalations which provide protection to consumers.
(Hint : (i) CPA 1986, The Essential Commodities Act 1955)
4. Mention any two ways & means of consumer protection.
(Hint - Consumer organisation & Govt.)
5. Which mark is issued under the Bureau of Indian Standard Act 1986 ?
(Hint : ISI)
6. Against whom can a complaint be filed by a consumer ?
7. What does a 'defect in goods' mean ?
8. What does a 'deficiency in services' mean ?
9. If a dealer responds positively to a consumer's complaint, which value of
the dealer is depicted ?
(Hint: Honesty, commitment)
3/4 Marks Questions
1. Explain the role of Universities & schools in consumer protection ?
2. Explain briefly the salient features of consumer protection Act 1986 ?
3. "NGO's perform several functions for the protection and promotion of
interest of consumers." State any six such functions.
4. Joseph had got a confirmed ticket of Jet Airways. The flight was later
page 123
Business Studies- XII
cancelled on account of technical problem. Is it a deficiency in service ?
What relief can Joseph seek in this regard ?
5. Kabir bought a piece of cloth for getting a pant stitched from a dealer for
Rs.1000/- with proper receipt. His tailor detected manufacturing defect in
the pant piece. The shopkeeper refused to change or compensate. What
relief can Kabir seek in this regard?
6. Mamta bought a branded computer for Rs. 30,000/- from an authorized
dealer with proper receipt. There was a warranty of one year on the
computer. When she used the computer at home, she detected that CD drive
was not functioning properly due to technical reasons. What remedy can
she seek from the company ?
page 124
Business Studies- XII
UNIT 13
PROJECT WORK
INTRODUCTION :
A project means an activity which has a special purpose and which is
performed with absolute devotion and enthusiasm. Project work can be assigned
to the students whether individually or in groups. It has two types as:-
l. Visit of a Industrial unit as Bank, Stock Exchange or a mall.
2. Case study of a product as packing, branding and labelling.
Objects of a Project
1. Providing deep knowledge to the students.
2. Developing Creativity in the students.
3. Developing independent thinking skills in the student.
4. To convert theoretical knowledge into practical knowledge.
Steps in Project Work
1. Selection of topic or problem
2. Define the problem.
3. Setting objectives of the problem.
4. Preparing questionnaire.
5. Conducting enquiry.
6. Collect information and Data.
7. Editing the information or data.
page 125
Business Studies- XII
8. Analysing the Data or Information.
9. Preparing the Report
The marks will be allocated on the following heads by C.B.S.E.:-
1. Initiative, cooperativeness and participation 1 Mark
2. Creativity in presentation 1Mark
3. Content, observation and research work 2 Marks
4. Analysis of situations 2 Marks
5. Viva 4 Marks
Total: 10 Marks
Project One - Elements of Business Environment
The teachers should help the students in selecting any one element of the
following:
l. Changes witnessed over the last few years on mode of packaging and its
economic impact. The teacher may guide the students to identify the
following changes .
(a) The changes in transportation of fruits and vegetables such as
cardboard crates being used in place of wooden crates, etc.
Reasons for above changes.
(b) Milk being supplied in glass bottles, later in plastic bags and now
in tetra packs and through vending machines.
(c) Plastic furniture [doors and stools] gaining preference over
wooden furniture.
(d) The origin of cardboard and the various stages of changes and
growth.
(e) Brown paper bags packing to recycled paper bags to plastic bags
and cloth bags.
(f) Reuse of packaging [bottles, jars and tins] to attract customers for
page 126
Business Studies- XII
their products.
(g) The concept of pyramid packaging for milk.
(h) Cost being borne by the consumer/manufacturer.
(i) Packaging used as means of advertisements.
2. The reasons behind changes in the following:
Coca - Cola and Fanta in the seventies to Thums up and Campa Cola in the
eighties to Pepsi and Coke in nineties.
The teacher may guide the students to the times when India sold Coca Cola
and Fanta were being manufactured in India by the foreign companies.
The students may be asked to enquire about
a. Reasons of stopping the manufacturing of the above mentioned
drinks in India THEN.
b. The introduction of Thums up and Campa cola range.
c. Re-entry of Coke and introduction of Pepsi in the Indian market.
d. Factors responsible for the change.
e. Other linkages with the above.
f. Leading brands and the company having the highest market share.
g. Different local brands venturing in the Indian market.
h. The rating of the above brands in the market.
i. The survival and reasons of failure in competition with the
international brands.
j. Other observations made by the students.
The teacher may develop the following on the above lines:-
Changing role of the women in the past 25 years relating to joint families,
nuclear families, women as a bread earner of the family, changes in the
requirement, trend of mixers, washing machines, micro waves and
standard of living.
page 127
Business Studies- XII
4. The changes in the pattern of import and export of different Products.
5. The trend in the changing interest rates and their effect on savings.
6. A study on child labour laws, its implementation and consequences.
7. The state of anti-plastic campaign-the law, its effects and
implementation.
8. The laws of mining /setting up of industries, rules and regulations, licences
required for running that business.
9. Social factors affecting acceptance and rejection of an identified product.
(Dish washer, Atta maker, etc)
10. What has been the effect on the types of goods and service ? The students
can take examples like:
a. Washing machines, micro-waves, mixers and grinders.
b. Need for creche, day care center for young and old.
c. Ready to eat food, eating food outside, and tiffin centers.
11. Change in the man-machine ratio, technological advances resulting in
change of cost structure.
12. Effect of change in technological environment on the behaviors of
employee.
II Project TWO: Principles of Management
The students are required to visit any one of the following:
1) A departmental store.
2) An Industrial unit.
3) A fast food outlet.
4) Any other organisation approved by the teacher.
They are required to observe the application of the 14 General Principles of
management advocated by Fayol.
They may enquire into the application of scientific management
techniques by F.W. taylor in the unit visited.
page 128
Business Studies- XII
Tips to teacher
(i) The teacher may organise this visit.
(ii) The teacher should facilitate the students to identify any unit of
their choice and guide them to identify the principles that are being
followed.
(iii) Similarly they should guide the students to identify the techniques
of scientific management implemented in the orgnisation.
(iv) It may be done as a group activity.
(v) The observations could be on the basis of:-
? The different stages of division of word resulting to specilisation.
? Following instructions and accountability of subordinates to higher
authorities
? Visibility of order and equity in the unit.
? Balance of authority and responsibility.
? Communication levels and pattern in the organisation.
? Methods and techniques followed by the organisation for unity of direction
and coordination amongst all.
? Methods of wage payments followed:
? The teacher may organise this visit.
? The arrangements of fatigue study.
? Derivation of time study.
? Derivation and advantages of method study.
? Organisational chart of functional foremanship.
(vi) It is advised that students should be motivated to pick up different areas of
visit. As presentations of different areas in the class would help in better
understanding to the other students.
(vii) The students may be encouraged to develop worksheets. Teachers should
help students to prepare observation tools to be used for undertaking the
page 129
Business Studies- XII
project.
Examples; Worksheets, questionnaire, interviews and organizational chart
etc.
III. Project three: Marketing Management
Students are advised by the teacher to do a simple market research with the
objective of finding out a product service whose marketing may be
profitable like.
1. Shampoo 2. Deodorant
3. Roosted snacks 4. Washing detergent
5. Chocolate 6. Pickles
7. Battle 8. Bread
9. Jam 10. Cheese spread
11. Dry Cleaning
any more can be suggested
Now the students are required to make a project on the identified product /
service keeping in mind the following.
1. Why have they selected this product/service?
2. Find out 5 competitive brands that exist in the market.
3. What permission and licences would be required to make the product?
4. What are your competitors Unique Selling Proposition. [ U.S.P.]?
5. Does your product have any range, give details ?
6. What is the name of your product ?
7. Enlist its features.
8. Draw and Label of your product.
9. Draw a logo for your product.
10. Draft a tag line.
page 130
Business Studies- XII
11. What is the selling price of your competitors product?
(i) Selling price to consumer
(ii) Selling price to retailer
(iii) Selling price to wholesaler
What is the profit margin in percentage to the
? Manufacturer.
? Wholesaler.
? Retailer.
12. How will your product be packed?
13. Which channel of distribution are you going to use?
14. Decisions related to warehousing, state reasons.
15. What is going to be your selling price?
(i) The wholesaler
(ii) To retailer
(iii) To wholesaler
16. List 5 ways of promoting your product.
17. Any schemes for
(i) The wholesaler
(ii) The retailer
(iii) The consumer
18. What is going to be your U.S.P ?
19. Means of transport you will use and why?
20. Draft a good message for your label.
21. What good effective techniques will you follow for your product.
22. What cost effective techniques will you follow for your promotion plan.
By doing such type of project odonate will understand the importance of
concept of marketing mise and the necessary decisions regarding to the
your mix p's product, place, price and promotion.
page 131
Business Studies- XII
CBSE PAPER 2013 (Delhi)
Question Paper with Solutions
O;kolkf;d v/;;u
BUSINESS STUDIES
l-·||l·- =n¤ · . ·|ºº ~l·|+-n ~+ · -c
Time allowed : 3 hours Maximum Marks : 90
lkekU; funsZ'k %
(i) + ~+ ¤|n vz-| + --|· (+ z|·· = (+ ¤|+¤ -+ t|+
(ii) . ~+| ¤|n vz-| + --|· :c.: z|··| + t|+
(iii) : : ~+| ¤|n vz-| + --|· nª·|ª +:c z|··| + t|+
(iv) e ~+| ¤|n vz-| + --|· nª·|ª zcc z|··| + t|+
(v) (+ vz- + =·|i ·||ª =|·|=|·| ti tn +il¤(+
General instructions :
(i) Answers to questions carrying 1 mark may be from one word to one
sentence.
(ii) Answers to questions carrying 3 marks may be from 50 to 75 sentence.
(iii) Answers to questions carrying 4 - 5 marks may be about 150 word.
(iv) Answers to questions carrying 6 marks may be about 200 words.
(v) Attempt all parts of a question together.
page 132
Business Studies- XII
+ '·|-i' +| ¤l··||l·|- +il¤(+ +
Define "Recruitment".
z ~l·|v·º|| (+ ¤lºn vl+¤| +¤| +tn|-i t · +
Why is motivation called a complex process ?
. l-·z|- v¤·|- + l+= ª-· ¤· l-·¤|l·- t|-| t· +
At which level of management directing takes place ?
: l-¤zº| +i vl+¤| n -¤ +¤| l+¤| ¤|-| -|lt( ¤¤ '=·||·|·n+ +|¤¤|ti' + ·|·|-
l¤z|·|+· nt-¤¤¸º| -|z| n l¤-n- =in| n|·| ¤|- t· +
What should be done while 'taking corrective action' in the process of
controlling when especially in the important areas deviations go beyond
the acceptable range ?
: (+ +-¤-i +i +|¤z|in ¤¸¤i +i ~|¤z¤+-|~| +| '¤lz +i =·||¤-|' l+= v+|·
v·||l¤- +·-i t·--nº| +il¤(+ +
State how 'Growth Prospects' affect working capital requirements of a
company ?
e 'l¤-|i¤ v¤·|' +| v|·|ln+ -¤z¤ +¤| t· +
What is the primary objective of 'Financial Management' ?
. 'n·|' ¤|¤|· +| ~·| ¤-|
+ +Give the meaning of 'Money Market'.
º l¤¤º|- ¤|¤|· + =ti -·t = l-·¤|l·- 'l¤l-¤|¤- +|¤' + l+=i (+ ¤l·º||n +|
--nº| +il¤(+ +
State any one consequence of a well performed 'allocative function' of
financial market.
- ¤l¤º|- +| (+ =|n|l¤+ vl+¤| +¤| +t| ¤|-| t· +
Why is marketing called a social process?
+c l¤¤º|-v¤-·| ·z|- +i 'l¤+¤ ~¤·||·º||' -·|| 'l¤¤º|- ~¤·||·º||' n 'nº¤ ·¤||-'
+ ~|·||· ¤· ~--·|· +il¤(+ +
Distinguish between 'Selling Concept' and 'Marketing Concept' of
Marketing Management Philosophies on the basis of 'main focus'.
++ ·|¤ +i ·|lz| ª z: n|º| t|- ¤· l+=i n- -¤·||+-| +| +|-¸-i --|·|l·|+|·i ~·|¤|
page 133
Business Studies- XII
vl-l-l·| -i- ª-·i¤ -z + ~--ª- +t| lz|+|¤- ·¤ +·| =+-| t· +
Under three-tier machinery where can a legal heir or representative of a
deceased consumer file a complaint when the compensation claimed is
` 25 Lakhs.
+z va| - ª +,:cc +i (+ vl=z ¤|º÷ +i :ª-·i º|·i·i nl+- v¤|ª +·- =n¤ -==
l¤¤ni +| +·º nª ª¤|+ va| ~¤- '~l·|+|·' +| v¤|ª +·-| -|t-i t+ -= '~l·|+|·'
+| ¤t-|l-( l¤=+ ~-ª- -= =·l-|- l+¤| ¤| =+-| t+ +
Pragya bought an iron of a reputed brand for ` 1,500 but it caused an
electric shock while it was being used. Pragya wants to exercise her 'Right'
Identify the 'Right'. under which she can be protected.
+. v¤·| + -= l=z|- +| -|n ¤-|
-·|| -=+| ¤º|- +il¤( l¤=+ ~-=|· (+ v¤·|+ +| +n-|l·¤| = ¤¸·i ¤|--i- n 'n' + ª·||- ¤· 'tn' +| v¤|ª +·-| -|lt(+
+
Name and explain the principle of management according to which a
manager should replace 'I' with 'We' in all his conversations with workers.
+: ¤a|l-+ v¤·| + l=z|- + ª¤ n '=t¤|ª - l+ º+·|¤' +| =n¤|
+ .Explain 'Harmony Not Discord' as a principle of Scientific Management.
+: ¤|¤-|~| + (+ v+|· + ª¤ n '-¤z¤|' +| =n¤|
+ .Explain 'objectives' as one of the types of plans.
+e l-¤|¤- +i l¤z|·|-|~| + ª¤ n l---lnlº|- +| =n¤|
· .:~| l-¤|¤- ~-¤·- t, -·||
:¤| l-¤|¤- ·|l¤·¤¤|·i t+
Explain the following as features of Planning:
(a) Planning is continuous, and
(b) Planning is futuristic.
+. ~¤¤ +| º¸·|¤z| ¤-|- ¤|ni '~-+| (-º|v|:¤' +| l¤¤º|- ~·¤-| l-¤+- l+¤| ª¤|+
-=+| l¤+¤ n-¤ zccc :+|:¤| vl- n|t ·||+ n-¤ +i v|l-- + ln( l¤-·º| + l¤l·|--
n|·¤n| ¤· l¤-|· +·- + ~l-l·+- -=- ª¤¤ l¤¤÷ -|z| + l¤¤|n¤| n l-·i-|º| +·-|
z|ª l+¤|+ -=- ¤|¤| l+ ¤t- = +·n -a|- ~|· =n|t ·- + ¤|¤¤¸· ·|i +¤ ¤--| -
·|-| n ¤z| +·-| z|ª -ti l+¤|+ -=- ¤|- +i ~|· ¤|¤| l+ ¤ º¸·|¤ªº -ti º|·i· =+-+
page 134
Business Studies- XII
~-· -l-- ~-nl- + ¤|· -=- vl-n|t l¤¤|n¤ n zcc º¸·|¤z| ¤ º¸·|¤ªº ·|- ·- z|ª
+· l·(+
:~| l¤-·º| + -= n|·¤n +| ¤t-|l-( l¤-+| -¤¤|ª ~¤¤ º¸·|¤z| + l¤-·º| +
ln( +·ª| ~|· +|: (+ +|·º| ¤-|- t( -=+| ~|l-·¤ ·|i ·il¤(+
:¤| (= ·| n¸-¤| +| --nº| ·|i +il¤( ¤| ~¤¤ =n|¤ +| =-vl·|- +·-| -|t-|
t+ .
Ajay was appointed a marketing head of 'Alfa Enterprise' manufacturers of
toothpaste and toothbrushes. His target sale was 2000 units a month. Apart
from thinking about various channels of distribution to achieve the target he
himself started visiting schools in backward areas. He found that even after
taking various steps and counselling, some school children had not started
brushing their teeth. He investigated and found that they could not afford to
buy toothbrush and toothpaste. So with due permission he started donating
200 toothbrushes and toothpastes every month to the school.
(i) Identify the channel of distribution 'Ajay' would adopt for distribution
of toothpaste and toothbrushes and justify it by giving one reason.
(ii) State any two values which Ajay wants to communicate to the
society.
+º '¤¤l¤ ¤|l÷ª = n|ª- n ¤·|-·i t|-i t -·||l¤ :== -¤·||+-|~| +| ¤t- n|·| t+' :=
+·|- + =··| n -¤·||+-|~| +| ¤|l÷ª + l+-ti -i- n|·|| +| --nº| +il¤(+
.
'Though branding adds to the cost, it provides several advantages to the
consumers'. In the light of the statement, state any three advantages of
branding to customers. 4
+- =ªa- vl+¤| + -·º|| +| --nº| +il¤(+
State the steps in the organising process.
zc '~l·|+|· ~-·º|' (¤ 'l¤+·i+·º|' n l---lnlº|- + ~|·||· ¤· ~-·|· +il¤(· :
:~| -ªz¤;
:¤| -|z;
:=| lª·|l-; -·||
page 135
Business Studies- XII
:·| v¶l-+
Distinguish between 'Delegation' and 'Decentralisation' on the basis of
the following:
(a) Purpose;
(b) Scope;
(c) Status; and
(d) Nature.
z+ '·i·|+|ni- l-¤z| l-º|¤' +| +¤| ~·| t· ·i·|+|ni- l-¤z| l-º|¤ +| ¤·||l¤- +·-
¤|ni l+-ti -i- +|·+| +| --nº| +il¤(+ :
What is meant by 'Long-term Investment Decision ? State any three factors
which affect the long term investment decision.
zz ·¤¤=|¤ + ·l·º+|º| = -¤·||+-| =·-|º| + nt·¤ + l+-ti -|· l¤-·~| +| ¤º|-
+il¤(+ :
Explain any four points of importance of consumer protection from the
point of view of business.
z. (= ¤|- +|·º|| +| ¤º|- +il¤( ¤| ¤t ª¤·º +·- t l+ ¤¤·| l·-¤l-l·- nt-¤¤¸º| t|-|
¤| ·t| t+ :
Describe any five reasons which clarify that management is gaining
importance day-by-day.
z: +|º - (+ ~|·z| ¤|l·- l+¤| l+ l¤¤|n¤ + ¤--| + ln( =·|i l¤¤|n¤| n '¤|-i
z|lz+·º| ¤z' :¤|º· -¤¸·i+|¤·| ~¤z¤ t|-| -|lt( +¤|l+ · :
(i) =|n|-¤-· =n|¤ ¤i¤- +i ªº|¤-|| + ¤l- ~l·|+ l-l-- t ·
(ii) ¤l-¤|ªi +in-| ¤· ¤|-i z|lz+·º| ¤z l-ln- +·- + ln( -¤¤¤-- -+-i+|
+| l¤+|= t| ·t| t+
(iii) ~|¤ n ¤lz t| ·ti t ~|· ¤-- ·|· ¤· ·|i z|z ¤|-i ¤i ·t t+
¤|-i z|lz+·º| ·¤¤=|¤ + ¤l- =·+|· ·|i ~¤-| =+|·|·n+ ·l·º+|º| l·º|| ·ti
t+-¤·|+- l¤¤·º| = ¤l+-¤| +| -·¸·|- +·- t( ·¤|¤=|l¤+ ¤¤|¤·º| + l¤l·|--
~|¤|n| +| ¤t-|l-(+ :
page 136
Business Studies- XII
The court passed an order that all schools must have water purifier for the
school children as :
(i) Society in general is more concerned about quality of life;
(ii) Innovative techniques are being developed to manufacture water
purifier at competitive rates :
(iii) Incomes are rising and children at home are also drinking purified
water. The Government is also showing positive attitude towards the
water purifier business.
Identify the different dimensions of business environment by quoting
from the above details.
z: l-z||-- +¤÷| +i (+ +-¤-i n ÷|¤·+º· t ~|· ~¤-i +¤÷| +i (+ :+|: + ¤+|· n|n
= ¤ª ¤-|- +i ¤|¤-| ¤-| ·t| t+ -=- ¤t l-º|¤ ln¤| l+ := l-n|º|i :+|: +i ª·||¤-|
¤t -÷i=| + l+=i ª|niº| -|z n +·ª| ¤t| n|ª| + ¤|= +|¤ + ¤t- +n =~¤=· t
~|· ¬n ¤t- +n ·· ¤· -¤n··| t+ -=- ¤t ·|i =|-| +i ¤ª·|| (¤ lªz¤| +| =n|-
~¤=· ¤·|- l+( ¤|(ª+
:=+ ln( ¤t l¤+¤, nº||, +¤ ¤ -·¤|·- + ln( -|· l¤l·|-- ~·¤-| -|t-| ·||+ -=-
(+ l¤a|¤- l·¤| ~|· l¤l·|-- -¤- ¤·i-||( =-¤-- +·- + ¤|· ¤l- ¤· ·= --ni·¤|·|
+i ¤º-i +i+
(i) ¤º-i l+( t( --ni·¤|·| n = =¤¬·a --ni·¤|· + -¤- + ln( ~¤-|( ¤|-
¤|n ~ªn -i- -·º|| +| ¤t-|- +· --+| --nº| +il¤(+
(ii) (= ·| n¸-¤| +| ·|i ¤t-|l-( l¤-t := l-n|º|i :+|: +i ª·||¤-| ,|·| l-z||-- =n|¤
+| =-¤l·|- +·-| -|t-| t+ :
Nishant, the director of a garments company, is planning to manufacture
bags for the utilization of waste material from one of his garment units. He
has decided that this manufacturing unit will be set-up in a rural area of
Orissa where people have very few job-opportunities and labour is
available at very low rates. He has also thought of giving equal
opportunities to men and women.
For this he wants four different heads for Sales, Accounts, Purchase and
page 137
Business Studies- XII
Production. He gives an advertisement and shortlists ten candidates per
post after conducting different selection-tests.
(i) Identify and state the next three steps for choosing the best candidate
out of the candidates short-listed.
(ii) Also identify two values which Nishant wants to communicate to the
society by setting up this manufacturing unit.
ze 'l-¤|¤- (¤ l-¤zº| ¤¤·| + ~¤·|++·º|i¤ l,¤·n t+' +=· :
'Planning and Controlling are inseparable twins of management.' How?
z. '=·|i =ªa-| n ¤·||¤i =¤·|º| n ¤|·||( ~l·|+ ¤| +n ~z| n l¤¤n|- ·t-i t+' :-
¤|·||~| +| ·¸· +·- + l+-ti ¤· -¤|¤| +| --nº| +il¤(+ e
vFkok
'¤¤¤-|+ =ªa- n ¤t- = +|¤| +| =-¤-- +·+ (+ nt·¤¤¸º| ·|¸ln+| l-·||-| t+' (=
l+-ti ¤· +|¤| +| --nº| +il¤(+
'The barriers to effective communication exist in all organisations to a
greater or lesser degree.' State any six measures to overcome these barriers.
OR
'The Supervisor performs a very important role in an organisation by
performing multiple functions.' State any six such functions.
zº 'n|·||z| l-º|¤' = +¤| ~l·|¤|¤ t· (+ +-¤-i + n|·||z| l-º|¤ +| ¤·||l¤- +·- ¤|n
l+-ti -|· +|·+| +| =n¤|
+ evFkok
'l¤-|i¤ l-¤|¤-' +| +¤| ~·| t· l¤-|i¤ l-¤|¤- + nt·¤ ¤· ¤+|z| ÷|n- ¤|n l+-ti
¤|- l¤-·~| +| =n¤|
+What is meant by 'Dividend Decision'? Explain any four factors which
affect the dividend decision of a company.
page 138
Business Studies- XII
OR
What is meant by 'Financial Planning'? Explain any five points which
highlight its importance.
z- z|¤· ¤|¤|· + l+-ti -|· +|¤| +| ¤º|- +il¤(+
vFkok
n:| ¤|¤|· + l---lnlº|- ¤nº|| +| ¤º|- +il¤( ·
:+| ¤|--| ·|lz|
:º|| º¤·i l¤n
:ª| ¤|lº|lº¤+ ¤z
:·|| ¤-- ¤n|º| ¤z
Explain any four functions of stock exchange.
OR
Explain the following money market instruments :
(a) Call Money
(b) Treasury Bill and
(c) Commercial Paper
(d) Certificate of Deposit
.c ¤¤l+-+ l¤+¤ +i ~¤·||·º|| +| =n¤|
-·|| (+ ~-¤ l¤+-| + l+-ti -|· ªº|| +| ¤º|- +il¤(+ e
vFkok
(+ -·¤|· + n¸-¤ l-·||·º| +| ¤·||l¤- +·- ¤|n l+-ti -|· +|·+| +| =n¤|
+Explain the concept of personal selling and any four qualities of a good
salesman.
OR
Explain any four factors which affect the determination of the price of a
product.
page 139
Business Studies- XII
SOLUTION
Ans1 Recruitment may be defined as the process of searching for prospective
employees and stimulating them to apply for jobs in the organization.
Ans2 Motivation is called a complex process because any type of motivation
may not have a uniform effect on all the members.
OR
Motivation is called a complex process because individuals are
heterogeneous in their expectations, perception and reactions.
Ans3 Directing takes place at every/all levels of management.
Ans4 When deviations go beyond the acceptable range especially in important
areas, immediate managerial attention is required so that the deviations do
not occur again.
OR
If the deviation cannot be corrected through managerial action the
standards may have to be revised.
Ans5 If the growth prospects for a concern are higher, it will require larger
amount of Working Capital to meet higher production and sales targets.
Ans6 The primary objective of Financial Management is Wealth maximization
i.e. to Maximize the market price of the shares.
Ans7 Money market is a market for short term funds which deals in monetary
assets whose period of maturity is up to one year.
Ans8 Consequence of a well performed a Allocative Function of financial
market (Any one)
i) The rate of return offered to the households would be higher.
ii) Scarce resources are allocated to those firms which have the highest
productivity for the economy.
Ans9 Marketing is called a social process because it involves interaction of
people.
page 140
Business Studies- XII
OR
Marketing is called a social process because it focuses on needs and wants
of people.
Ans10 Main focus of selling concept is on the existing product while main focus
of marketing concept is on Customer needs.
Ans11 State commission
Ans12 Right to safety
Ans13 Espirit de corps.
? Management should promote team spirit of unity and harmony among
employees.
? This will give rise to sprit of mutual trust and belongingness among
team members and will minimize the need for using penalties.
Ans14 HARMONY NOT DISCORD
? The principle emphasizes that there should be complete harmony
between the management and the workers.
? This requires mental revolution on the part of both management and
the workers. Both management and the workers should transform
their thinking.
? Management should share gains of the company if any with the
workers and should work hard and be willing to embrace change for
the good of the company.
Ans15 Objective
? An objective is the end which the management seeks to achieve.
? An objective needs to be expressed in specific/ quantitative terms and
is to be achieved within a given time period.
? It is set by the top management and focuses on broad general issues.
Ans16 (a) Planning is continuous because once a plan is framed it is
implemented and then it is followed by another plan and so on.
page 141
Business Studies- XII
(b) Planning is futuristic because it involves looking ahead and preparing
for the future to meet future events effectively to the best advantage of
the organization.
Ans17 (i) The channel of distribution, Ajay would adopt (any one)
? Indirect channel
? One level channel
? Two level channel
? Three level channel
? Longer channels.
Because he is distributing consumer goods.
(ii) Values which Ajay wants to communicate to the Society are (any two)
? Charity
? Concern for the underprivileged.
? Hygiene
? Sensitivity towards health
Ans18 Though branding adds to the cost, it provides several advantages to
the consumers. In the light of the statement, advantages of branding to
customers are:
(i) It helps in product identification because if a customer is satisfied with
the product, he need not make a close inspection every time he has to
buy the product.
(ii) It ensures quality because if there is any deviation in the quality, the
customers can have recourse to the manufacture which builds up their
confidence.
(iii) It is a status symbol and the consumers of branded products feel proud
of using them adding to their level of satisfaction.
page 142
Business Studies- XII
Ans19 Steps in the organizing process are:
(i) Identification and division of work into manageable activities so that
duplication is avoided.
(ii) Departmentalization to group together activities of a similar nature to
facilitate specialization.
(iii)Assignment of duties to job positions for effective performance.
(iv) Establishing reporting relationships so that each individual knows
who he has to take orders from and to whom he is accountable.
Ans 20 Difference between delegation and decentralization:
Basis Delegation Decentralization
(a) purpose To lessen the burden of the manager. To increase the role
of the subordinates
in the organization
by giving them
more autonomy.
(b) scope It has a narrow It has a wide scope
scope as it is limited to as it implies
superior and his immediate extension of
subordinate. delegation to the
lowest level of
management.
(c) Status It is a process followed to It is the result of
share tasks. the policy decision
of the top
management.
(d) Nature It is compulsory because no It is optional
individual can perform all tasks because it is done
on his own. at the discretion of
the top mana-
gement.
page 143
Business Studies- XII
Ans 21 The long term investment decision means committing the funds on a long
term basis on fixed assets or various projects of an organization. Factors
which affect the long term investment decision are:
The following are the factors affecting the long term Investment decision
(any three):
(a) Cash flows of the project during the life of an investment affect the
long term investment decision.
(b) The rate of return of the project based on expected return and the risk
involved affects the long term investment decision.
(c) The investment criteria involved must be considered before taking the
long term investment decision.
(d) Nature of business as a trading concern needs lower fixed capital than
a manufacturing concern since it does not require to purchase plant
and machinery etc.
(e) Scale of operations as a large scale organization requires higher
investment in fixed assets than a small scale organization.
(f) Choice of technique as a capital intensive organization requires higher
investment in plant and machinery as compared to a labour intensive
organization.
Ans 22 Importance of consumer protection from the point of view of
business:
(1) Long term Interest- Consumer's faith in an enterprise is of prime
importance as if business fails to provide safety the consumers, they
will shift over to competitors.
(2) Use of society resources- Business is a trustee of society's resources
and they must be used effectively to satisfy the needs of consumers
(3) Social responsibility- The social objectives arise because of several
stakeholders of business such as consumers, employees, suppliers,
society etc and the business can't ignore the interest of these groups.
(4) Government Invention- The importance of the consumer protection
also arises from the fact that Govt. is committed to the welfare of
page 144
Business Studies- XII
general public who are consumer also. Over the years, the Govt. has
passed several laws for protection of consumers.
Ans 23 Importance of management:
1. Help in achieving group goals: Success of an organization can be
measured in terms of group goals. Management creates team work
and coordination in the group. It reconciles the objectives of the group
with those of its members.
2. Increases efficiency: Management works out ways to attain
efficiency and effectiveness in its activities by planning, organizing,
staffing, directing and controlling. Its aim is to reduce the cost and
increase profitability and productivity through proper utilization of
resources.
3. Creates a dynamic organization: An enterprise has to adapt itself to
changing demands of the market and society. Management helps
people to adapt to these changes of complex and dynamic
environment quickly without any resistance.
4. Help in achieving personal objectives: Every manager tries to
harmonise individual goals with organization goals. Through
effective motivation and leadership, management develops team sprit
among employees which increases production. Thus employees earn
more by producing more which fulfils the objectives of both the
groups.
5. Help in development of society: Managers work for the
development of the society by proving qualitative goals and services,
creating employment opportunities and adopting new techniques of
production. This increases the national income and living standards of
the people. (Any other point with correct explanation, full credit will
be given where ½ mark is for heading and ½ mark is for explanation).
Ans 24 1- Legal environment: The court passed an order that all the schools
must have water purifier for the school children.
2- Social environment : Society in general is more concerned about
quality of life.
3- Technological environment: Innovative techniques are being
page 145
Business Studies- XII
developed to manufacture water purifier at competitive rates.
4- Economic environment : Incomes are rising and children at home
are also drinking purified water.
5- Political environment : The government is also showing positive
attitude towards the water purifier business. (1/2 mark is for
identifying the dimension and 1/2 mark for quoting the line).
Ans25 (i) The next three steps for choosing the best candidate are:
a) Employment Interview : Which is conducted to evaluate the
applicant's suitability for the job.
b) Reference and background checks : For the purpose of verifying the
information and gaining additional information.
c) Selection decision : From among the candidates : who pass the
tests, interviews and reference checks. (Each point careers i make and
½ marks should be deducted if sequence is incorrect)
(ii) The values which Nishant wants to communicate to the society are
(any two)
a) Equality
b) Development of rural area
c) Providing job opportunities in rural area
d) Optimum utilization of resources
(Full credit will be given for any other justified response of values)
Ans 26 Planning and controlling are inseparable twins of management
because:
1) Without planning there is no basis for controlling:- Controlling
requires standards with which performance can be measured and
evaluated. These standards are laid down in planning.
2) Planning is meaningless without controlling:- Planning sets the
standards, controlling observes the deviations from the standards and
initiates corrective actions.
page 146
Business Studies- XII
3) Planning is an intellectual process involving thinking and analysis to
discover and prescribe an appropriate course of action for achieving
Objectives Controlling on the other hand checks whether decisions
have been translated into desired actions. Planning is thus prescribing
and controlling is evaluative.
4) Planning and controlling both are forward looking:- Planning is
future oriented function as it involves looking in advance and making
policies for future. The controlling function makes sure that in future
actual performance and output match with planned performance so it
is forward looking.
5) Planning and controlling both are looking back- We book back to
the performance which is already achieved by the employees and
compare it with plan. (Each point carries with mark)
Ans 27 Measures to overcome communication barriers. (any six)
(1) Clarify the ideas before communicating.
(2) Communicate according to the needs of the receiver.
(3) Consult others before communicating.
(4) Beware of the language, tone and content of the message.
(5) Convey things of help and value to listeners.
(6) Ensure proper feedback by asking questions regarding the message
conveyed.
(Any other correct point will be given credit)
OR
Functions performed by a Supervisor (Any Six)
(1) Supervisor maintains day to day contact and friendly relations with
workers.
(2) Supervisor acts as a link between workers and management by
conveying management ideas to the workers and workers problems to
the management.
page 147
Business Studies- XII
(3) He maintains group unity among workers by sorting out their internal
differences.
(4) He provides good on the job training to the workers to build an
efficient team.
(5) He builds up high morale among workers through good leadership.
(6) He gives feedback to the workers after analyzing their work.
(Each point carries I mark, full credit shall be given for any other
suitable point)
Ans 28 Dividend decision is the decision about the proportion of profit to be
distributed among the shareholders and to be retained in business.
Factors which affect the dividend decision of the company are:
(1) Current earnings- Generally companies distribute higher rate of
dividend when earnings are substantially higher as compared to
previous year.
(2) Stability of dividend- Stable dividend policy ensures regular income
to shareholders and has a favorable impact on the value of shares and
reduces uncertainty from the point of view of shareholders as they are
assured of a reasonable rate of return.
(3) Liquidity or cash flow position- The Company must have sufficient
cash available with it to pay dividend. If the company has liquidity
problem; it may have to skip dividend for a year.
(4) Shareholders expectations- Small shareholders prefer current
income whereas big wealthy shareholders invest in shares for earning
capital gains. Management has to consider the expectations of both
the group of shareholders.
OR
The process of estimating the fund requirements of a business and
specifying the sources of funds is called financial planning.
OR
page 148
Business Studies- XII
Financial planning is the preparation of a financial blueprint of an
organization's future operations.
Importance of Financial Planning:
1. Financial planning provides policies and procedures for the sound
administration of finance function.
2. Financial planning results in preparation of plans for the future. Thus
new projects could be undertaken smoothly.
3. It ensures required funds from various sources for the smooth conduct
of business.
4. It achieves a balance between inflow and outflow of funds. Adequate
liquidity is ensured throughout the year.
5. It serves as the basis of financial control. The management attempts to
ensure utilization of funds in tune with the financial plans.
Ans 29 Four functions of stock exchange are:-
1. Providing liquidity to securities- Stock exchanges provides a ready
market for the securities issued by various institutions. The investors
can convert their money into securities and vice-versa very quickly.
2. Pricing of securities- It helps in determining the price of various
Securities. The prices at which transactions take place are recorded
and made public in the form of market quotations which helps the
investors to know current market prices.
3. Mobilization of savings- It helps in mobilizations of surplus fund of
individual firms for investment in securities.
4. Safety of transactions- It ensures fair dealing and safety of funds.
The members of stock exchange have to operate under certain rules
which seeks to check over-trading, illegitimate speculation and
manipulation.
(Or any other function of stock exchange can be explained)
OR
page 149
Business Studies- XII
(a) Call Money
? It is the method by which banks borrow from each other to be able
to maintain the cash reserve ratio.
? It is repayable on demand, with a maturity period of one day to
fifteen days.
(b) Treasury bill
? It is an instrument issued by Reserve Bank of India on behalf of the
Central Government to meet its short term requirements of funds.
? It is highly liquid, has an assured yield and negligible risk of
default.
(c) Commercial Paper
? It is an instrument issued by large and creditworthy companies to
raise short term funds at lower rates of interest than the market
rates.
? It is an unsecured, negotiable promissory note with a fixed
maturity period.
(d) Certificate of Deposit
? A certificate of deposit is a short term, unsecured, negotiable
instrument issued by commercial banks or development financial
institutions to individuals, corporations and companies.
? It is issued during periods of tight liquidity when the deposit
growth of banks is slow but the demand for credit is high.
Ans 30 Personal selling involves oral presentation of message in the form of
conversation with one or more prospective customers for the purpose
of making sales.
Qualities of good salesman:-
1. Personality - A good physical appearance is an asset for a salesman as
it creates good impression and self- confidence to salesman.
page 150
Business Studies- XII
2. Social qualities - A salesman should be social and have the ability to
mix up with the people. He should be polite, humble and courteous
with the customers.
3. Mental qualities - An effective salesman must possess certain mental
qualities like- imagination, foresightedness, presence of mind, strong
memory and initiative.
4. Communication ability - Communication skill is an asset for the
salesman. He should able to speak freely, clearly and in a well pitched
voice.
(Or any other quality like vocational skills, Patience, dependability
etc)
OR
Four factors which affect the determination of the price of product:-
1. Cost of product - While fixing the price of a product the cost of
production and distribution must be considered which should be
covered to avoid losses.
2. Demand of product - The market demand for a product has a big
impact on its pricing. If the demand is inelastic higher price may be
fixed and if the demand is elastic, the firm should not fix higher prices.
3. Extent of competition - Competition in the market is a crucial factor
in price determination. The price charged for similar product by
competition determines the price of our product.
4. Govt. Regulations - The maximum sale price of some products is
fixed by Govt. No firm can charge beyond the statutory price.
(Or any other factor likes types of customers, pricing objectives,
marketing methods etc.)
page 151
Business Studies- XII
doc_706094060.pdf